Home

MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual

1. File name ane class Model class ScoreDieplay class Add Files of type fell Files ng Cancel 5 The new file s are added to the selected directory node Carousels EI ER Carousel Session 1 Carousel E i MHP Object Carousel ID 1 PID 100 0 0064 a Carousel Contents 5 tems 70 20 kbytes HA Model class lA ScoreDisplay class 7 56 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Creating a New Directory 1 Highlight the node in the carousel where the directory is to be created In this screenshot the new directory is the first object to be created Carousels eS E Carousel Session 1 Carousel A MHP Object Carousel ID 1 PID 10 H BS Carousel Contents 1 items 0 by w Mev Eradtani Import Elementar Streanisik New Carousel j Source Director FA Delete Object a ae Carousel Wizard Ctrl s Name in Cargus 5 d Carousel Properties Taclade in Carni 3 Contents 7a Empty Carousel 2 Synchronise Add Filets Add Directory Pen Directory 1i w Delete Carousel Delete All Carousels a Move bo Collection 3 Enter the name of the new directory and select OK to create the directory Enter New Directory Name x tegt T Cancel MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 37 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation 4 The new directory is created below the
2. ekkonis Tekbroriz COI Tektronix PES Analyser 7 Multiplexer t Tektronix Release Notes Initial Appearance Once the program has started and is ready for use it will open a Main Window that looks as follows ARP M pi m Fle Hen dgis Arden Hds cor Si eee a S ls a a EE ma mT seo Pece sa Use the View menu to select which standard will be used to interpret transport streams Then open a transport stream file or import a multiplex configuration file MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 3 Multiplexer Getting Started Initial Menu Options When the application is opened users are presented with options relevant only to Opening new or existing multiplex files Options that are not relevant at this time are inactive grayed out File Menu Options Table 8 1 lists the options available in the initial File menu Table 8 1 File menu options Command New Open Examine TS Close Import Export Export As 1 lt filename gt 2 lt filename gt 3 lt filename gt 4 lt filename gt Exit Function Opens new multiplex configuration file Opens an MPEG file for use The program opens the file selection dialog box allowing you to choose the required file Opens the Examine TS window which allows a brief summary of the stream to be viewed before it is subjected to full analysis Currently disabled see page 8 15 Opens a previously saved multiplex config
3. ks Active PIDs PIDs BIOP Object Directory ARIB Directory BIOP Object ARIB Resource Table Transport Packet Audio Stream Video Stream Data Other Stream MHP Applications HTML Application MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views Key to Node Overlays Overlays are used to signify additional information about nodes the overlays may be used individually or in combination x Absent Objects Objects referenced but not found for example directory object not found The path in which the absent object is recognized is also marked G E Unresolved Objects When an object is found during analysis but its key is not referred to in the Service Gateway it is displayed under an Unresolved Objects node i Boot Class Objects Boot class items are identified The path in which the boot class resides is also indicated F Manual Signaling Indicates that a PID has been subjected to the manual signaling process used in the carousel and PID views only MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 29 Carousel Analyzer Views Programs Services View Menu Bar View gt Program Services Toolbar af The Programs Services view gives a static DVB ARIB service or MPEG program centric view of the transporst stream contents Each program is listed together with the service name for DVB ARIB Expanding a program item will reveal its elemental PIDs and any object or dat
4. S _ S S S SSS MPEG 2 4udio 330 0M 59 21 59 20 0 156687 E 4 Tektronix I 0 00 59 76 5976 F MPEG 2 Video 410 0 00 59 76 59 76 10 066074 SSS MPEG 2 Audio 420 0 0 59 25 59 25 0 282013 EE MPEG 2 Audio 450 0M 55 24 5923 0 219359 SSS Sy 5 Tektronix 0 00 59 82 59 82 F MPEG 2 Video 510 000 69 82 59 82 15 168662 MPEG 2 Audio 520 0 00 59 31 59 30 0 407360 CE MPEG 2 Audio 530 00m 5928 5927 0 282012 Null ao 000 5984 59 84 2 803628 SSS The following data is displayed for each component of the stream Program Description PID Start and Stop time in numerical and graphical form Length and Bit rate The timing and bit rate elements of this information are also available in the Program Stream Properties dialog box See Program Content dialog box page 8 35 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Views Scaling Bar The Scaling bar which is displayed at the top of the Component Duration view allows you to select the portion of the transport stream that is to be displayed On Opening Showing fo o0 159 83 Current 0 00 eee r ooo Stream limits ame Pointer position Display limits y m Showing 15 00 135 00 Current 25 00 rr A After Adjustment Pointer The Stream limits bar represents the full extent of the stream The Display limits bar dark portion indicates the portion of the stream that is currently displayed in the body of the view The Displa
5. Transport Stream Description Table TSDT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x02 and a table_id value of 0x03 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Getting Started Table 10 1 Icons used for MPEG 2 ARIB DVB and ATSC formats Cont Icon Element type Network Information Table NIT One or more transport packets with a PID value specified by the network PID in the PAT Conditional Access Table CAT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x01 and a table _id value of 0x0001 Program Map Table PMT ca One or more transport packets with a PID value specified by the pro gram _map PID inthe PAT and a table _ id value of 0x02 Program Clock Reference PCR One or more transport packets with a PID value specified by the PCR_PID in the PMT and a PCR flag value of 1 Video elementary stream One or more transport packets with a PID value specified by the elementary PID in the PMT and a stream_type value of 0x01 0x02 or 0x10 A lock symbol appears in the icon when the transport_scrambling_control value is set to 01 Audio elementary stream One or more transport packets with a PID value specified by the elementary PID in the PMT and a stream_type value of 0x03 0x04 or 0x11 a A lock symbol appears in the icon when the transport_scrambling_control value is set to 01 i i Audio AAC Audio AC3 ATSC format One or more transport packets with a PID valu
6. 7 52 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation The Add Directory dialog box is displayed Add Directory OS Carousel Generator Test Specification snake I Add Contained Files T Include Topmost Directory Cancel I Add Subdirectories W Include in Synchronisation Desktop EE My Computer File Folder O A 32 Floppy A Z File Folder Egg System C Bg Tek stuff D o BAA Carousel Generator Test Speci The Add Directory allows the user to select any available directory The directory path is shown in the top field the most recently accessed directo ries are available in the drop down list The adjacent checkboxes have the following functions Add Contained Files All files contained in the selected directory and any subdirectories if Add Subdirectories is enabled will be added to the carousel Add Subdirectories All subdirectories of the selected directory will be added to the carousel Include Topmost Directory The selected directory will be added to the carousel not just the files and or subdirectories Include in Synchronization The selected directory will by synchronized with its source directory see page 7 65 3 Select the required directory and enable the required checkbox options Select OK to add the directory to the carousel MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 53 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation 4 The new directory
7. Dockedta MD Child as Masimizegd l v Restored tec Fl NOTE When a window is docked it can be dragged and dropped around the workspace when it is at an edge it will adopt a docked position MDI Children do not attempt to dock with the edges of the workspace 6 22 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Menus and Controls Version Size Pane Display Most of the views described later use a split pane arrangement to display the view data and related version file size and PID information The information is displayed in the right pane However the default arrangement when opening the view is that the right pane is closed To open the pane pass the cursor over the right edge of the view until it changes to the split pane cursor then move the dividing bar to the desired position 1 OC _abcd mpg Object Carousels Fe Object Carousels fWersion Size CE PI iret Object Carousel IO 3 0x3 D5110 O 00 PIO 150 0x36 40 184 butes H E Serice Gateway of 0 b Content Management The principles employed in displaying the information in each workspace window are applicable to all windows although the content will vary from window to window Tree Structure Structures are represented by tree diagrams with the root node or highest level component at the top Components that contain more informa tion underneath them in the structure are indicated by a box Clicking on the
8. Ta D1 using assoc tag 100 emaye AA Colection Selected Ol Oo B E Assoc tag Assoc tag 100 on PID 100 0K64 Cycle time met 100 ANCE Highlighting any of the DII nodes will display the PID associations in the Selected DII panel Select New DII to create a new DII using default values The default Association Tag to use is decided by first checking if an existing DII uses the DSI tag If so this tag is used otherwise the tag of the first DII in the list is used MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Selected Dil Name Assoc tag Cycle time ms This is a user allocated name for this DII The name does not appear anywhere in the generated stream only within the Carousel Generator This is the list of all the currently defined Association tags listed for this carousel Assigning a different Asso ciation Tag to the DII effectively changes the PID that the DII messages will be carried on Association tags can be added from the PID Settings screen This option sets the time taken for this DII to be re peated For example DIIs referencing boot classes may be given shorter cycle times to speed up the boot pro Cess Range 1 ms to 3600 s To associate a collection with a DII first create the DII giving it a meaningful name set the Association tag and Cycle time of the DII and close this dialog box On the Collections tab of the
9. 6 54 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views Bitrate View Menu Bar View gt Bitrate Toolbar E This structure view charts the bit rate of a set of transport entities for example BIOP message PID module The bit rate calculation is a rolling average For any transport entity the sum of the transport packets that contribute to that entity in each 100 ms time slice are summed The average is calculated every 100 ms using the last 10 time slices that is the bit rate is the average over the last second In some cases a choice is offered between displaying the bit rate of the selected element or a composite bit rate of the selected element and its subsidiary nested elements NOTE In calculating bit rates Carousel Analyzer returns to the stream file For large files the calculation may take an appreciable amount of time E OC_abcd mpg Bitrates Of f Section table_id 59 0x36 PID 150 0x56 DSMCC _UN MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 55 Carousel Analyzer Views The y axis is automatically scaled to accommodate the maximum bit rate The name of the element from which the bit rate is derived and the related graph are linked by color a line of the same color is displayed to the right of the element name If the bit rate for a second element is requested it is displayed on the same graph as shown in the following illustration E OC_abcd mpg Bitrates Of
10. Fixed ES Rate Default Rate Figure 10 6 Clock Dialog Box Clock Source Sets which clock will be used as the reference for the stream output You can select the desired clock source from the following settings Internal uses the internal clock of the MPEG Player as the clock reference 10 22 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Menus and Controls External Reference Reference Frequency Ext Ref allows you to input a signal on the Reference Clock Input connector for use as the clock reference When you select the button to the right of the ExtRef box the External Reference dialog box is displayed 10MHz ISDB T IFFT Clock 8 126984MHz 27MHz2 Cancel m 10 MHz Selects a 10 MHz signal on the Reference Clock Input connector 27 MHz Selects a 27 MHz signal on the Reference Clock Input connector ISDB T IFFT Clock Selects a signal corresponding to the IFFT sample clock rate 8 126984 MHz on the Reference Clock Input connector Select the required option Data Rate MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Ext P Clk external parallel clock allows you to input a clock signal on the Reference Clock Input connector for use as the parallel clock Ext S Clk external serial clock allows you to input a clock signal on the Reference Clock Input connector for use as the serial clock Sets the clock rate for the transport stream output You can enter the clock r
11. al zi 40 4U Pg ge ee OO ee ee al a a J Section table_id 59 0x36 PID 150 0x96 DSMCC_UM f Section table_id 60 0x3 PID 150 0x96 DSMCC_DDB Any number of element bit rates can be displayed each will be a separate color 6 56 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views Inspecting Bitrates Saving Copying MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual It is possible to zoom in on an area of the graph in order to inspect the bit rate in detail To zoom in on the central 50 of the displayed graph use the Graph gt Zoom gt Zoom In menu option or the Toolbar button G or tab key This action can be repeated To zoom in on any area of the bit rate graph drag the mouse while holding the left button to highlight the area required When the mouse button is released the highlighted area will be enlarged to fill the graph area WOT ILL Dt UAL il pip C oO C a t t o0 ee e o N o e o e a g t o Ao ao T aan Doom og SC So t rr r T e ror r r rm r Cy Time s The menu option Graph gt Zoom gt Zoom Out Toolbar EL or shift tab key will zoom out one step at a time a step being the previous zoom in actions The menu option Graph gt Zoom gt Show All Toolbar will redisplay the graph with no zoom factor applied The graph can be saved or copied in text format or as a picture file JPEG or bitmap Menu Option Description Graph gt Save Save the grap
12. A horizontal pni E lefhprg ae E point pag right prg up prng a vertikal png Carousels fE Collections 7 66 Carousels pA aj x 100 00064 Prog 1 Pe pal a ar kbytes al x Collections List 1 Carousel a Collections for MAP Object Carousel ID 1 PIQ 100 Frog 1 Collection GEA lt lt Service Gateway gt E snake H g shake A Controller class vow G amePane class z Model class E ScoreDisplay class wo F Snakexlet class G E Collection oO 44 aermice Gateway lt Gamed in Collection E w anake cared in Collection gt a res snake ey down png z edge png A horizontal prig oe left prag i point prg 2 5 z riant prg up png iow r wertikal png Eo Carousels i Collections MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Collections can be viewed by selecting the Collections tab in the Session window EM Demo xml Tektronix Carousel Generator Oy x File Edit wiew Session Player Tools Help s Reba Ble er ES Collections List 1 Program 1 Carousel Colection Name Colectioni S B Collections for MHP Object Carousel ID 1 PID 100 Holds Service Gateway Yes H E lt lt Service Gateway gt gt Weighting mie s com Compression 0 Na Compression 2 Using DIT DII 1 using assoc tag 100
13. Displays the program version number and license number MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 13 Hex Editor Color Coding The Hex Editor displays and provides editing facilities for the contents of the current packet in both hexadecimal representation and ASCII characters Displayed Packet Packet Identifier Matches packet numbers of the currently in TS Analyser and displayed packet transportation packet shown in PES Analyser Displayed Paccet 146279 PID 32 Tektronix aid O010 eal 0030 UU OO60 jigi OOO OOO UU O040 F OOEO F OOO Jd Hexadecimal Editor ASCII Editor Displays each byte as a pair of Displays each byte as hexadecimal digits which may an AS Cll character be elected and edited Unprintable characters and periods are shown s periods dats Color coding is used to show the footprint of various header fields in both the hexadecimal and ASCII views The packet payload and any Reed Solomon data is Shown in black The bytes of the packet header field are shown in magenta text MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 15 Transport Stream Editor Hex Editor 9 16 Displayed Packet 1462 5 PID 32 Tektronix z 12 00 O02 BO 0 oo 04 fre Z 4 byte Packet EF FF FF FF Header colour re Pr oor PE coded magenta When an adaptation field is present it is shown by blue colored text Displayed Packet 94892 PID 160 Tektr
14. MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 11 Multiplexer Getting Started Initial Stream Analysis The Navigator Tables view window is opened as soon as a file is opened or imported The program now starts to analyze the file with the loaded scripts to determine what tables are present As the file is analyzed the Top Levels of the Transport Structure diagram are drawn in the Navigator window The rightmost pane in the Status Bar at the bottom of the program window shows the progress of analysis Filter OFF DYE Standard Demultiplexing B313 Complete a E Filter OFF DVB TS A ate 24 1 283M bits Duration 31 87453 Standard Ready Files that are imported require less processing since they were analyzed in the session from which they were exported What to Do Next The file can now be manipulated to form a specification with which to synthesize a new transport stream Tables elementary streams and PIDs are viewed and selected via the Navigator views The components of any table selected in the Navigator views are viewed and selected via the Section View window Tables Programs and PIDs can be added and modified using the wizards provided or manually A selection of menu options are provided to facilitate manipulation of the data The Multiplex menu has options for inhibiting and reenabling enforcement of conformance to the selected standards Having manipulated the file a transport stream can be synthesized t
15. Table 8 6 Options menu options Command Display Filter Single Section View Program Wizard Transport Wizard MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Function Opens the SI Filter dialog box Selects single or multiple section view When disabled multiple section views can be opened Invokes the Program wizard Invokes the Transport wizard 8 17 Multiplexer Menus and Controls Multiplex menu options Window menu options Table 8 7 list the options available in the Multiplex menu Table 8 7 Multiplex menu options Command Start Stop Standard Mode Expert Mode Report Seamless Seamless Settings Function Starts the Multiplex Engine to synthesize a new transport stream file Aborts multiplexing The output file is closed and contains all of the data synthesized up to the point where the multiplex engine stopped This option is available only while the Multiplex Engine is running Enforces conformance to the selected standards when editing some fields that can be generated automatically Inhibits the above conformance checking so that non confor mant files may be created Provides the option of printing all or part of the transport structure to either a file or a printer When enabled the program specified in Seamless Settings is processed and made seamless Opens a dialog box in which the Make seamless parameters are specified Table 8 8 list the options available in
16. The Header Information Tab interprets the contents of the Packet Header shown in magenta text in the Hex Editor for ease of understanding and editing Adaptation Field Control Note 4 setting of O0 or 01 will disable all the field on the other tabbed pages O1 Payload Only ae The PID Value field displays and allows editing of the 13 bit PID as a decimal value The PID is packed into a pair of bytes with the Flags shown below FID Value 32 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 21 Transport Stream Editor Header Editor The Flags fields display the state of each binary flag in a check box Flags Transport Error Indicator I Payload Unit Start Indicator Transport Priority L 0 or false M 1 or true Click in the box to toggle the state of a flag The Continuity Count field displays the value of the four bit Continuity Count field in decimal Continuity Count 2 s To avoid any typing errors the drop down list allows selection of a different value The Transport Scrambling Control displays the two bit Transport Scrambling Control field as a binary bit pattern with a text description Transport Scrambling Control foo Mot Scrambled OO Not Scrambled O1 User defined 10 User defined 11 User defined Use the drop down list to select a different value 9 22 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Transport Stream Editor Header
17. descriptor tag 0x6F descriptor_length for i 0 i lt descriptor length i application type An entry for application type 1 will be present if any Java apps are defined in the carousel and an entry for type 2 will be present if any HTML apps are defined in the carousel n reserved_future_use X AIT version _number CG does not support table versioning all tables have version number 0 I ETSI TS 101 812 Multimedia Home Platform MHP specification section 10 7 1 The PMT signaling for MHP carousel carrying streams is very similar to that for DVB Object Carousels The only difference is that like DTT MHP defines additional content for the data_broadcast_id_descriptor s data_broadcast_id value and id_selector bytes The MHP data_broadcast_id value is 240 OxF0 and the id_selector bytes are as defined below Table 7 19 MHP object carousels ID selector MHP id_selector_bytes Syntax CG Value Comment for i 0 i lt descriptor_length 2 i application type An entry for application type 1 will be present if any Java apps are defined in the carousel and an entry for type 2 will be present if any HTML apps are defined in the carousel ETSI TS 101 812 section 10 7 2 2 7 88 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream DVB SI Tables The following SI is only generated when the session s SI type is set to DVB SI All user editable properti
18. modified Enumerated Value The Modify value dialog box displays the name of the field and the current value The value is shown as a number followed by the inter pretation of the governing standards Modify value EJ modulation mode fi analog pone In this screenshot the field being edited is a modulation mode and the current text is 1 analog Type in the number without any text for the required value When the changes are accepted Multiplexer will display the interpretation in the Section View window Alternatively click the down arrow to select the value from the drop down list MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Editing in Section View This displays a list of the defined values and their interpretation The list will vary depending upon the field being edited Modify value EJ modulation mode 7 Reserved 1 analog e SCTE mode 1 3 SCTE mode _ 4 ATSC 8 VSB 128 Modulation parameters 4 Cancel i Enter the required value and select OK to continue Multiplexer may open a simple context sensitive dialog box offering advice and or asking for more information or confirmation An error message is displayed if the number that was typed in requires more bits than are allocated to the field Date amp Time The Modify Time dialog box displays the name of the field It displays the time in both interpreted and raw formats only the int
19. A fullscreen bml A Datalogo png TA DATALOGO cl 00000090 65 6E oo00000A0 61 74 QOOOO00BO 6F 75 D New ARIB SI 1 cut mpg ARIB Module Resources E Resources teen Content Type multipart mixed boundary PanasonicMDC Content Length 16828 Content Encoding none Haee Content Location TA startup brl TA DATALOGO ct Base_btn png a green_bar png The ARIB Resource view will show only the resources contained in an individual module version to view resources from different module versions the user must use the Go To Next command or open a different version in ARIB Resource view 6 49 Carousel Analyzer Views Resource View Resources node Resource node Data 6 50 Menu Bar View gt Resources The ARIB Resources view displays a hierarchical and raw data interpretation of the resource structure in Data Carousels The raw data is presented in hexadeci mal and ASCII form in the adjacent pane gt New ARIB SI 1 cut mpg ARIB Module Resources Iof x E Resources gt ven Content Type multipart mied boundany PanasonicMDC ba Content Length 16028 H Content Encoding none teen Content Location H T startup bml D tull_screen bl cot Content Type text arib bmil charset euc jp twa Content Length 1101 owen ContentEncading jane wen Content Location fullscreen brl won typevalue text dats 40T ARIB cJ Datalogo png DATALOG
20. Clrerale iraisyort Stren 1 smake_test2 xml Exit Any open carousel session will be closed with an option to save MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 9 Carousel Generator Carousel Wizard The following screen is displayed ro Tektronix Carousel Generator Untitled Elle Edit wew Session Player Tools Help Eek aA Reb Her OQ gt RTE ax Edt C Session 0 P 0C I gt 7 e aE fi dle eis Transport Stream Bitrate 8 000 Mbits s PSI SI Type DVB SI Base for relative paths lt not using relative paths gt Carousels Collections The destination of the generated stream is set to the file ci temp carousel mpg Minimum Duration lt None gt Carousel Wizard There are D Carousels included in this Session 4 la 4 bA Summary Definition File Syntax 4 TS Generation Tektronix Carousel Generator For a new session or adding a carousel to an existing session the wizard can now be invoked 7 10 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Wizard Step 1 Select Carousel 1 In the work area select Carousel Wizard or select Session gt Carousel Wizard Step 1 Select Carousel of the Carousel Wizard is displayed Carousel Wizard 1 Select Carousel DSMCC Object OVE Object DTT Object ix aineay Carousel Carousel Carousel Carousel 2 Highlight the required Carousel type Note that dep
21. FLA Recalculation This runs a wizard to analyze the program structure guide the user through the available options and then recalculate the PCR values The wizard presents 3 4 or 5 pages depending upon the chosen options eel hisz emka PLS 1 3 entelesree Fefe waer atana 17 wiadreers tu ct ehsa Pirimi Ferrante peice lores ange let gata 9305 9 sable bers ektronix inim ites Firei 30 av Fezie ipeciy 1 osrammer soplceke eM det tetsu Standar Fesictina ret EE ons e30 E oadet aas ima By default the wizard will display this Introduction first MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 33 Transport Stream Editor PCR Recalculation PCA Recalculation Wizard This Wizard guides you through the steps for modifying the PCR values for one or all of the programs in the currently open MPEG file WARNING Please note that once perormed this operation Clears the Undo buffer and the process cannot be undone Whe therefore strongly recommend that you have a copy of the file you are editing Pressing Cancel on any of the following pages will clase the Wizard and leave the fle unchanged o Before you can select which programla you wish to modify o the Wizard needs to analyse the file and pull out all program Information Please be patient as this map bake afew minutes for very large Files Digital Video Broadcasting T 1 dont wart to see this screen a
22. MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation The options operate as follows Ask The dialog box shown below will allow the user to choose between using the revised settings as future defaults or to only use them for this session Carousel Generator P Do you want to set the default output stream properties IF vou select res the PCR PID bitrate and minimum duration you hawe just set will be used as the default values For new carousel definition Files Always use this answer idon t show this message again This dialog has been shown because there are no carousels defined If the Always use checkbox in the dialog box is enabled the Automatically set option in this screen will be reset to concur No The revised settings will not be used as future defaults Yes The revised settings will be used as future defaults Event Error Messages screen oa New Session Defaults Event Error messages Which event error messages do you want to see in the error lag Unchecked messages will not appear in the log pages and will not be included in the count of warnings or errors shown in the summary tab B Summary messages Fy Events bE 02002 File successfully loaded Ox2004 File successtully saved 042005 The orphaned object has been found and has been O 2006 The missing object 777 has been added to the carousel O 2007 MIC drivers not present o
23. PID 100 0x64 H E gist a G datastructure da mhp Path In Carousel Mame In Carousel Size bytes Source m trimedia lt lt Service Gateway gt gt B nbattrs DSM com gist a S Projects Streams mhp_a B aclass DSM ff com S iProjects Streams mhp_ar B bclass OSM com gist datastructure S Projects Streams mhp_ar B class DSM jitev general S iProjects Streams mhp_ar A dclass i ie pistli DSM coms gE Sro reap a z a mig DSM ff gistlib S iProjects Streams mhp_ar if mer DSM ftv soaps images S Projects Streams mhp_ap da lib DSM ivigeneral images SrProjects Streams mhp_ ar a images OSM lib images S Projects Streams mhp_ac sa ie ty DSM images S Projects Streams mnhp ar aw general DSM gistliby images aaa i A da images DSM ib 5 Projects Streams mhp_ar Al wy soaps DSM fcom gist mhp S Projects Streamsimhp_ar E i images DSM Jev Soaps S Projects Streams mhp sar 4 DSM com gist mhp trimedia 5 Projects Streams mhp_ar Carousels lj Collections pelle az x Error type Event time Description Pevent 12 52 27 MIC drivers not present or not enabled E Error 12 52 27 File D Streamsicarann Demo xml successfully loaded 4 error s 0 warningis la a e Summary Definition File Syntax TS Generation Log Tektronix Carousel Generator A A summary of a collection s properties is displayed in the Properties window With a collection node highlighted the contents of the col
24. feswtmp test_cutmps Browse IM Ack before writing if file exists Fress the Finish button to begin cutting or press the Back button to review your options Cancel Select Finish to create the file and copy the required slice of data Select Back to go back to change the source file starting packet and number of packets The wizard now creates the new file and copies the selected data to the destina tion file specified While it is working this dialog box is displayed to indicate progress Cutting File iA ource C Amp test mpg Destination csempesz cut mpg Tektronix When the blue progress indicator reaches the right side the dialog box disappears and the file is ready to use MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Script Pad Getting Started Setting Up Starting the Program ScriptPad is supplied with a number of Tektronix products to enable users to create and modify System Information SI scripts The rationale underlying SI Scripting is described elsewhere in this document this section simply provides a guide to using ScriptPad It should be noted that script files are saved as ASCII files and that any ASCII text editor can be used to view and modify the files for example Microsoft Notepad However features such as color coding of keywords and syntax checking will not be available also access to encrypted script files will not be possible The ScriptPad utility i
25. i Bunin separate Menon Space Start in C Program Files Tektronismpegirmts40 Shortcut Kep None Rur Mormal wiridows Find Target Change Icon mea a For a standard installation of the MPEG Test System software the current command line will look like this C Program Files Tektronix mpeg mts400 apps buffer_analyser exe Add the d option to the end of the line after the quotes and separated from them by a single space C Program Files Tektronix mpeg mts400 apps buffer_analyser lI d Select the OK button to commit the change and close the dialog box If a desktop shortcut is required an mpeg argument must be appended to the command line so that it looks like this C Program Files Tektronix mpeg mts400 apps utilities tracer exe mpeg MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 11 3 Tracer Getting Started Starting Tracer Tracer can be started by selecting the Tracer option from the Tektronix Utilities submenu of the Start gt Programs menu Alternatively double click a Tracer desktop shortcut if one has been created NOTE Only run one copy of Tracer and one of Buffer Analyzer when using the Tracer facilities Buffer Analyzer writes messages to a circular buffer from which Tracer captures them To ensure that no records are missed start Tracer before Buffer Analyzer opens an MPEG file User Interface Once the program has started and is ready for use it will open a
26. tus Bar Function List MHP applications where they are included in a session Allows the screen elements listed to be shown or hidden MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Menus and Controls Session Menu Options Table 7 4 Session menu options Option New Program Import Elementary Stream s New Carousel Carousel Wizard Carousel Properties Contents Synchronize Delete Carousel Delete All Carousels MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Function Program view Adds a new program node Program view Allows elementary streams to be added to the Elementary Streams node Carousel view or Program node Allows a new carousel type to be created Opens the Carousel Wizard which takes the user through carousel and stream generation step by step Opens the Carousel Properties dialog box Facilitates the file activities listed below the menu content is context sensitive Empty Carousel Empty currently highlighted carousel Delete Object Deletes currently highlighted object and dependant objects Add File s Adds one or more files to the selected carousel Add Directory Adds a directory to the selected carousel New Directory Creates a new directory at the selected node Move to Collection Moves the selected objects to another collection HTML Application commands Makes Removes and Edits HTML applications Java Application co
27. 1 al DOOODOOL0O 10 687 FU 67 10 FF FU FF 11 3F F1 SF 11 7E FI fF ie DOOOOU20 11 BF Fl BF BU Ce 50 B5 a EEA Highlighting an element in the table window will automatically highlight the section of the hexadecimal code that contains the selected information The view will bring up the first appearance of a particular message in the transport stream reading from the current packet position To view the next appearance select Edit gt Go to Next This will display the next repetition of the message in the open structure view window if necessary it will wrap to the first occurrence For example in the screenshot below the PAT first appears in transport packet 0 Selecting Go to Next and viewing the section again will show the next repetition of the PAT on transport packet 532 and so on 6 52 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views f OC_abed mpg PIDs O x E5 Active FiDs E rA PID 0 0x0 fy RE eten ea acienre 5 a PID 16 0x10 E F Section tabl Es view Repetition er PID 17 0x11 BS View Bitrate PID V0 h 41 W OC_abecd mpg Section table_id 0 0x0 PAT from packet Miel Ea El PAT ia Fahle id Cet 0C_abcd mpg Section table_id 0 0x0 PAT from packet 1064 Sie x E apoa OO BO 11 04 De C1 OO OO OO OO FO 10 OO OL ED b4 4 OODOUOUL1O 24 Fz OF 45 Since the structure view is based on a script the script can be edited and the presentation of the packet or
28. 10 Icons About Multiplexer Program Add al Program Group 5 TA Audio stream Program Wizard J 108 Bit field Properties ey Close Report Container Loop seamless i Seamless Settings pi Current selection Section gt uP O O lt Cut B Section timing d eE o p F 8 22 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Menus and Controls Table 8 10 Icons Cont Description Transport Wizard Export Elementary Stream 2 EA eni Export Payload EE Export Section Data s Video stream Import Section Data aa View Event Log Unknown Export As T Transport Stream icon m z amt ct rf Modity View Component Duration k m View Component Bitrate w p View Available Bit Rate MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 23 Multiplexer Menus and Controls Cutting and Pasting Table types sections and PIDs can be cut copied and pasted using the windows clipboard Only one selection can be held on the clipboard at a time Alternative ly a selection can be dragged and dropped using the mouse Cutting a Selection to the Clipboard A selection table type section or PID can be deleted and automatically placed on the windows clipboard It can then be pasted to a different file or back into the current file Highlight the selection in the Navigator Tables or PIDs view and select the Cut option from the Edit menus or use the Ctrl X keyboard shortcut Copyin
29. AIT which the receiver must process before it can start any application To define an application entry point and other application information highlight a file and select Carousel gt Contents gt Make Java Application or Make HTML Application The Application Properties dialog box will be displayed The components of the Application Properties screens are described in the following paragraphs Note that when the file properties of an application are viewed the File Properties General screen is also displayed MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 61 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Application Descriptor screen The Application Descriptor screen is common to both Java and HTML applications All the properties on this screen are described in the Application Signaling section of the MHP specification TS 101 812 v1 1 1 Section 10 Application Signaling Application Properties Application Descriptor i Java Properties Application Name Controller class Language Lode Jeng o Application Id Control Code 2 Present p Application Descriptor Onganisation Id 429 4967295 Semice Bound visibility To Users and Applications Priority 25 Application Profiles Profile Id Version Major Minor Macro Cancel Application Descriptor Name TS 101 812 identity Application Name Application Name Descriptor Language Code Application Name Descriptor Application ID Application
30. Bt ey Custom Scripts DVB scp A DYE ACSDesenptor se MHP scp S al Ma y Script Management The script management buttons act on the scripts currently listed in the Scripts text box 4l 4 Script files are parsed in the order that they are listed in some circum stances this may be important To move a file in a list highlight the file name and select the Up or Down arrow button as required Each press of the button will move the file up or down one place in the list until it reaches the top or the bottom D Add a script to the list A standard Windows file selection dialog box is opened The default file extension is scp Select the required file The selected script will be added to the bottom of the list If necessary it can be moved using the Up and Down buttons Scripts can be loaded from any directory x Delete the highlighted script 8 8 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Getting Started Opening a Stream Opening an MPEG Stream al Change scripts default directory by default all scripts are found in a default directory created during installation tektronix scripts This button can be used to set a different default directory Note that all scripts supplied by Tektronix in the default installation are installed in a single directory as long as this directory is designated as the default directory they will work satisfactorily jil View highlighted script with
31. Edit the values and select Apply to make the changes and update the other properties tabs without having to close this dialog box MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 87 Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Subtable Timing Service information is usually constrained to appear at regular intervals in the transport stream This is usually implemented as a maximum time between appearances of all the sections of a subtable where a table is defined by the table_id table_id_extension and version_number on the same PID Use the Subtable Timing tab to specify the desired and the maximum acceptable period between instances of the subtable When an MPEG file has been opened this shows the mean time between instances of the subtable in the transport stream Section properties Transport Stream ID 1 Yersion 0 Se E PID Version Timing S4btable Timing Cycle Time i b4 ms Max cycle time recommended by standard 2000 mes Cycle Time Displays the mean time between instances of the subt able specified for synthesizing a new MPEG file The value can be edited to specify a different cycle time Beneath the Cycle Time the dialog box displays subtable specific information from the currently selected standard Edit the values and select OK to change the Cycle Times Select Apply to make the changes and update the other properties tabs without having to close this dialog box When synthesizing a
32. Editing in Section View Adding an Element to To add an element to a loop select the parent loop that will contain it and then Loop select Add from the right click menu For example to add a program to a PAT highlight the Programs container and select Add from the right click menu Section PAT Transport Stream Id 1 Yersio Miel A EM Transport Stream Id 1 Version O Section 0 Pid 0 0x0 El TableHeader ow dB table_id 0 000 PAT 2 vee amp secton_syntax_indicator 1 H section length 33 transport_stream_id 1 0x1 AL werston_number 0 00 current_nest_indicator 1 AQ sechon_number 0 0x0 OE last_section_number 0 M0 program Ta prog H A prog Ly odi progi cim o H H H ee E Progam number i G E Transport Streal pooo P PID 232 Cancel eae TableHesdi bee table ic a section_syntas_indicator 1 per H tection length 37 bo transport stream_id 1 0x7 EON version_ number 0st curent_next_indicator 1 i101 sechor number 0 0x0 St last_ section number 0 0x0 programs F progam number 0 0x0 program _rumber 1 01 program number 2 0 2 program rumber 3 O43 program number 4 0x4 program number 5 05 gt program number 6 0x6 CAC_S2 0x468 269 cms z oprgngr engir In this example a dialog box is displayed in which the Program Number and
33. MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 25 ee Wizards In the Navigator Programs view wizards provide you with a step by step approach to building streams to be multiplexed by offering defaults for PSI SI and the opportunity to include user selected programs The standard previously selected in the Interpretation dialog box will dictate the PSI SI components offered There are two major wizards the Transport Wizard and the Program Wizard Other minor wizards may be opened by these major wizards or they may be invoked in their own right to facilitate specific tasks such as adding EIT information When configuring a new multiplex the Transport Wizard is opened followed by the Program Wizard although on completion of the Transport phase an opportunity to exit the wizard process is offered before the Program Wizard opens For some detailed operations only the appropriate wizard may be opened At their most basic level wizards invoke in a logical order the property dialog box that are available when building a stream manually The following paragraphs provide a step by step description of the wizards Wizard Controls The following control buttons are provided on the wizard dialog boxes where relevant Next Retain changes made using this dialog box and move to next dialog box Back Discard changes made using this dialog and return to the previous dialog box Cancel Exit the wizard and discard all changes Finish Exit
34. Step 1s Sclech Carousel 24 45 nkaene aie atei onenntaneeecateseeecese 7 11 Step 2 Carousel Properties sci sws2onehecaten ies ntanGhesatesiieease 7 12 Sem Carousel COnmients 44 aiuuacen secatendiutasangsecatessieeese 7 13 Step 4 Collection Contents 0 0 ccc cece eee eee 7 15 Step 5 Imported Elementary Streams 0 0 0 ccc eee eee eee 7 18 Stepo Prostim EAU o22cncunrhscceiiaaea ete aa ae hides ooeueacs 7 20 Step 7 Output Stream Properties cece ee eens 7 21 Step sy Concratwlations 22 0 00sc5602Ghbe hte etesiatangsicatssiiaeesc 7 22 Menus and Contro satis Sow iee oara ae awiesew ws 7 23 Menus ODUONS sugara pien feck eee keee a eee ee See e ed ea eee 7 23 TOOIDATS pararet ea eaa E nebo al a Mnata nee pba EEOAE ae s T 21 LOS WIndOWe GPa ateaeu inate na E Ara e Bn E A 7 30 SUS Bai 2 6 eile at ois eae e Be id E a r a Eaa 7 31 Properties Window List Control v 05 34406 sa viele Desea ei wee ewes Pol Carousel Generation xeitiics 55 15 5556 iota Gewese a aa wa ar oe 8 wi Se dw OE 7 33 Setting Overall Carousel Generator Properties 0 0 cece eee eee 7 33 Creatine a SOSSON 4 44684 ce Sat Seca sok Vaah Bans N REESE EDET 7 39 selecting the Carousel Type iiem chaos edad esiek Saale e see Saas es R EE 7 41 Modifying the Carousel Properties 0 cece eee eee 7 42 Carouse CONE MSi arinei Aste eed ste dade sens oleae te teen as eeees 7 51 COUCCHONS 324 45 Nar aA E A SUE a N EEA RDT 7 66 Aa an Da E E T
35. The column headings are largely self explanatory Number of Cycles shows the number of times that the test could be calculated for the stream To display the results in graphical form highlight a test name and select Graph from the right click menu GD Application Timing If another test is selected the results are overlaid Color coding is used to identify each result MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Application Support The screenshot below illustrates a graph showing all five test results Cold Boot not shown bbcla mpg Application Timing Poll Test 1 Best Trans Poll Test 1 Worst Trar Poll Test 1 Cycle Poll Test 1 Best Boot Foll Test 1 Worst Boot oOo N OSPF ee Oo TNM SS WO fw w w e e e Transport Stream Time s Zoom in and zoom out buttons are provided on the toolbar or use the tab and shift tab keys on the keyboard MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 89 Carousel Analyzer Application Support Alternatively a precise area can be selected by dragging the mouse over the required range hold the left button move the mouse release the button When the mouse button is released the zoomed area of the graph will be displayed immediately as shown below bbclampg Application Timing Poll Test 1 Best Trans Poll Test 1 Worst Trar Poll Test 1 Cycle Poll Test 1 Best Boot Poll
36. from the packet to the clipboard The bytes are copied using the hexadecimal representation This button is disabled grayed out when nothing is selected that can be copied oo fe Re ee Copies the entire contents of the current packet to the clipboard Pastes any data held in the TS Editor s hexadecimal representation from the clipboard into the packet starting at the currently selected byte e Undoes the last edit restoring the previous value Selecting Undo again undoes the previous change and so on Reinstates the previously undone change 5 LS Opens the Options dialog box vas MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 7 Transport Stream Editor Menus and Controls Status Bar File Size 56 4ME Packets 00007 Packet Size 204 The Status Bar may be hidden from view but if it is always visible at the bottom of the window It displays the following information about the program and open file Message field Shows program status describes any button or menu option over which the pointer is placed Ready pointer is placed button or option is not available ie greyed out A Select the entire packet The message changes to describe the function of the button or menu option ov er w hich the mouse The description is still displayed if the Packet Size Either 185 or Packets Total number of packets in the file File Size
37. including Software Version and Serial Number MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Menus and Controls Toolbars Two toolbars can be displayed Generator and Player The toolbars can be shown or hidden using the View menu or by right clicking in the toolbar area Toolbars provide a set of convenient shortcuts for the more frequently used menu options The buttons are context sensitive and are enabled or disabled dependent upon the currently highlighted view or the action being performed Generator Toolbar a E e Hmn o nni al Alg dn Table 7 8 Generator toolbar icons Icon Function Equivalent Menu Bar Command EN Session gt Carousel Wizard Ctrl W File gt New Carousel Session Ctrl N ro File gt Open Carousel Session Ctrl O File gt Save Carousel Session Ctrl S I View gt Carousels ET Session gt Contents gt Add Directory E Session gt Contents gt Add Files 7 Right click on Collection node gt New Collection a session gt New Program xo Session gt Synchronise re Tools gt Launch Carousel Analyzer Bm Tools gt Launch Multiplexer Ta Tools gt Launch TS Analyzer MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 27 Carousel Generator Menus and Controls 7 28 Player Toolbar Table 7 9 Player toolbar icons Icon Function Equivalent Menu Bar Command pe Playout Carousel Player gt Start Playout Stop playout Pla
38. leaf nodes the accompanying icon indicates the node type They display the lowest and finest level of detail available in this diagram These are either a Section of a Table or a PID Fields in the Section view that may not be edited directly are indicated by a padlock symbol This protection can be switched off by selecting Expert Mode from the Multiplex menu It can be reenabled by selecting Standard Mode MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Views Event Log Messages about significant events are written to the Event Log from the time a file is first opened The Event Log can be opened for viewing at any time during or after the initial analysis When the initial analysis is done the mean transport rate bit rate for each PES PID and a Demultiplex complete message are written in the Event Log x Event Log BBCTAUG 2 mpg Time 14 26 41 Dernultiples started Information Found PAT Information Stream bitrate is 24 1283M bit s Information Strearn length te 31 9748 Information Found 34 pids and 7 sections Time 14 26 44 Dernultiples complete D emuliples bitrate 225 20 obi bits The start and end times for generating a new transport stream are shown by the Multiplexer started and Multiplexer completed messages Note that when demultiplexing and multiplexing streams the bit rate at which the demultiplex or the multiplex is performed is given This is in addition to the stream bit rate derived fr
39. or down one place for each press of the button ocripts options LAProgran FilestTektronix Carousel Snaljservdsmec ace C Program FilestTektronic WCarausel Analyserxdsmoc_ de Move Up Alt Up Arrow C Program FilestTektronb Carousel GnalysensMAP SCP L Program FilesiTektronix Carousel Anahe HHP DOVE SCE C Program FilesiTektronix WCarausel 4nalysersMHP_MPEG 51 L Program FilestTektrontx Carousel Analyser MFE SCP C Program FilestTektronix Carousel Snalvterypat cataco Syntax Checking Options A number of options are available from the Analysis Settings dialog that allow strict syntax checking to be enabled and disabled If any option is not enabled the relevant syntax will not fail to be checked but will be interpreted more loosely Syntax Checking Options can only be selected and enabled when no files are open The option is not available when a file is open Currently three syntax checking options are available Strict private data length Message length checking Object U U Object Carousel Disabling this option allows the privateDataLength field where it exists in the DSI to be set to zero The application will calculate it when required using the total message length and the position of the private data in the message See reference 2 sections 2 and 7 3 6 Strict association tag checking Object U U Object Carousel The association tag field in the stream_identifier_descriptor is an 8 bit value w
40. table_id 66 0x42 SDT section_syntax_indicator 1 section_length 144 transport_stream_id 4103 081007 ONT yersion_number 3 083 hia curent_nesxt_indicator 1 sofas section number 0 0x0 i 104 tet i R1 onginal_netwwork_id 9018 Ox233a services last section_number 0 0x0 meiner service id 4167 0 1047 service_id 4231 0 1087 service_id 4357 0x10ff service_id 44175 041173 service_id 4479 0 117 service_id 4543 0 11bf C32 4030285622 Oxf0394736 Filter OFF DWB TS Rate 24 1283 bit s Duration 31 8748 Standard Ready A The Section view is dynamic in that it will be instantly refreshed if a new section is highlighted in the Navigator view If no section is selected the Section view will be blank The lock icon adjacent to certain elements of the table in the Section view indicates those items that have restricted access due to the mode of user operation Expert or Standard MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 47 Multiplexer Views Syntax of a Section The adjacent diagram shows a screenshot of a section from a Master Guide Table MGT see l AEDn 0 Section O Pid 8147 Ox ieee an Section Pid 518 a Ox FFB J E 4 Table Header see A table id 199 0sC7 MGT sechon_syntax_indicator 1 m sechon_length 59 ao amp table_id_estensian 0 m version_number 0 0x0 A curent_nest_ndicator 1 m sec
41. the application s AIT will be automatically included in the Cold Boot timing 3 Select Go to start the timing tests If the Calculate cold boot time checkbox was enabled the Cold Boot Time Settings dialog is displayed Enter the starting point repetition rate required Cold Boot Time Settings x Unlike the other application timing methods cold boot time does not cache PAT PMT PSI or DSM CC data From each of the specified start points the cold boot time ts the time taken to signal the carousel and completely receive the application See User Guide for details Start points Choose the repetition rate of starting points within the transport stream amp lower repetition tate more starting points will take longer to calculate Every p AO seconds Select OK to continue with the tests Progress bars will be displayed while the test is being carried out MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 87 Carousel Analyzer Application Support 6 88 4 On completion of the test the Application Timing results table is displayed Application Timing OF Xx Application Time Num Cycles Min s Mean s Max s Std Deviation Fl Poll Test 1 Best Transmission 16 0 1 0 1 1 0 000 r Poll Test 1 Worst Transmission 15 0 4 1 0 2 3 0 39 Poll Test 1 Cycle 15 0 4 1 0 23 0 739 Poll Test 1 Best Boot 15 0 7 1 3 25 0 739 Poll Test 1 Worst Boot 14 0 9 22 32 0 815 5
42. 0x4 PCR PID OOF Hierarchical display of transport stream PMT PIDSOl8 ThI 0x2 Protos ASW VIDEO PID OxD2 StrmTypilxz A AUDIO PID Ox002 StrmoTyp 0e4 A AUDIO PID OxE6 StrmTyp 0x4 PCR PID OxD GS PMT FPID 0x120 Thi 0x2 Prago 0x3 ASW VIDEO PID 0x136 StrmTyp 0x2 A AUDIO PIDO140 StrmTyprOs4 A AUDIO PIOs144 StrmTyp 04 PCR PID O 1 36 GS PMT Pioro190 THD Ox2 Prgbo ox4 HW VIDEO PID Ox 194 StemTyp 0x2 A AUDIO PID 02144 StrmTyp Ox4 Play status indicator Status bar 41 470998Mbps Figure 10 1 Elements of the Play screen Menu Bar Toolbar Hierarchy Display 10 2 The Menu bar displays the names of the menus that can be used in the Play or Record screen Refer to Using the Menus on page 10 19 for detailed information about the menus The toolbar provides shortcut buttons for many of the most often used menu commands Click a toolbar button to select the corresponding command You can toggle the toolbar display on and off using Toolbar command in the View menu Refer to Toolbar Buttons on page 10 42 for detailed information about the func tion of each toolbar button Each icon in the hierarchy display represents an element of the stream The hierarchy text contains a description of the associated icon Refer to Hierarchical Display on page 10 7 for detailed information about the hierarchy icons MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Getting Started Play Record
43. 100 0x0064 Used by DSI Carousel PID DIT Assoc Tag 100 Maximum Bitrate 1 Mbit s Default Application Type Java AIT PID 500 O0x01F4 AIT Cycle Time Default Dyb HTML app descriptor format MHP Version 1 0 1 application id list prese a gt amp Collections x 4 Error type Event time Description l J Carousels Programs MHA Summary Definition File Syntax 75 Generation Tektronix Carousel Generator He The contents of the carousel are displayed when the Carousel Contents node is highlighted To edit individual carousel properties in the Carousels tab of the Sessions window and with the carousel node highlighted select Session gt Carousel Properties or select Edit in the Properties window The Carousel Properties dialog box is displayed The number of screens available in the Carousel Properties dialog box is dependent on the carousel type selected In the following notes screens dedicated to only a single carousel type are identified all other screens are common to all types The Carousel Properties dialog box can display up to four screens General PID settings DSI DII settings DTT Applications DTT only and MHP MHP only 7 42 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation General screen Carousel Properties Fa General PID settings DSIDII settings Carousel ID 1 Maximum module size 65536 bytes Carous
44. 51 Finished loading 8 oe eX Summarys Definition File Syntax 75 Generation Error type Ewent time Description E Event 14 07 53 Carousel ID 1 Creating AIT on PID 500 Ed Event 14 07 53 Carousel ID 1 Creating PMT entry on PID 200 For program number 1 amp Event 14 07 54 Multiplexing x Fatal 14 07 54 Unable to write to file d 1Carousel mpa xX Fatal 14 07 54 Transport stream generation aborted Log 4 4 Summarys Definition File Syntax TS Generation During file loading and saving and the generation of transport streams error messages are routed to the appropriate Log window tab More information about each error can be accessed by clicking on the error entry or selecting the Details option from the right click menu 7 30 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Menus and Controls The following icons are used to indicate the severity of the error Blue Event Indicates normal processing activity D Gray Warning Indicates that information was not available or was invalid The operation will often be com pleted 2 Yellow Error Indicates that a sub operation could not be completed the overall task may still be com pleted O Red Fatal Indicates that a fatal error has occurred an activity has failed to reach completion A right click menu allows the user to clear the displayed log or all logs Status Bar The Status Bar display
45. 611 020263 Dest Pid 611 a Traneport Aate 24 128 Duration seconds 17 250 Selected Program 4167 Original Elementary Pid 600 OK Properties in Carousel Elementary PID f do Continuous looping during generation M MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 77 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Note that selected elementary streams are displayed under the Elementary Streams node in the Programs view ss a Demo xml Tektronix Carousel Generator File Edit View Session Player Tools Help ac Blin eat O Fr A Carousels DER GR Carousel Session 1 Program 1 Carousel i D Clock Reference 1 PCR only PID PCR PID 8190 Ox1FFE a g DVB SI be E Time Date Table o b Network ID 0 0x0 BEE Transport Stream Net ID 0 TS ID 0 E Frogram 1 Prog 1 PMT PID 1100 0x044C 4 MHP Object Carousel ID 1 PID 100 0 0064 Prog 1 PMT PID 111 d Elementary Streams af MPEG 2 Audio Src Pid 6018 041782 Dest Pid 601 8 041 782 ag MPEG 2 Video Sre Pid 6017 0 1 781 Dest Pid 601 7 0x1 791 ce Bes Elementary Streams J MPEG 2 Audio Ste Pid 6018 041782 Dest Pid 6018 041 782 gai MPEG 2 Video Sic Pid 6017 021781 Dest Pid 6017 021781 There are 2 Elementary Streams included in this Session MPEG 2 Video Src Pid 6017 0x1781 Dest Pid 6017 0x1781 Source File S Projects Streams mhp_apos kpj CHSAUGe mpg MPEG 2 Audio Src Pid 6
46. 661 0295 tag 101 0 65 El ror 0 bject Carousels l en Object Carousel ID 0 00 OS110 0 00 PID 661 Ox295 J Service Gateway 1 bbel a_mpg Object Carousels den Carousels Name Enter the name of the application Description An optional field that allows a brief description of the application to be entered The boot class and the assets are displayed as parts of a tree structure in the lower pane The boot class is the object that must be loaded first in an applica tion an executable image Assets are data objects to be used by the Boot Class in the same carousel for example picture files and text files 6 74 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Application Support Hew Application Definition Object Carousels hiy Computer H ace a a zeppo c ja ne H cro i H E b a BE EY aclass AR belas AR Seppatslet clase F E imanes iie Carousel ID 1 01 OS 1O 0 0x0 PIO 1606 0s646 icom ortikonsepporengineelet Application Name D escriptor TicTacT oe Aka Noughts and Crosses a H Assets F E Boot Class Fl Gy engine a let c Sepposlet class Sets AG Beat Add Asset Test ok Cancel Selecting the OK button closes the dialog box and stores the new application data The action will be refused if a boot class object has not been specified If a duplicate application name has been entered it must be renamed The boot
47. 9 11 Transport Stream Editor Menus and Controls Table 9 2 Edit menu options Cont Command Function Select Packet Selects the entire contents of the packet Fill Prompts for and fills all selected bytes with a value Options Opens the options dialog View Menu Options Table 9 3 list the View menu options Table 9 3 View menu options Command Function Toolbar Shows or hides the Toolbar which provides a set of convenient shortcuts for the more frequently used menu options Status Bar Shows or hides the Status Bar The following menu options select which standard is used to interpret the values held in the Transport Scrambling Code field Only one standard can be selected at any time MPEG2 Selects the MPEG2 interpretation of the Transport Scrambling Code DVB Selects the DVB interpretation of the Transport Scrambling Code ATSC Selects the ATSC interpretation of the Transport Scrambling Code Tools Menu Options Table 9 4 list the Tools menu options Table 9 4 Tools menu options Command Function Remap PIDs Starts the tool to Remap packets from one or more PIDS to different PIDs PCR Recalculation Opens a Wizard to Recalculate the Program Clock References PCR carried in one or more PIDS MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Transport Stream Editor Menus and Controls Help Menu Options Table 9 5 list the Help menu options Table 9 5 Help menu options Command Function About
48. 96 F 1 ic CO 03 96 20 53 2B 466 SB 26 BA Beda Ctra Lirlel Print Depending on what operations have recently been performed and on what is selected the menus and toolbar will offer different commands The complete set of menu options and associated buttons are as follows k Undo El TS Editor keeps a list of recent changes Each Undo command backs out the most recent change from the list That change is moved to the Redo list in case it needs to be reinstated As each change is undone the cursor moves to the appropriate field in the Hex or Header Editors and restores the previous value E Redo Reinstates the most recently undone operation When a new edit is made the Redo list is cleared me Copy Copies the currently selected bytes to the clipboard From there they may be pasted in to other packets or used by other applications Copy Packet Tal Copies the entire contents of the current packet to the clipboard From there it can be pasted into other packets or used by other applications MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Transport Stream Editor Hex Editor e Paste Pastes packet contents held on the clipboard into the current packet starting at the current cursor position Select Packet Selects the entire packet This is a quick alternative to selecting all the packets with the mouse or keyboard Fill Fills all the selected bytes with a hexadecimal value Fill Byte E4 Fill Value in Hes
49. A PID O 0x0 G Section table_id 0 0x0 PAT gt PID 16 0x10 Hi PID 17 011 ly PID 100 0x64 5 re PID 150 096 aoe sca table_ id is arenes tal UN View Section view Aepetition to View Bitrate d OC_abcd_mpg Section table_id 60 Ox3c DSMCC_Download from packets 4 to 130 BROSHMCC Download bable_id 60 Le Save As z private indicate S gt Go To Next Ctri G dsmec_section View Transport Packet List is table id_extenstorr version_number a A Transport Packet Contributions Packet Number High Index 4 187 o d OC_abcd_mpg Transport packet number 65 Oy x z trans port_scrambling_control 0 5 adaptation_field_contral 1 H Continuity_ counter 3 OOOOO000 47 OO 96 13 OO 01 OF 41 64 6F 63 2E 68 OO 04 66 ait i doca OOOOO010 69 c OO 01 00 OO OO O04 66 69 C OO 00 OO OO l il fil OOOOO0020 49 53 4F 06 OO OO OO 2B OO 02 49 53 4F 50 OD OO TSO ks oT OO OOO030 O00 00 03 FF EE O1 00 04 24 30 30 31 49 53 4F 40 00 OOOOO0040 12 01 00 OO OO 16 OO 64 O amp A OO OF1 OO OO OO OF FF diapa QOOOOO0SO FF FF FF OO 08 OO OO 00 00 O00 OO OO OO OL OD 4l odide 64 GF 63 64 65 63 74 2E 63 70 70 OO U4 66 69 6C docdect cpp Oooooo7O0 OO O1 00 OO OO O04 66 69 6C OO OO OO OO OL 49 53 fil OOOOO0sO 4F O06 OO OO OO 2B OO 02 49 53 4F 50 OD OO OO OO O 00h 050 OOOOO090 O35 FF EE 01 00 O4 24 30 30 32 49 53 4F 40 12 01 0021 4 re
50. Adaptation Field Error ADFERR Icon Text PID Shows the PID value of the CAT TblIID Shows the table_id value of the CAT PID Shows the PID value of the PMT TblID Shows the table_id value of the PMT PrgNo Shows the program number associated with the PMT PID Shows the PID value of the PCR See also PCR Inaccuracy Dialog Box page 10 18 PID Shows the PID value of the video elementary stream StrmTyp Shows the type of the video elementary stream 0x01 or 0x02 PID Shows the PID value of the audio elementary stream StrmTyp Shows the type of the audio elementary stream 0X03 or 0X04 PID Shows the PID value of the audio elementary stream StrmTyp Shows the type of the audio elementary stream OXOF or 0x81 PID Shows the PID value of the data stream StrmTyp Shows the type of the data stream PID Shows the PID value of the private section TblIID Shows the table_id value of the private section StrmTyp Shows the type of the private section PID Shows the PID value of the data DSM CC StrmTyp Shows the type of the DSM CC PID Shows the PID value of the ECM TblIID Shows the table_id value of the ECM PID Shows the PID value of the EMM TblID Shows the table_id value of the EMM PID Shows the PID value of the GHOST PID Shows the PID value of the ADFERR MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Getting Started Table 10 5 Icon text Cont Component NULL
51. Application name descriptor Descriptor Syntax application name descriptor descriptor tag descriptor length for i 0 i lt descriptor length i ISO 639 language_code app _name_ length for i 0 i lt a_n_length i app name char I ETSI TS 101 812 section 10 7 4 7 100 CG Value Comment user user user gt Service Bound checkbox user gt Visibility dropdown 0x1F user gt Priority Matches the transport_protocol_ label value in the transport protocol_descriptor CG Value Comment Accessed through the same page as described 0x01 user gt Language Code dropdown user gt Application Name field MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream Table 7 32 Transport protocol descriptor Descriptor Syntax transport protocol descriptor descriptor tag descriptor length protocol _id transport protocol label remote_connection component_tag I ETSI TS 101 812 section 10 8 1 CG Value 0x02 0x0001 Comment Transport via OC Set to match the component tag value CG does not support remote carousels Matches the component tag in the stream _identifier_des criptor for the DSI of the MHP Object Carousel that contains this application Java Application Descriptors Table 7 33 Java application descriptor Descriptor Syntax dvb j application descriptor descriptor tag descriptor length for i 0 i lt N i parameter length for
52. Base Standard section allows the MPEG DVB or ATSC standard to be selected for analysis MPEG 2 only Interprets and analyzes the packets in conformance to the MPEG 2 standards DVB Interprets and analyzes the Transport Stream Packets according to the specifications of the DVB and MPEG 2 standards 8 6 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Getting Started ATSC Interprets and analyzes the Transport Stream Packets according to the specifications of the ATSC and MPEG 2 standards ISDB Interprets and analyzes the Transport Stream Packets according to the specifications of the ISDB and MPEG 2 standards The standard selected will dictate the availability of the remaining options in the Extensions and Data Standards sections The Extensions section allows country specific extensions to be added to the basic standard scripts If None is selected only the standard scripts are listed in the Scripts text box The remaining country specific extensions add extra scripts to the current listing As with the Base Standard the choice of Extensions option will dictate the availability of the options in the Data Standards section The Custom selection in the Extensions section allows users to include their own selection of scripts using Expert Mode The Data Standards section offers a choice of data specific scripts Note that the scripts listed by default are those resident in the default installation directory tektronix
53. CPP Double clicking a file BIOP message can bring up an appropriate viewer application if the operating system can find one file associations can be set through the Windows Explorer Options File BIOP messages can also be saved to disk by selecting File gt Save As NOTE The version number of the BIOP messages represents the version number of the module that carries the BIOP message MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views The following diagram indicates the nodes accessible from the Object Carousels view 1 OC abcd mpg Object Carousels ig Object Carousels ome Object Carousel ID 3 0 3 DSI ID 0 00 PID 150 Fl Service Gateway E ies Object Carousel node Mo BIOP Message node 7 I TA Adac cpp reL Adoc h ol Adocdect cpp A Adocdect hi m ADOCFILE CPP Ty ADOCFILE H oo AFAM CPP ol AFAMH Object Carousel node dA This node indicates that an object carousel has been signaled in the PSI SI Right Click Menu Options View Application Timing Opens the Application Management dialog View DSI Carrying Carousel IOR Displays a structure view showing the U N DSI message that carries the service gateway IOR for this carousel BIOP Message node 1 This node represents a specific BIOP Message If the node represents a BIOP directory the directory entries appear as child nodes Right Click Menu Options Open View the message in its native format
54. EEEE ES EN A E E E E E EEE EE E E EE E 7 70 Output Stream Generation 0 0 ccc ccc eee eee eee ee eens 7 79 Carousel Definition File c 227 o oo abe hee eae eatee ase Seek eee Rees 7 79 PSI and SI in the Carousel Generator Output Stream 7 81 PSE STING SSC 0 OS keraren ea a tues dete anes 7 81 MPEG PSE aDIes iecetecenetocetaaetudeteiecetedheetetees se tecen 7 82 DV SIMIDICS 2 hcetcSeetses sted Gapcetes hier tet ceecetee piesa 7 89 SUMMA Vo we Gch dd ten ea wend tive y ob e er ive teeta 7 103 GGUS Started sc5 bee ht a be ocak eee ae See aes 8 1 Statin the Program s i bse e ga ase het eda bas Seed eoD 8 3 SCD 3h eee eh ea ah Cee heck hee Lae Rah ee peek ame aks 8 5 OPENDE A TEAM aces a tales thos Seb A a E dees bas 8 9 CIOS ie Piles izar hie ahah oceans ae whee LA tn lhe eee ead 8 14 Menus and Controls 2essics ci cawan ei e EEG NERES 8 15 Meni OPlONS midis he eh eee nae aie nd Si eae wa a ea wad vik aces 8 15 Tooli amp ee beet ie Gau 50 bots Gente ace etn eit Oe a 8 19 Statis BIr ee ae eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee ee ee ee ae 8 20 VISOR TGC LI ACS pics rosette Guts ie tstice E aE Gute ie ttiee r E E i hetos 8 21 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Table of Contents Volume 2 WIZAVOS iinet eee eda dace ea EN da eee haar Transpo WIZA 26 fexsta PRE owe oie ions buena Saad se wie aioe ea ee eae tee Propran Wizard xe05 Saale Mees ies Sa aS ees oe eesees Saeadessouo es NICS dcsts 6 osc boos ae
55. Elementary stream type PES private data BECTAU G2 mpg aM 640 Elementary stream type MPEG 2 Video BBCIAUG2Z7 mpg D 641 Elementary stream type MPEG 1 Audio BBCI4UG27 mpg owl G43 Elementary stream type PES private data BBCTAU G2 mpg fg 650 Elementary stream type DSM CC U N messages BBCIAUG ff 653 Elementary stream type DSM CC U N messages BBCIAUG H E oo E ee a i oe E E R De of ee E ee ale lea a eee 4 Prograrns Tables Pids PSI SI table types are identified in the section nodes of System Information nodes Elementary stream PIDs are identified by source and type where possible 8 46 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Views Section View The Section View displays the contents of the section currently selected in any of the Navigator views Tektronix Multiplexer EECITAUG 2 mpg aie ea Shes Gite a GES Miel x a of leer reel AMlom ela a amp 1 Navigator EBCIAUG2Z mpg a Y P5I SI Tables He ElT_actual_pf H ElT_other_pf H E NIT_actual PAT fq PMT SOT_actual iE Transport Stream ID 4103 Version 3 Section O Pid 17 0811 E SDT_other H E TOT H E TOT q i a 5 1 Ags 11 Programs Tables a a Mae Section SDT_actual Transport Stream ID 4103 Versio Miel E3 a Transport Steam ID 4103 Version 3 Section O Pid 17 011 TableHeader 101 Hegi iA 01i
56. Generator Test Spec ATDI ontents 2 r 2o B E lt lt Service Gateway gt gt EE snake i de a ms da snake SI fee wis DSM fsnake res snake 10493 D i Carousel Generator Test Sped H da snake Zi DSM snakelde ms snake Controller class 2453 D Carousel Generator Test Speg Zil DSM fsnake sresi snake down png 1456 D Carousel Generator Test Spec B DSM snakelresisnake edge png 1202 D i Carausel Generator Test Sped Zi DSM snake de ms snake GamePane class 4351 D Carousel Generator Tesk Speg 5 OSM fsnake sresisnake horizontal prng 1225 D Carousel Generator Test Spec 4 DSM snake sresisnake left png 1390 D i Carousel Generator Test Sped Zi DSM fsnakesde ms2 snake Model class 5929 D Carousel Generator Test Speg 4 DSM fsnake res snake point png 1102 D Carousel Generator Test Speg B DSM Msnakelresisnake right png 1400 D Carousel Generator Test Speg Bi DSM fsnakesde ms2 snake ScoreDisplay class 163 D i Carousel Generator Tesk Speg B DSM snake lde msZ snake Snakexlet class 3098 D iCarousel Generator Test Speg Zi DSM snake res snake up png 1450 D Carousel Generator Test Speq Z DSM snake res snake vertikal png 1266 D i Carousel Generator Tesk Speg Carousels B Collections Programs i Error type Event time Description E Event 15 11 16 File D Carousel Generator Test Specification temp xml successfully loaded 0 erroris 0 warn
57. Icon GARBAGE Icon SDT BAT EIT RST ST DIT SIT LIT ERT ITT PCAT SDTT DCT DLT BIT NBIT and LDT Icons TDT and TOT Icon MGT and PIT Icons TVCT CVCT RRT EIT CETT and EETT Icons system Time Table STT Icon MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Text PID Shows the PID value of the NULL PID Shows the PID value of the GARBAGE PID Shows the PID value of the SDT BAT EIT RST ST DIT SIT LIT ERT ITT PCAT SDTT DCT DLT BIT NBIT or LDT TblIID Shows the table_id value of the SDT BAT EIT RST ST DIT SIT LIT ERT ITT PCAT SDTT DCT DLT BIT NBIT or LDT PID Shows the PID value of the TDT or TOT TblID Shows the table_id value of the TDT or TOT PID Shows the PID value of the MGT or PIT TblID Shows the table_id value of the MGT or PIT PID Shows the PID value of the TVCT CVCT RRT EIT CETT or EETT TblID Shows the table_id value of the TVCT CVCT RRT EIT CETT or EETT TblType Shows the table _type value of the TVCT CVCT RRT EIT CETT or EETT PID Shows the PID value of the STT TblID Shows the table_id value of the STT 10 17 MPEG Player Getting Started PCR Inaccuracy Dialog Box If you press the SELECT button when the PCR icon is selected the PCR Inaccuracy dialog box appears as shown in Figure 10 5 This dialog box allows you to add jitter to the program_clock_reference_base value and the program_clock_reference_extension value Refe
58. Identifier Control Code application control code Origination ID Application Identifier Service Bound Application Descriptor Visibility Application Descriptor Priority Application Descriptor Application Profiles Application Descriptor 7 62 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Java Properties screen All the properties on this screen are described in the DVB HTML Specific descriptors of the MHP specification TS 101 812 v1 1 1 Section 10 Application Signaling Applicaton Properties p Application Descriptor MELEE giai i Java Properties Initial Class Base Directo Class path Extension l Parameters Add a Peni ve hore up Mowe darri Application Descriptor Name TS 101 812 identity Initial Class DVB J Application Location Descriptor Base Directory DVB J Application Location Descriptor Class Path Extension DVB J Application Location Descriptor Parameters DVB J Application Descriptor MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 63 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation HTML Properties screen All the properties on this page are described in the DVB Java Specific descriptors of the MHP specification TS 101 812 v1 1 1 Section 10 Application Signaling Application Properties p Application Descriptor aM tty nae l Initial Path eomgist a class Physical Root Directow ML Properties Parameter String Application lD A
59. MPEG 122 Audio 130 1720 7652 E MPEG 1 2 Audio 120 1722 7650 E 2 Tektronix Il 0 25 60 08 MPEG 1 2 Video 70 025 60 08 E E MPEG 172 Audio MPEG 172 Audio a IF Available Bitrate MGB2 tek_sym1_test mpg Time 40 000Mbns 3 Tektronix Ill 17 20 i MPEG 1 2 Video 31 Total Bitrate MPEG 1 2 Audio 3 41 471 Mbps 35 000Mbps _ Bitrate Used MPEG 1 2 Audio 36 BB6Mbps 4 Tektronix I Available Bitrate 30 000Mibps MPEG 1 2 Video atdala MPEG 1 2 Audio oOMbps Refresh 25 0 20 000Mbps MFEG 172 Audio 5 Tektronix MPEG 1 2 Video MPEG 142 Audio MPEG 1 2 Audio Null Pid Sustem Infornnation 15 000Mbps 1 0 000Mbps 5 000mMbps i i 1 00 IMaA E 0 00 s 20 005 40 005 60 00 s Om O00 F703 paute 1720 lt _ If the bit rate falls below zero the points will be highlighted in red When editing a multiplex you can add components which cause the bit rate to fall below zero and no warnings will be displayed However if a transport stream is then generated errors will be logged and displayed in the Log view Use Refresh to redraw the graph Clicking anywhere within the graph will place a vertical cursor at that point the position and bit rate are displayed in the Time and Available Bit rate fields The zoom level and cursor placement of the Available Bit rate and the Compo nent Duration views can be synchronized by selecting View gt Synchronize
60. MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Menus and Controls Default Data Rate Changes the default clock rate when the selected stream file was downloaded Since the default clock rate is calculated based on the PCRs in the downloaded stream file the value can be different than the original clock rate When the elemen tary stream rate is fixed refer to the Fixed ES Rate de scription the instrument refers to the default clock rate Therefore if the default clock rate is different than the original clock rate you need to set the value to the ap propriate value If you change the value the clock rate value in the Data Rate dialog box is also changed Packet Size Changes the default packet size when the selected stream file is downloaded If you change the value the Packet Size setting in the Play menu will also change Press the OK button to enable all setting changes Set Non TS Sync Dialog Box When you select Play gt Sync gt Non TS the Set Non TS Sync dialog box is displayed Set Non TS Sync Psyric Dyalid Psync Enable Sets the status of the PSYNC signal output from the SPI IN OUT connector Interval Sets the output period of the PSYNC signal in the range of 16 to 255 bytes This value needs to be set equal to or greater than the Width value in the Dvalid field Dvalid Enable Sets the status of the DVALID signal output from the SPI IN OUT connector m Width Sets the data width of the DVAL
61. Main Window When the program starts the main window looks like this Impeg Tracer File Edit Print View Show For Help press F1 E Trace records oO Selected vA Tracer displays the detail message log in the main window It has a Status bar at the bottom of the window and a scroll bar on the right side 11 4 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Tracer Getting Started Status Bar For Help press F1 o Trace records o Selected ee The Status Bar may be hidden from view but if it is visible it is always at the bottom of the main window It displays the following information about the program status Message Field Gives a description of any button or menu Total Records Captured Selected Indicates the number of Indicates Howy trace records currently many recorda option ower which the pointer i2 placed May alzo show other non critical messages held by Tracer are selected For Help press F 650 Trace records 4 Selected n MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 11 5 Tracer Getting Started Detail Message Records These are displayed in the main window in the form of a table Each record is represented by a single row of the table File Edt Print View Show Help Co TEXT i 289 Preparing for processing Video ang EB exatnitiation mterval 1 0 frame period 4 For Help press F1 1593 race records 1 Selected F The example shows a log in which a PID PID 9
62. Missing Stream type 11 DSM CC U N me Pid 650 Stream type 17 DO SM CC U N messages Pid 651 Missing Stream type 11 OSM CC U N mes Pid 652 Missing Stream type 17 PSM CC U N mes ct a4 4201 BBC TWO BBC E T 4351 BEC CHOICE BBC Se 4415 BBC NEWS 24 BBC Se a 4479 BBC TEXT BBC By 4545 BEC PARLMNT BBC H Ea Service Sections gt ff Programs Tables It is recommended that manipulation of programs and elementary streams should take place from the Program view 8 44 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Views Tables View The Tables view displays high level structure of the Program and System Information Protocol PSIP Service Information SI and Program Specific Information PSI tables More detailed payload information can be examined and edited for a selected section of a table using the Section View x Navigator BECTAUG27 mpg Eg EIT_actual_pf h E Table ID Oxde Service ID 4167 Verion 22 Section 0 Pid 18 E Table ID Os4e Service ID 4167 Version 22 Section 1 Pid 19 ED Table ID Osde Service ID 4231 Version 12 Section O Pid 18 EB Table ID Onde Service ID 4231 Version 12 Section 1 Pid 18 E Table ID Ox4e Service ID 4357 Version 1 Section O Pid 18 C E Table ID Ox4e Service ID 4357 Version 1 Section 1 Pid 18 C Ep Table ID Oxde Service ID 4415 Version 13 Section 0 Pid 19 EB Table ID Ode Service ID 4415 Version 13 Section 1 Pid 181 H E
63. Navigator Programs view for example TOT Tektronix Multiplexer tek_syml1_test mpg File Edit View Options Multiples Yvirndow Help e a oe er Fee ele le ela ale Navigator tek_sym1_test mpg SLs Section SDT_actual Transport Stream ID 1 Version Transport 5tream EE Transport Stream ID 1 Version Section Pid 17 011 Be Programs Stream ld 1 ersion O m TableHeader G 1 Tektronix Tektronix Cambridge oq original metwork_id 43981 Oxabed gt GG Service Sections A t aa He SE Pransport Stream ID 1 Version 0 hdd enice_id 1 0x1 a g Event Sections Sh eric id Oke gt dit Elementary Streams PMT el Hoditp sical 3 0x3 2 Tektronix Il Tektronix Systems ey Delete ervice_id 4 0x4 3 T ektronis II Tektronix Systems ervice_id 5 0x5 4 Tektronix I Tektronix Systerns de eat a2 1221004543 Ox4c ric Ee 5 Tektronm Y Tektronm Systems pop EA Faste n Esport Section Data E mpor Section Wate ll Ci e El Save Section Data Sawe ir Sy MuxTest gt Programs G k s T Export the section conten Save as type ls ection Files dat Cancel File name Duration 55 8394 Standar MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Importing a Section In the Navigator Tables view highlight the PSI SI Table node From the right click menu select Import Section Data In the P
64. Notes below Reserved PCR PMT AIT os as Carousel as Carousel psi No No No NO NO wO T E PMT per o Mw b b b Reserved The Reserved PIDs are PIDs 0 to 31 0x00 to 0x1F and the Null PID 8191 0x1FFF MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 45 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation DSI DIl settings screen 7 46 NOTE PIDs 0 to 15 0x0000 to Ox000F are reserved by MPEG PIDs 16 to 31 0x0010 0x001F are additionally reserved by DVB PMTs cannot share PIDs with anything but other PMTs Multiple PMT sections can be on the same PID so if required every carousel could have its PMT entry on the same PID usually not done that way but it can be The DIIs belonging to a single carousel can be on the same PID as its DSI or its other DITs but not on the same PID as DSIs or DITs belonging to other carousels For example the yes no indicators in the PMT row column indicate that the value of the PID carrying a PMT may not be shared with any other entities in the session However in the case of the PMT see the above note The tree structure in the DSI DII Settings screen shows the DSI and DUs that will be generated in the stream for the selected carousel Each DSI DII has an Association Tag and a cycle time and DIIs have a user definable name Carousel Properties DSI DII settings a HHF Object Carousel ID 1 PID 100 0 0064 Frog 1 PRT F Mew OIl 2 General we MHF ta DSI Carousel PID
65. Path field Carousel Generator v2 0 is designed to generate enough SI to create a fully DVB conformant stream which should be enough to drive most set top boxes If any additional SI is required another suitable tool should be used to insert the extra information into the generated stream MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 103 i Multiplexer a Getting Started The Multiplexer provides off line multiplexing of ATSC MPEG 2 and DVB Transport Streams Testronin Miultipe ser Ci Streamaytek_109 tesL MPG File ide wiew Opjons Multipex window Help iar YS SY Jee se etl ee es owls 1 ae 1 Navigqabor 0 Streames ek 11S test eli neta E i TableHeader Chea MTT_AchiAl i pe mber kles ripis Hil h az ED Network ID 1 veson 0 Seckin 0 Pid 16 10109 fa fh deroipters ela pal HA ranspor stream Dop _lemgth LEZ mi rer W 3 HE anspor stream loo HH LU _accual E i trarsport stear Madty Telete F ira epee TF lra eporl_elrea LF arepat shear E E i H ia t io Eei tranport stear E E Copr iF ampart shear ap afte i tranport stear LF tranport _stearr Properties Lull RC 32 38141292 Tables Evel Luy CAStreds Lek _105_Lesl MFG Htakegory e RsFaeice omiment Jegar ume a a la bemultipkx carted Lromenin tard F l Ivormetin tkr eam bkrabe is 36 C14 bitis Ivornckion Stream length 3 1 800045 Ivarin Fourd 3
66. Program Map PID can be accepted or respecified Other table loops may not display any dialog box but immediately create a new element with default contents An entry is displayed for the new element with its details collapsed at the end of the list of elements in the loop In addition the section length field is automatically recalculated and amended For the example above of adding an element to the Programs loop in a PAT the new entry is program number 6 0x6 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 105 Multiplexer Editing in Section View Deleting an Element in a Loop Modifying the Contents of a Field 8 106 NOTE The example above was taken with Standard mode selected In Standard mode all recalculation is done automatically In Expert mode a program element will be added but the program number and PID must be manually adjusted Similarly the section length will need to be calculated and amended manually see also Expert and Standard Modes page 8 54 To delete a loop element in the Section view highlight the element and select Delete from the right click menu The element is deleted and the Section View window updated to reflect the changes To edit the contents of a field highlight the field and select Modify from the right click menu This will open an appropriate dialog box for modifying the type of data held by the field The following paragraphs describe the different types of data that may be
67. Px 200000 0bits s 1d 306 Preparing tor processing ia eal Patera 1 ee ES 1 Lily a al Fes Heade LOLITLO all TO E A fair Sr Lo i S06 Level Frequency 44000 kHz Bitrate 192 kb s For Help press F1 2650 Trace records 4 Selected F Unless they are deleted the selected records stay selected until a new selection is made This does not affect the operation of the other facilities in Tracer MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 11 7 Tracer Getting Started Color Schemes The color scheme for each message type and for highlighting selections can be changed using the Select Color dialog To modify the color schemes select the Colors option from the View Menu This opens the Select Colors dialog box Select Colours Test Colour 0K Cancel MPEG AUD TIME Tea MPEG ID EB MPEG WIO VEN MPEG WID TIHE Reset All EE Select the message type to be changed from the list box on the left The current color scheme will be displayed in the Sample underneath the list box Click on the swatch colored square for the required color in the Text Color and Background panels Repeat the procedure for each message type that is to be changed Then select OK The Reset button restores the selected message type to the default color scheme The Reset All button restores all of the color schemes to their defaults MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Tracer Getting Started C
68. Section U ic 16 bc1U9 mp PINSI ables E i TableHeader SEET TT_artial ly elec k a le ridos haghi AF Toolbar LED Network ID 1 Verson O Section Of Pid 16 i010 GI 0 desoiptors A i iy anspor stream loop length Lez my fe ee f Eir SENi oo ig o1 _aczual Get transport shear e ira ier Ls bea Mri fy Et 4 lra tsp bs lra _ Delete Navigator area ef tansnort smear cy Ef tranport stear oa EE traninart shear e Right click menu i E L tranport stear 2E g i Sew trancport_stear_ Piopatics gga DRC 32 Sl 412525 Section area Segane T ables Even Lug CA Silreons lek 105 Les LPG category Reference comment ume Beee Lemultipkex started lomat Fourd F Irometin Stream brabe is 38 C147 bitis Log View Ivornckiaa Stream longth s 1 800045 Iv ormetia Fourd 3 pids and sections Time pein be Demultipex compete Demultiplez bikrabe 323 58 LMbitys Status gt AlN Filer OFF OYE T5 te SH Oiti Du alion S804 Sadar Realy a NOTE The Menu Bar contains the complete selection of options available in the Multiplexer Shortcuts to options are available through the toolbar and context sensitive right click menus MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 21 Multiplexer Menus and Controls Icons Icons are used throughout the Multiplexer user interface to assist you to identify components and make visual links with toolbar shortcuts and menu options The following table lists all the icons used Table 8
69. Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views Entity Cycle Times Similarly the cycle time of any entity object in the transport stream is the time Statistics between the start of an instance of the entity and the start of the next instance Selecting one or more entities in any view and View Entity Cycle Time from the right click menu generates the Entity Cycle Times statistics window The information can also be displayed in graphical form by selecting View Entity Cycle Time Graph a OC_abecd_ mpg Object Carousels OA Object Carousels Eda Object Carousel ID 3 043 OST ID 0 0x0 PID 150 096 E E Service Gateway D Entity Cycle Times cle Mass Std Deviation GAFID 150 1d 0 4 164 0 2 0 2 0 3 0 012 M PID 1501d 0 4 4 70 70 7 0 0 008 T PID 150 Id 0 4 13 27 2 8 29 0 099 PID 15010 0 5 13 27 2 8 29 0 097 a Adoc cpp a Adoc h T Adocd GA View BIOP Message B Adocd View Carrier Module R none be ee Bitrate ae T AFRM View Composite Bitrate T AFAM i View Repetition E E d led Save As a CP View Entity Cycle Time 10 37 7 03 7 G 5 w o oa H 3 2 1 aS a Sa i EEEa EEEE E SS SS eS ee Se ee ee Se ee ee a a Transport Stream Time s O PID 150 Id 0 aibic O PID 150 Id Dabic doc h Bi PID 150 Id O atb ici OCF ILE CPP O PID 150 Id D taidifred The Entity column identifies the PID Carousel ID and Object that the user identified a
70. Session window and the Log window can each be either floated moved to anywhere on the desktop or docked to one of the four sides of the application window The content of the Properties window is context sensitive it will provide a summary of the properties of the node highlighted in the Session window A full description of the Carousel Generator screen components can be found in the Menus and Controls page 7 40 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 7 Carousel Generator Getting Started 7 8 Session Window The Session window is the workspace in which carousels and collections are built and manipulated The window has three tabs Carousels Collections and Programs Each window displays different aspects of the current session in the form of a tree structure Carousel Tab The Carousels Session window displays all of the carou sels in the current session and the directories and files associated with each carousel It is in this window that carousels are built and manipulated Collections Tab The Collections Session window displays the collections associated with each carousel and the allocation of files and directories within them Programs Tab The Program session window displays the contents of the stream from the program or service point of view Properties Window The Properties window provides an immediate view of the parameters and values associated with each node in the Carousels and Collec tions Session wind
71. Status The Play Status indicator see Figure 10 2 is displayed while the selected Indicator stream is being output It shows the output status of the selected stream the progress of the stream output the output source the operational status and the elapsed time The Record Status indicator is displayed while the input stream is being recorded It shows the record status of the input stream the progress of the stream record the record target and the elapsed time p a E EE 20 00 00 13 Position indicator Output source Operation status Elapsed time Record target Figure 10 2 Play Status Indicator The Play Record Status indicator shows the following information Position Indicator In the Play screen this indicator shows the progress of stream output using the duration gauge In the Record screen this indicator shows the progress of stream re cord using the duration gauge The duration gauge is updated every second If you out put a stream with a repetition rate of approximately three seconds the gauge may not be displayed correctly MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 3 MPEG Player Getting Started Output Source Record Target Operation Status In the Play screen this indicator shows the output source used to output the selected stream In the Record screen this indicator shows the record target that is used to re cord the input stream One of each set of icons is displayed depending o
72. Test 1 Worst Boot Transport Stream Time s 6 90 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Ae MHP Support Although described separately here MHP Object Carousel support is fully integrated into Carousel Analyzer MHP applications are displayed in the Services and Object Carousel views The features described here can be accessed from menu options and right click context menus Abel mpg Object Carousels Iof x a Object Carousel ID 5 05 DSI ID 0 0x0 PID 2006 07 dE Object Carousel ID 5 0 5 DSI 1D 0 020 PID 2506 0 9ca i MHP Applications Elf Arena A a Service Gateway H com Ga fi El i std J db A ena E stet E ui F util wow Eg SletLoader class C org pics 0 properties E xmlLtiles EA Unidentified Carousel PID 1106 02452 eA EE The MHP application is identified by its name in the AIT If the boot class is found in the Service Gateway it is attached as a child of the MHP application As a visual aid boot class items are identified in the Service Gateway by green triangles overlaying the primary icon The path in which the boot class resides is also indicated by green triangles Applications are designated as Java W or HTML H The color of the icon represents the running status of the application when the carousel was recorded green indicates running yellow indicates ready and red indicates not running MTS400 Series MPEG Test
73. Toolbar Not available Status Bar Shows or hides the Status Bar Font Selects which font is used for displaying the text of detail message log records Colors Selects background and text colors to be used to display each type of message Newest Displays the newest record 11 14 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Tracer Menus and Controls Show Menu Options Tracer Print View Show a v Makes General Text MPEG Fired PCR Timestamp MPEG System MPEG Audio MPEG Video Table 11 5 Show menu options Command Markers General Text MPEG Fixed PCR Timestamp MPEG System MPEG Audio MPEG Video MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Function Showing markers is permanently selected for using Tracer with the Buffer Analyzer Show or hide general messages For example messages indicating start of processing for a particular PID Show or hide MPEG 2 information such as transport rates and buffer sizes Show or hide messages about PCRs and associated instantaneous transport rates Select which types of MPEG 2 system messages to show Select which types of MPEG 2 audio messages to show Select which types of MPEG 2 video messages to show 11 15 Tracer Menus and Controls Help Menu Options Gout Tracer Help Table 11 6 Help menu options Command Index About Tracer 11 16 Function Online help is not available when usin
74. U or U N messages such as DSM CC Download can also be displayed with options to view associated sections carrier modules or transport packets for each version as required An object carousel in the stream can be viewed by contents as a directory structure containing the underlying objects such as Java classes picture or text files If an object is associated with an installed application then a double click will launch that program providing for example an easy and quick way to view the contents of a picture file or read a text file The structure of the U N download messages can be viewed showing the relationship between DII modules and blocks The associated DSI and DII messages contained in the U N Download tables can also be viewed in inter preted or hex fashion these indicate where to find and view the BIOPs that contain a required object in the stream The timing relationships between the various components can also be easily shown because the bit rates or the repetition rates of blocks modules objects U N messages or SI tables can be shown together in a single graphical display 6 2 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Getting Started Data Broadcasting Overview Object Carousel BIOP Messages Download Data Carousel Modules and Blocks DSM CC Sections Transport Packets Data Broadcasting allows data to be transmitted in asimilar way to the way in which video and audio servi
75. User Manual 3 29 3 33 3 34 3 35 3 37 3 40 3 40 3 41 3 43 3 45 3 46 PAA RRS Ta l l e O O ORANNe m A BAA l m m I pm U N l l ped Pro DAW Ua KR A LR PS gt e A aAA N N m l l WwWNN N Ja l Seas WWWWN NY OAANINNAN AH W Table of Contents Volume 1 Error Testing Methods and Outputs ccc cece ccccens Run Through Stream Test Mode cece ccc eee eects EROMEINCHING lt 2 sin dcatras coos bs os DAES Sh Rees a RATES meee Eee SP ES Ae tras ss ech eee se ee Eres a oer ces See Es ek Eve ON Ewes Regression Testing and Error Log Files 0 0 0 00 e eee eee eee Reports and Field Selection 2 2 c222844458620 2256 2G eerie aseeess Demultiplexing Transport Streams to PES or Elementary Output Files T m pmi I I Ne W Ne m De OGO AM UNE DNR MB NBPNONTIA WM Neme CON AUNGA l N l oS Working with Transport and PES Streams eeeeeeees sine Packo VION i022 So eeier chee evoke gw ie yea exer ese ik Eee Wnderstandine PES 1 02 2io2 c2 sbedonetete yb ieretetdeeteteg theese Working with Video Streams cccccccccccccccsssecees Viewine the Sequence Header s 4 3s dowd ed nite res ee tielne eee eens Viewing the GOP and Picture Header cece cece ees Displaying the Slice and Macroblock 0c cece eee eee eens Analyzing Picture Quality is crak acca Gh aoe s hee kan J4SSR Ses a ee Using the Video Viewer for Picture Analys
76. View menu is enabled keywords are automatically color coded as they are typed When the Auto Syntax Highlights option is disabled the color coding can be refreshed by selecting the Refresh Syntax Colors option in the View menu Parsing Script files can be syntactically checked by selecting the Parse option from the Script menu A message box will indicate that errors were or were not found in the file The Script Parser Message window will be automatically opened when the message is acknowledged Script Parser Message The Script Parser Messages window logs the parsing activities and provides Window errors and warnings when necessary The following icons are used in the message window Information Error wi Warning Double clicking and error message will bring the associated script file window to the front of the display Messages can be cleared from the window by right clicking anywhere within the message window and selecting Clear messages MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 14 11 Script Pad Script File Editing and Encryption Encryption 14 12 There are an increasing number of proprietary standards emerging whereby analysis is allowable possibly subject to a licence fee but the owner of the standard does not want the script file to be viewed by users This is solved by using encrypted script files The ScriptPad utility which is used for creating and editing script files has an Encrypt option such that
77. Wizard Progress and Information The Progress and Information log displays messages during the operation of the Log wizard Three types of message can be displayed INFO General processing information WARNING Messages which may mean that the output stream will contain errors ERROR Messages indicating catastrophic information which will cause the wizard to disable the Next button and prevent further progress An icon is displayed in the top right corner of the window and as a prefix to any messages displayed in the Progress amp Information log The icons are used to indicate the current processing phase of the Make Seamless Wizard Program cP Analysis cy Multiplex Hi Selecting an Input File The first action is to identify the input or source transport stream Tektronix HakeSeamless Wizard Program Info nput Enter the name of a fle or hit the browse button to find a file Then click the Next button toget the program into from this He File Ses_10s mpa m Standard MPEG DVB f ATSC S cripte Foge amp Information MPEG Test System Type Time Message Digital Wideo Broadcasting Tektronix ts Test rf oy stem Back Cancel Enter the filename in the File field The browse button can be used to open a standard Windows Open dialog box and locate files 12 2 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Make Seamless Wizard NOTE Only the filename will be shown bu
78. a script file is saved in an unreadable encrypted format that only the ScriptParser can interpret ScriptPad is associated with the scp and scx suffixes used for unencrypted and encrypted scripts respectively during the installation process The script encryption process employs a robust 128 bit symmetric key algorithm based on the Feistel block cipher which is similar to that used in the dongle encryption scheme Additional functions have been included to increase the entropy of the cipher text Each time a script is encrypted a unique file is generated This makes it hard to determine the algorithm by making small changes to plain text and then observing the change made to the cipher text In addition the cipher text is protected from interference meaning that changes to the cipher text are detected on decryption and the altered file will be rejected NOTE A dongle is a security or copy protection device that must be connected to an I O port of the computer while the program is run Programs that use a dongle may query the port at start up and at programmed intervals thereafter and terminate if it does not respond with the expected validation code MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Glossary Glossary Accuracy AIT ASCII ATSC CAT CDT CVCT DSM CC FIT ES ETT MGT MMT NIT PAT PES PID PIT PMT PSI PSIP RAID RRT RST SDT MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual The closeness of the indicated value
79. a start up template Any carousel session file XML format can be used as a template It can be used primarily to retain settings which are required from session to session for example network settings 7 35 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation 7 36 Startup Settings Select the Use the following settings option to set the session defaults locally TS Bitrate Duration PSI SI Type Output Settings Output File The bit rate of the output transport stream Range 0 25 Mbit s to 90 Mbit s The duration value in seconds available when this fea ture is enabled will dictate the minimum length of the transport stream This selection will dictate the tables that are automati cally created at startup If MPEG PSI is selected only the PAT and PMT will be generated If DVB SI is selected the mandatory DVB tables NIT actual TDT SDT actual and EIT P F actual will also be generated Select the Warn before checkbox to display a mes sage when a change to the Stream Generation PSI SI Type property is attempted see page 7 40 Enter the filename to be used in generating an output transport stream or browse to find an existing filename Automatically set the default values If at the start of a session with no carousels defined changes are made to the Stream Generation Properties see page 7 40 whether or not the changes are saved as Carousel Generator defaults is dictated by this setting
80. allows a different file name to be specified This options is disabled when no file is open Exit Closes any file that is open and terminates the program MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 15 Multiplexer Menus and Controls Edit menu options View menu options Table 8 4 list the options available in the Edit menu Table 8 4 Edit menu options Command Add Modity Delete Cut Copy Paste Export Payload Export Elementary Stream Export Section Data Import Section Data Function Adds a table section loop to the currently selected item in the Navigator or Section View Edits the information in the currently selected field or item Deletes the item currently selected Cuts the current selection from the window to the clipboard Copies the contents of the current selection to the clipboard Pastes data from the clipboard to the part of the transport structure that holds that type of data Extracts and exports the payload of the source transport stream PID in the form of a simple data file Removes the transport stream PID and PES headers and exports the remaining information in the form of a simple data file Extracts and exports section data The created file can be imported as ES using Multiplexer s Add function or as SI using the Import Section Data option see next option Imports SI data from a file and analyzes it The section is added to the Navigator view Table 8 5 list the op
81. an asset will automatically include all the children as assets To include every object in a carousel add the carousel root node to the application The boot class can only contain one object it may be at any depth in the directory structure Adding an object to the Boot Class will displace any existing object Moving assets from the Object Carousel will automatically recreate the directory structure from the object carousel Moving assets from the hard disk directory tree will only recreate the structure below the source tree node When moving assets from the directory tree highlight a node in the asset tree as a target A right click context menu is available at all nodes in the application structure available options will depend on the node type MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Application Support Sa Assets D E MEHS Eby OF LR ee Add Child Ry ticker FAename Delete Toggle ildcard The context menu options operate on the currently highlighted node in the application structure as follows Add Child Adds a child node It can be subsequently renamed to indicate an object Rename Allows a node to be renamed Delete Deletes the node Toggle Wildcard Asset directory nodes can be identified as wildcard en tries A wildcard directory indicates that the directory and all of its children at the time of analysis are defined as assets Editing an Application Application editi
82. caried in Collection gt ey cs Tektronix To modify the collection properties highlight the required Collection node and select Properties from the right click menu 11 Select Next to display Step 5 Imported Elementary Streams MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 17 Carousel Generator Carousel Wizard Step 5 Imported Elementary Streams In addition to the carousel objects elementary streams from a transport stream can be included in the session Carousel Wizard 5 Imported Elementary Streams gg Please select an MPEG file containing elementary streams Eonian Wonne eliri generatia p 12 Use the Source File E button to identify and select the transport stream The contents of the source file are displayed 13 Select one or more elements from this tree to import into the current session or select a program node to import every element contained by the program 7 18 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Wizard Carousel Wizard 5 Imported Elementary Streams DriStreamsiBbCl Uae mpg ee El DE Program Contents in File BBCIAUGZF7 mpg a ma BBL UNE Prog 4767 PMT PID 1 100 Ox044 pi ee aa ee E 600 Uae Des oe KOD Mik wa 17 eoo Eoniniane Wonne linn generatia g Note that only elements from the same source program can be selected All elements included in the session will be included in the output stream whether they are refere
83. change according to which table is selected To preview the result of filtering select the Apply button For example the following settings will result in the display shown overleaf T able ID Jox02 PMT Clear All Apply Exclude all table sections program number Min 4 Man 65535 NOTE Minimum and maximum values may be entered in either decimal 12345 or hexadecimal OxA12B format MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 63 Multiplexer Views Saving Loading SI Filter 8 64 Settings Navigator BBCIAUG 7_mpg ojl ORs aS Pall Tables H EIT_actual_pf fg EIT_other_pt m e NIT_actual H E PAT a g PMT E Frogram 4479 Version 4 Section U Pid 4479 08117 7F E Program 4543 Version 4 Section 0 Pid 4543 0 11BF m e SDT_actual H E SDT_other m TOT The parameters for each table must be set individually Overall settings can be applied individually by selecting the Apply button when a setting is made or as a whole by making all of the settings and selecting the OK button To preview the result of filtering select the Apply button All settings can be cleared by selecting the Clear All button Note that filter settings remain in force for as long as the current multiplex is active The settings are lost when the Multiplexer is closed unless they have been previously saved The filter settings made in the Display Filter dialog box can be saved and subsequently reapplied to the same st
84. changes MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 35 MPEG Player Menus and Controls About Dialog Box When you select the About command from the Utility menu the About dialog box is displayed About MPEG Player Enabling Innovation Tektronis and Tek are registered trade marks of Tektronis Inc Copyright c 2004 Tektronis Inc Product Hame MTS400 MPEG Player Sottvwane version 5 06 i ee 5 2S y a i E i ES ia a Hardware version MOD 1 1h Oo8aliten Module HW Code Main Ep 03 Op 07 08 160 This dialog box shows the version of the MPEG Player application and hardware version of the main and installed interface modules your versions may differ 10 36 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Menus and Controls Menus in the Record Screen This subsection describes the menus available in the Record screen File Menu The File menu in the Record screen contains commands for setting the save mode and for saving and loading a preset file Table 10 12 File menu commands Record screen Component Text Save Specifies the file name used when you save a stream data When you select this command the Save as dialog box appears By default the current data yymmddq is used as a file name Save Mode Sets the save mode when you save stream data You can select Over Write or New File In the Over Write mode the existing file is over written by the new file with the name
85. class must be in the associated carousel if it is not the timing test cannot be performed An asset is a BIOP object in the carousel that is used by the boot class If the asset is not in the associated carousel the user will be warned that the assets could not be found and the tests will be performed as if those assets had not been defined Selecting the Cancel button closes the dialog and discards the new application data MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 75 Carousel Analyzer Application Support 6 76 Testing an Application Adding Objects to the Application The Test button at the bottom of the application dialog box allows items in the application to be tested against the currently selected carousel This can be used to ensure that the correct carousel has been selected for the application and that all of the objects are present The results of the test are displayed in the Application Test dialog Application Test E Carusel Object Carousel ID S 05 DSI IC O 00 PID 2506 UxSca Applications Descriptors LetterLoader aka post bos SUMMA W Boot class present eg 12 out ot 12 assets found Objects are moved from the Object Carousel pane to the Boot Class or Asset panes using the Add Asset button T do this highlight the object in the Object Carousel pane select Add Asset and note that the object is added to the adjacent application structure Making a node that has children
86. comelete 13009 Se anching brale Pie low firich porte 130071 Seanch for other PIDs hoop inih poite complete 13 02 23 Muhiplexing Teklionist Hakes eam ert Wizard Summary F Su i T P Aish bo ek Searching hor prank FAG boop Arash pink Search lor poet PID loop Emish pant complete Cesiching lai olhei PIDs ep fresh paris Search io ote PIDs heap finish points complete Muh Hg Multipesng complete The output file will contain a program which when played out and looped with the Continuous Time Stamping option enabled will demonstrate minimal picture disturbances at the loop point MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 12 11 ee Transport Stream Cutter a l Transport Stream Cutter The Transport Stream Cutter is a wizard that creates a new file from a slice of an existing file It is run from the Windows desktop There are four pages including the optional introduction page Starting the Wizard MPEG 2 TS Cutter Wizard x ektronix Stream Cut Wizard Copyright Tektronix Inc 1995 2002 Version 6 7 0 0 This wizard will guide you through the process of cutting a section from a Mpeg File It can also help you repair some dam You can use the Stream Editor or Stream Analyser to view the files in hexadecimal format to assist in selecting regions to cut Digital Video a Broadcasting T Skip this page on startup Cancel Specify the packets to cut Enter packet number of firs
87. directory and its contents are moved When items file or directory that are part of a tree structure are moved between collections the complete path from the Service Gateway is shown The icons above the moved object are grayed out to indicate that they are carried in another collection in the screenshot they are the directory icons without a check mark or a cross within them Carousels a xX E B Collections List 1 Carousel E Collections for MHP Object Carousel ID 1 PID 100 Prog 1 H Colection S J lt lt Service Gateway gt gt S snake i de da res a snake 4 down png 4 edge prng B horizontal pra ew LD left png A point png 4 right png E up png F vettikalpra F Collection LJ lt lt Service Gateway gt gt lt carried in Collection1 gt snake lt carmed in Collection gt A Controller class 7 GamePane class A Model class A ScoreDisplay class A SnakeXlet class Carousels Collections MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 69 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Programs 7 70 The node description indicates the owning collection NOTE When an object is not included in the synchronization process the icon changes from A to see also Synchronicity page 7 65 Objects can also be moved between collections in the same carousel by right clicking on the object to be moved and selecting the collection from the
88. fey DSI Id 0 00 PIO 150 056 E A l DI Messages iy Dl td 1 01 PID 150 096 pi k Module Id 65516 Oxffec PID 150 0x56 PA Block number 0 moduleld 65516 Dxffe of Tr Module ld 65517 Oxted PID 150 096 ai hii Module Id 65518 Oxffee PID 150 056 E a Module Id 69519 0sffef PID 150 036 oe 5 Modules a k Module Id 65576 Oxffec PID 150 056 FD Block number U moduleld 69916 Dstfec FI cf Big Module ld 65517 Oxtted PID 150 0496 Eia Module Id 65518 Oxffee PID 150 0x98 EE a Module ld 65519 0sffef PID 150 0x6 DIE DII items contain module items that the DII message references All modules are also listed under the Modules item Modules may be in compressed form the version of the compressed icon is displayed in the Version column of the right pane Fal Modules are listed independently of DII messages in case the DII does not reference the module correctly for a compliant stream each module is listed as a child of the DII node and within the Modules node MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 41 Carousel Analyzer Views The following illustration indicates the nodes that are accessible from the U N Download view aj UC_abed mpg U N Download Fl fal U N Download Messages DS Messages B h DSI id O 0x0 PID 150 0496 Dll Messages pe E Did 1 0x1 PID 150 0 56 5 a Module Id 65576 Osffec PID 150 0046 U N Message DSI node U N Messa
89. i r wte6 outed e rE eE ea ae E n Ea 6 58 PD NIG Wat 28 ease Bin edo oi AEE E AA E A 6 61 LOC VIOW acct hades Bandit a ina E Rn shies bland Ra end Mab gn ial s 6 64 Cycle Times VICW S02 e bets nie ee dio a Nae e Ee e Reed ide he ee dls 6 67 Application SUPPOLl s iweb os io Enis RRR eS ONS eRe 6 71 Application Management ccc ccc eee rnnr ereere 6 71 Application Definition 65 c 060 4 sn oed ibs HO ASEGE Owe NESS AO heRSS oes 6 73 Application Timing lt 3 255 63s be oes EEO AS EGS Oe oes ES seo eerren See 6 78 MHP SUpPOrG55 6555 655546 5b coca Se oe Ss 6 91 RiehteClick Ment OpUONS serieren esse a Santee mcnoe Ahem ate mages 4 6 92 ADDMCALOM Lite OMES e auc cd ceeded tne tote pe ivatetbaddeecebeg nies 6 93 IRGL PONCE E E A E E E A T 6 95 CPN Tes sats one AE EE E EE E A AE ERTE E E ee teas 6 95 ENOC DCCRIN O 2 0345 nanen adara ee aaae aeaa aa aa 6 96 Acronyms and Abbreviations 0 ccc cece ee eee een ees 6 97 REEI 2265404352 52etascserennson Scat A seer enness A 6 98 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual V Table of Contents Volume 2 Carousel Generator Multiplexer vi Gettin Started spraigi ss coher fonds ee eis cae Gees 7 1 Data Broadcastin OVV W 22 2ce eoneteseetiori set oneeeted Hie ees 7 1 Carousel Generator Overview 22ie tein bone ecie tiie EE he vee 7 2 Starting the ApplCallon serrer ekmire e En a bee rvehed Rte Vee 7 6 Carouse Wizard 5 5c asst orisitess saree rit aiaeti ease aaron E ie E 7 9
90. identified with Manual Signaling from the related PID node The Signal Carousel command can be found on the right click menu associated with each PID node When this command is selected the stream will be reprocessed During processing only the DSM CC tables on the selected PID will be analyzed w Tektronix Carousel Analyser abel_mpg Ele Edt View Graph Window Help Era Services E Service 1 Een DSM CC ON messages on PID 150 0 56 tag 1 5 E i Active PIDs PK PID O 0x0 a by PID 17 011 H EA PID 100 0x64 E E PID 150 096 Section tat C3 View Transport Packet f Section tal View Cycle Time b FA Ea PID 8131 0x1 2h View Repetition Es View Bitrate fie Ede View Graph Window Help Ema Services S i Service 1 Hren DSM CC U N messages on PID 150 096 tag 11 B 28 Object Carousel ID 3 0x3 DS ID 0 0x0 PID 150 0x36 B 09 Service Gateway fy Active PIDs H E PID O 0x0 H E PID 17 011 4 5 PID 100 0x64 EB PID 150 0436 of Section abd 59 Ox3b DSMCC_UN Section table_id 60 03c DSMCC_DDB ES PID 8191 0x1 fff The user interface is updated when the stream has been processed Any carousels that have been identified are added to the Carousel view The signal icon used inly in the carousel and PID views indicates that the PID has been subjected to the manual signaling process The PID view will display a list of the table types
91. in the generated stream Changes made to the stream content are reflected in the PSI SI informa tion Individual settings are accessible in the various Programs properties dialog boxes The PSI SI node displays either MPEG or DVB service information that cannot be easily included elsewhere m For MPEG PSI only the Transport Stream ID which is carried in the PAT is displayed m For DVB SI the Transport Stream ID is augmented by mandatory DVB SI NIT SDT actual EIT actual present following and TDT The TDT Time Date Table and the NIT Network are the only entries under the PSI SI node Parameters for the other tables are available in other dialog boxes Under each Program node is a list of all the program components Carousels and video and audio elementary streams The Elementary Streams node lists the elementary streams that are included in the stream These can be associated with one or more programs Note that the elementary streams will be included in the generated stream even if they are not associated with a program MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 71 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Clock Reference 7 72 This node indicates which PIDs are carrying PCRs Adding a PCR 1 Highlight the Clock Reference node in the Programs view 2 From the right click menu select New PCR A Carousel Session 1 Program Carousel Smee Clock Reference 1 PCR only PIC New PCR Si PCR P
92. ioral one tee hee ete Bie nae a Gand hh tcn ese Baas Go ead Initial Processing Of MPEG Biles s s4446405 irestore aaduan Mea oe dGe Initial Processing of BMR Pues 5 54456005 2o44 bees ee b oes Mea bee S Menus and Controls cc ccc cc ccc reer cece cece eee eeees WOO DAT Axi ies a able te Aa oS BA hota Akaka ew A hak See od ALE my Salus Bar criaria iai kati paw as Se A eked As a Aa Rakes Wien OPHION 2225434 foes A eA thease Sees eee Smem List essere irian tnana a hase stabe nua SEISCHIN OO S aE eae ea eaa dak bo aes Wks aeaa a ates PROCESSING SEIMS 222 2c aaraa bed oes ek ee oe eet a E ee S Event and IVECSSAPE LOGS 5 pace irean aay hes oA eee sees Global Event Oe a aucetl Satie dbdain Slaw sete aosete Spiess PIDE m LOC 22 nae hk Leow hee Phe be eee A hee he ehh ee yen Detail Messase LOCOS sini te to ote Rte Lele Rae Aes anes Results Graphs COMMON PCAMUICS uo ibis Haw PN adie Ais ea eA aa OMe wis ede ar FIE Elementary Buber Graph seeren ede ead Pate eed swat e Pee bw ds Men Multiplex or Main Buffer Graph sa0 860507 82 beds tee boa eeaeeewds de Transport Buffer Graph Detail Message Logging Elementary Stream Analyzer Getting Started Starting the ES Analyzer Opening an MPEG Stream Understanding the Main Window and Icons 0 eee ee eens Tree View and Navigation Header Extension and Hex Displays MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems
93. is added below the highlighted node Er a Carousel Session 1 Program 1 Carousel Ee oe ee Carousel a el 1 PID 100 mee Prog 1 5 a lt ig Sorice a H A de H res NOTE When directories are dragged and dropped from Windows Explorer all subdirectories and files will be included If the Shift key is held down during this action the topmost directory name is not included 7 54 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Adding Files 1 Highlight the directory node in the carousel where the file is to be added Carausels El Ei Carousel Session 1 Carousel E MHP Object Carousel 0 1 PIO 1 07 El p Carousel Contents 2 tems lt 0 by 2 Select Carousel gt Contents gt Add file s The Select File s to Add dialog box is displayed Session Player Tools Help 2 Kev PAGihan y r Import BIEN enter Stream sy ll Mew Carousel C me Carousel wizard Chri hy Carousel Properties 3 Contents ee S nichronise ay Delete Carousel Add Directory w Delete All Carousels Her Direcha a 3 Select the file s to be added MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 95 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation 4 Select OK to add the files to the carousel Select File s to Add fa Eg Look in E snake 3 i Controler class GameP ane class Py Model class oconeD splay class snakeslet class
94. j 0 j lt parameter_length j parameter byte I ETSI TS 101 812 section 10 9 1 CG Value 0x03 user MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Comment This descriptor specifies the Java application parameters and is accessed on the Java app file gt Properties gt Java Properties page The parameter list is edited by using the Parameters list box and buttons 7 101 Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream Table 7 34 Java application location descriptor Descriptor Syntax CG Value dvb j application location descriptor descriptor tag 0x04 descriptor length base directory length for i 0 i lt base_ directory length i base directory byte user I classpath extension length for i 0 i lt classpath_ext_length i classpath extension byte user I for i 0 i lt N i initial class byte user I ETSI TS 101 812 section 10 9 2 HTML Application Descriptors Table 7 35 HTML application descriptor Descriptor Syntax CG Value dvb html application descriptor Descriptor tag 0x03 descriptor length appid set length for i 0 i lt appid_set_length i application id user I for j 0 j lt N j parameter bytes 7 102 Comment This descriptor specifies the Java application path and is accessed via Java app file gt Properties gt Java Properties page gt Base Directory field gt Classpath extension field gt Initial c
95. message changed Right clicking on the any item in the structure view will open this menu OC abed mpg Section table_id 60 0x3c DSMCL 3 a C Download table_id 60 save Ax private_indicat gt Go To Next Chi G dsmec_section Wiew Transport Packet List be om hee zal mihman Using the Save As option the structure can be saved to a separate file The Go To Next option moves the structure view to the next repetition of the same item If the current view is the last in the stream the option will loop back to the first repetition in the stream MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 53 Carousel Analyzer Views The information displayed by the structure view may be carried in one or more transport packets By right clicking the item and selecting View Transport Packet List a list of the transport packets carrying the information will be displayed Highlighting a Packet Number and selecting View will display the selected transport packet structure Several structure views can be opened in this way but the views are not enabled until the Transport Packet Contributions dialog is closed The Low and High Index entries in the Transport Packet Contributions dialog box indicate the first and last byte respectively of the packet that contributes to the structure The screenshots below illustrate an example of this sequence of actions OC_abed mpg PIDs _ Oy x oy Active PIDs E
96. move from another instance of Multiplexer to the Navigator Tables view Tables can be copied or moved from existing multiplexes using either of the available methods If a similar table type is already present in the multiplex the contents of the copied table will be integrated with it A table is automatically removed when the last section is deleted see page 8 89 See Exporting a Section page 8 90 See Importing a Section page 8 91 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 81 Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Sections Adding a New Section to a PSI SI Table 8 82 Methods available Highlight the parent table level in the Navigator Tables view and select Add from the right click menu m Drag and drop copy only from the Examine TS window Tables view to the Navigator Tables view m Drag and drop copy move from another instance of Multiplexer to the Navigator Tables view To add a section to a table select the parent table in the Navigator Tables view For example to add a section to the SDT select SDT Tables Navigator tek_syml_ test mpg Y PSI SI Tables c e BAT fog EIT_actual_pi e NIT_actual modiy H TOT Delete Cut Then select Add from the right click menu The Select PID amp Table ID dialog box is displayed only if a PID and or Table ID need to be identified Otherwise the selected section is automatically created MTS400 Series MPEG T
97. of the auto generated content and which options or properties affect that content Note that all PSI SI related properties can be accessed through nodes in the program tab There is one field that has a huge effect on the PSI and SI tables that Carousel Generator produces the Session s PSI SI type field This can be accessed from the Stream Generation Properties dialog box Player gt Stream Generation Properties or by right clicking on the SI node in the program tab selecting the SI Type sub menu and selecting one of the two options QPCR PID 8190 1 FFE MPEG PSI 42 73 ID 1235 42 75 IO 1236 00 Ox0064 MPEG PSI PAT PMT and AIT for MHP carousels will be gener ated DVB SI In addition to the standard MPEG tables Carousel Gen erator will output NIT actual SDT actual EIT present following actual and TDT sections MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 81 Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream MPEG PSI tables Table 7 11 Program Association Table PAT Table Syntax program association section table _id section syntax_indicator 0 reserved section length transport_stream_ id reserved version_number current_next_indicator section number last_section number for i 0 i lt n i program number reserved if program_number 0 network PID I else program map PID I I CRC_32 ISO IEC 13818 1 Systems section 2 4 4 3 7 8
98. or ISDB T transport stream you need to select ARIB for proper display Numeric Sets the base value used to describe the component information in the hierarchy display You can select Decimal Hex or Octal Ext Play Start Sets whether or not to start stream output using a trigger signal applied to the Trig In Out connector You can select Off Rise or Fall When you select Rise the stream output is started at the rising edge of the applied trigger signal When you select Fall the stream output is started at the falling edge of the applied trigger signal SPI Output Enable Sets whether the signal output from the SPI connector is enabled or not TDT TOT or STT When you select this button the following TDT TOT dialog box appears The button name changes which standard is selected in the Standard list box TDT TOT for ARIB or DVB and STT for ATSC Use this dialog box to change the initial date and time of the TDT Time and Data Table TOT Time Offset Table or STT System Time Table in the selected stream MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Menus and Controls The button is disabled when MPEG72 is selected in the Standard list box TOTATOT Original System time Original Uses the original default value that is already defined in the selected stream System Time Uses the clock calendar of the operating system to set the initial value When you select this option the date and time
99. stream at the nominal repetition rate Errors are reported whenever packets for any PID cannot be encoded at their specified minimum rate The complete text may be copied onto the windows clipboard using the Copy option from the right click menu The text can also be cleared with the Clear command Both commands are also available from the Edit menu MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Multiplexing Transport Streams Stop The Multiplex Engine can be stopped at any time while it is running This will abandon processing and close the file The file will contain all of the packets synthesized up to the time the engine was stopped To stop the Multiplex Engine select the Stop option from the Multiplex menu Adh_ 10s mpqg Multiple Window Help Stele _ Standard Mode E Espert Mode Alternatively select the stop button on the Toolbar ee NE E tithe mpg MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 113 Multiplexer Multiplexing Transport Streams Exporting the Multiplex Configuration File 8 114 Export NOTE Multiplexer is used for generating both conformant and non conformant streams Use the Export and Export As options to save copies of the specification for non conformant streams in a multiplex configuration file This file does not include a copy of the transport stream instead it refers to the original MPEG file by name and location The multiplex configuration file ca
100. streams are analyzed and displayed according to the selected standard MPEG DVB ATSC or ISDB Scripts are used by the analysis process this allows private PSI SI tables and descriptors to be defined NOTE Most examples given in this section of the User Manual are based on DVB SI You should remember that Multiplexer is equally at home with all major DTV standards MPEG 2 DVB ATSC and ISDB as well as the major exten sions to those standards Program Specific Information PSI Service Information SI and Program and System Information Protocol PSIP are often referred to as simply SI in this section The Transport Stream Analyzer program should always be used for reliable analysis of transport streams containing DSM CC or MPE addressable sections In the absence of TS Analyzer it is acceptable to use Multiplexer for analysis provided that the DSM CC or MPE scripts are first applied using Expert mode in the Stream Interpretation dialog box see Scripts page 8 5 However when multiplexing streams containing DSM CC or MPE addressable sections the related scripts must not be active MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Getting Started Starting the Program The program can be started by selecting the Multiplexer option from the Start gt Programs menu or by double clicking on the Multiplexer Shortcut on the desktop lul Tektronis Buffer Analyser pe Tektronix ES Analyser z hl mine SEL
101. the carousel to be received starting with a selected component of the carousel Selecting one or more BIOP objects from a carousel and View Carousel Cycle Time from the right click menu generates the Carousel Cycle Times statistics window The information can also be displayed in graphical form by selecting View Carousel Cycle Time Graph 3 0C_abcd mpg Object Carousels Ioj X Object Carousels Baa Object Carousel ID 3 0 3 DS 1D 0 0x0 PID 150 0 38 El Service Gateway E a Fb E ap Carousel Cycle Times lel Es O E BIOP Object NumCycles Mins Maxis Std Deviation Pire EE 6 8 69 71 0 105 I or sous zo 75 23 aso ma gnam View Birat The i LR ADOC SE FID 1S01d0 5 45 5 1 59 0 708 B Q AFAM View Composite Bitrate A AFRM Hb View Repetition B B d fel Save As 2 i EP View Entity Cycle Time L View Entity Cycle Time Graph E View Carousel Cycle Time OC_abed mpg Carousel Cycle Times g G 14 15 7 03 f DoE M S N F a G ws NLANG E Z4 3 2 1 05 LD LO o Lo L0 D Lo f pe A N m ag D Transport Stream Time s PO 150 te 0 ta bis PO 150 Id Ora e doc h PID 150 Id Dabic A DOCFILE CPP O PID 150 Id Dnaidifred In the Carousel Cycle Times window the BIOP Object column identifies the PID Carousel ID and Object that the user identified as a starting point for the test The information can also be displayed in graphical form MTS400
102. the associated application by default script files are associated with the ScriptPad utility For a script file to be viewed successfully the file extension scp must be associated with a text editor in the MS Windows environment The MPEG Test System installation program associates by default a script editing utility called ScriptPad you can use another text editor for example MS Notepad if preferred ScriptPad is a simple script editor that can be installed with the MPEG Test System Scripts can be viewed and edited as required depending upon the file permissions Two options are available when opening a stream for multiplexing to open an existing stream or to open a previously prepared multiplex configuration file Three options are available when preparing a stream to be multiplexed m Create a new null stream using File gt New m Open an existing stream Import a multiplexer configuration file Any file holding a recorded or synthesized sample of a stream that is conformant to the relevant standards can be opened and used as a basis for a new multiplex Note that the Examine TS option see page 8 58 can be used to preview stream Some non conformant streams can be opened although only the conformant parts can be edited usefully Any tables that are carried in a conformant PID and have the correct syntax will appear in the output transport stream as will any elementary streams whether referenced by a table or not w
103. the wizard and implement all changes MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 27 Multiplexer Wizards Transport Wizard Creating a New Transport 8 28 Stream Toolbar icon The Transport wizard allows you to easily create a basic stream populated with the PSI SI necessary to hold program information It may also be invoked when PSI SI is to be added to an existing stream NOTE If when the Transport Wizard is used to populate a new stream the defaults in the various dialogs are retained and the resulting stream will conform to the standard selected The following steps show the screens used in the creation of a DVB stream 1 Open a new file File gt New 2 Select the Program tab in the Navigator view 4 Program Pids 3 Select and highlight the Transport Structure element at this stage in the creation of a new stream this will be the only element visible in the Program Navigator view 4 Select Add from the right click menu Navigator Untitled k Transport Stre ar Modify l Delete Cyr Gopy Paste Froperties MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Wizards Transport Stream Settings Transport Stream The Transport Stream Settings dialog box allows you to set up the transport stream identity part of the PAT section and version Adjustments can also be made to the PAT timing if required by selecting the PAT button PAT tim
104. this value Disable the Limit record size checkbox record the input stream to the full free space in the hard disk or RAM When the Limit record size checkbox is enabled the size in MB or the available recording time and data size are automatically set In addition When the check box is enabled the Continu ous Recording check box becomes disabled NOTE When you set the pretrigger portion the same free space as the record size is required MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 39 MPEG Player Menus and Controls There is a list box in the Record Size field to select which record target RAM or hard disk is used to record the input stream Trigger Position Sets the trigger position used to record the input stream You can set the trigger position by a time h m s or file size MB Continuous Recording Sets whether to enable Continuous Recording With Continuous Recording you can record multiple stream files continu ously on the hard disk When the check box is enabled the spin box at the right side of the check box becomes available Use the spin box to set the number of files to create before stopping Continuous Recording After the specified number of files are created stream capture stops automatically You can set the value from 2 to 32767 When this option is selected the Without Limit check box becomes disabled Refer to Using the Continuous Recording Feature beginning on page 10 50 for deta
105. to move the icon cursor through the hierarchy The hierarchy display scrolls if applicable when the icon cursor reaches the top or bottom of the displayed portion of the hierarchy Click an element in the hierarchy to select and highlight it Table 10 1 describes the icons you may encounter in the hierarchical display of the MPEG Player for transport streams using the MPEG 2 ARIB DVB and ATSC formats Table 10 2 describes icons that are specific to transport streams using DVB format Table 10 3 describes icons that are specific to transport streams using ARIB format Table 10 4 describes icons that are specific to transport streams using the ATSC format Refer to Icon Text and Dialog Box on page 10 15 for descriptions of the icon text and dialog box associated with the hierarchy icon Table 10 1 Icons used for MPEG 2 ARIB DVB and ATSC formats Icon Element type ISDB T Broadcast transport stream that is defined ARIB STD B31 S TMCC Transport stream to which TMCC information is inserted into 8 bytes in its Reed Solomon area 16 bytes M TMCC Transport stream to which TMCC information is inserted into its sync byte area and having super frame structure Non TS Data stream other than transport stream format Transport Stream TS This icon represents all transport stream packets that make up the stream Program Assocation Table PAT One or more transport packets with a PID value and table_id value of 0x00
106. to the true value Application Information Table American Standard Code for Information Interchange Advanced Television Systems Committee Conditional Access Table MPEG Carrier Definition Table Cable Virtual Channel Table ATSC Digital Storage Media Command and Control Event Information Table DVB ATSC Elementary Stream Extended Text Table ATSC Master Guide Table ATSC Modulation Mode Table Network Information Table DVB Program Association Table MPEG Packetized Elementary Stream Packet Dentifier Program Information Table ATSC Program Map Table MPEG Program Specitic Information MPEG Program and System Information Protocol ATSC Redundant Array of Independent Disks Regional Ratings Table ATSC Running Status Table DVB Service Description Table DVB Glossary 1 Glossary SI Service Information DVB SIT Satellite Information Table STT System Time Table ATSC TDT Time and Date Table DVB TDT Transponder Data Table ATSC TNT Transponder Name Table TOT Time Offset Table DVB TS Transport Stream TSTD Transport Streams Description Table T STD Transport Stream System Target Decoder TVCT Terrestrial Virtual Channel Table ATSC UTC Universal Co ordinated Time VCT Virtual Channel Table ATSC XML Extensible Markup Language Glossary 2 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipment
107. wee Beads ore a eee Which Tests Have Been Applied to a Program PID What is the Stream Type of a PID 2 cc dena eee seed bows ee eew How Many Programs are in the Stream 0 2 cee eee eee What are the Contents of the Programs and What PIDs are They On What is the Bit Rate of each PID ina Program 0 0 0c eee What is the Latest Version Number of the Program Association Table PAT MAINS nk Ranh he Oa ee ate a ney Dania hil ea Sead Ran How do I Examine a Transport Packet cc cece eens SUV OUNGGCS soe ee eee eee Pee eee es PES Analyzer Gethin Started aiiors8 4 G8 es sh aa ete wk a ea eae oe ew ees Satine De Prodana aiid cee Uae hhe cee niye heehee tee he eens ORONS mic tases chee ec he tee a a ae heehee ees Openine a Pile 2544224 ieodaieeocarwi aes E eee aee kes Menus and Controls ccc ccc cc ccc cer ce cee cece ee eecees OO I DAN 1 Sosa ise beh hate panto das Gut ots bene clew eae Sao eee bees Slats HB dl ec exh wots Sat bss en Beh OS had Ps ion Be OS Oe hos see Beas Sidet Bir scans dun dase God hk Ok 6 Oe Aad Me RARE Dee bad bond EAE IMCNUS And Opm seinra a Bee oot oad been ORES ae Oo bao a ew h wes Packet Hex View sssssossssososossosooossooooossooooo Packet Header oe scat rea lege a T as de Shee Sta de enh tts ce a Event LOS sec bie ac cain sent ete eighca NEEESE EENEN ETENEE EEREN EEA Packet SClCCHOM vs amp 4 attasotes bo EA Sra ee bide ee he
108. when the stream is opened If the script is not selected or enabled the stream will not fail to be analyzed but any custom data will be reported as either an error in the stream configuration or as an elementary stream PID Scripts can only be selected and enabled when no files are open The Stream Interpretation dialog box is available when a file is open but all activity is disabled Note that a script file will not be used for analysis until m Itis present in the Scripts text box in the current analysis mode m Itis successfully enabled by closing the Stream Interpretation dialog box using the OK button tktronix Klultiplexer view Options Window Help 7 Event Log w Toolbar Status Bar To open the Stream Interpretation dialog box with all files closed select the Interpretation option from the View menu MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 5 Multiplexer Getting Started The Stream Interpretation dialog box is displayed as shown below Stream Interpretation ATSC A90 I Script Selection Current Expert mode controls The top half of the dialog box is concerned with selecting scripts The text box Scripts lists the scripts currently selected The area adjacent to the text box is dedicated to Expert mode controls Script Selection The selection area of the Stream Interpretation dialog box is best viewed and used from left to right The
109. will ask if the file should be saved Select Yes to export the file No to close the file without saving or Cancel to undo the close command and keep the file open Multiplexer EJ AN Save changes to DAT est np Ho Cancel MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual ee Menus and Controls The following pages contain descriptions of the different menu options toolbar controls status bar icons and user interface Menu Options The following pages describe all of the menu options Since many of the options are context sensitive they will be available only when their function is appropri ate for the selected display or window element When a menu option is not available the option is grayed out File menu options Table 8 3 list the options available in the File menu Table 8 3 File menu options Command Function Close Closes the current file This option is available as soon as analysis starts If the wrong file is being opened or the wrong options are selected selecting this option will abandon the analysis and close the file Examine TS Opens the Examine TS window which allows a brief summary of the stream to be viewed before it is subjected to full analysis Export Exports the current multiplex specification in a form that can be imported even if it no longer generates a conformant transport stream This option is disabled when no file is open Export As Exports the current file as above and
110. 0 carrying audio was analyzed and then another PID 289 carrying video was analyzed A general TEXT message is output at the start of processing for each PID Options to select which types of message are displayed are available from the Show menu To move forwards and back through the log use the scroll bar on the right of the window the Page Up Page Down Cursor Up Arrow and Cursor Down Keys NOTE If more than one PID is processed concurrently by Buffer Analyzer the records will be interleaved in the Tracer display Unless this interleaving is required processing one PID at a time will make it easier to follow the messages for each stream MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Tracer Getting Started Selecting Records Records may be selected for printing copying deleting and other Edit menu operations To do this they must first be selected A single record can be selected by clicking on it To select a contiguous range of streams click on the first record to be selected and then hold the Shift or key down and click on the last required record Alternatively click on the first record hold the left mouse button down and drag the pointer to the last record Selected records are repainted in the highlight color scheme By default this is black text on a magenta background For example File Edit Print Views Show Help I Mean transport rata 3001409 bits a Pid 69995 Audio TE 204pbytes B z000lbytes
111. 0 Section O Pid 16 0x10 Transport Wizard Complete Add a Program Wizard M Cancel This dialog box allows you to review the changes made by the wizard before confirming the process The wizard process can be cancelled thereby losing all changes by selecting the Cancel button At this stage in the creation of a new multiplex if you want to add programs leave the Add Program Wizard checkbox enabled and select Next If you do wish to add programs at this stage or want to add them by some other means clear the Add a Program Wizard checkbox The Next button label will change to Finish which allows you to exit the wizard and implement all changes When the Transport Wizard has closed note that the Navigator views are updated with the new PSI SI MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Wizards Program Wizard Adding a Program to a Tranport Stream Toolbar icon The Program Wizard allows you to add programs as required to a stream that is already populated with basic PSI SI Each use of the Program Wizard allows the addition of one program Adding more programs requires the wizard to be opened each time If a new stream is being created the Transport Wizard offers an opportunity to open the Program Wizard Alternatively in the Navigator Programs view highlight the Programs node and select Add from the right click menu NOTE If when the Program Wizard is used to add programs to a stream the d
112. 018 0x1782 Dest Pid 6018 0x1782 Source File S Projects Streams mhp_apps kpj CHSAUG27 mpg Elementary Stream Properties Imported elementary streams are allocated to the same PID used in the source program If there is any conflict with existing PIDs in the session a warning is displayed and an opportunity offered to make changes The elementary stream properties dialog box allows the PID to be changed A warning will be displayed if a conflict with an existing PID occurs Continuous looping of the stream during generation can also be enabled To select the Elementary Stream Properties dialog box highlight the elementary stream and select Elementary Stream Properties from the right click menu Linking Elementary Streams to Programs When a carousel is created a Program node is automatically created If the Carousel Wizard is used elementary streams can be added during the process Streams can also be added from a selected program as required Streams are added to the Program node s by dragging and dropping them from the Elementary Stream node Note that in this case they are simply linked to the Elementary Stream entry if they are deleted from the program they will continue to be listed under the Elementary Stream node However if an elementary stream is deleted from the Elementary Streams node it will also be deleted from the programs in which it is used Note also that the Elementary Streams Properties dialog box when access
113. 041 Pid 100 0 64 Key 00011 0x000b i Module Id 1 01 Pid 100 0 64 Rey 00012 0s 000r ce Module Id 1 0x1 Pid 100 0x64 Key 00015 0 0008 ce Module Id 2 0x2 Pid 100 064 Key 00034 0 00022 However when a directory object is found the keys of its child nodes can be resolved and its tree structure built correctly even though the directory object itself may still be unresolved MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 37 Carousel Analyzer Views El Unresolved Objects E3 Modulo d 0 0s0 Pid 100 0 64 Roy 0001 040007 pA Module Id 0 0s0 Pid 100 0x64 Key 00010 0x000a E Mo Absent Objects dule Id 0x0 Pid 100 064 Key 0008 040008 0 00 CEs 11 6pic01 jpg 11 7pie01 pg 118pi201 p3 154pic 1 jpg ar ow gif LE gif enable gif generic lih je hairline gif pdf gif Spacer git top mbd gif Objects referenced but not found are identified for example I directory object not found The path in which the absent object is recognized is also marked 44 El bl Serice aalen ay H cities aa DER 6 38 LOTT m Ga meteorologia vc lr Constants class Ey HelpCormponent class RP manager Ta Meteclet class 3 ov x stage L CL TT images man enu zones MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views Manual Signaling If a carousel is present in a stream but has not been found during analysis it can be
114. 1 21 4976 38 55 C 2 Tektronix II 0 00 59 84 59 84 F Program Duration A vertical dotted line indicates the upper limit of the multiplexed stream MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Views In the Transport Stream Properties dialog box View gt Properties with the Transport Stream node highlighted in the Navigator Programs view you can determine how and if the stream duration is updated The options available will be m Select Fixed to ensure that the stream duration can only be updated in the Stream Properties dialog box m Select Set to the greatest component stop time to ensure that the stream duration is set to the greatest stop time recorded in the SI PSI PSIP tables Component start and stop times changed in the Component Duration view are automatically updated in the SI PSI tables MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 69 Multiplexer Views Available Bitrate 8 70 The Available Bit rate view displays in graphical form the available bit rate for the duration of the multiplex The bit rate is calculated using the MGB2 measure Ref ETSI TR 101 290 Open the Component Bit rate view by selecting View gt Available Bitrate from the Menu Bar or by using the toolbar button a Component Duration tek_sym1_test mpg Showing 000 77 03 Curent 17 20 A Program Description Pid Start Stop Extent 1 Tektronix 17 20 77 04 WI PEG 172 Video 110 1720 7704 SSS SS 82
115. 2 CG Value Comment 0x00 oO 2 lt oe user SI node gt Properties gt MPEG SI page Transport Stream ID field oO gt lt CG does not support table versioning depends on the number of programs depends on the number of programs user Program node gt Properties gt PMT entry page Program Number field gt lt N CG does not specify the network PID a a 13818 1 describes it as optional user Program node gt Properties gt PMT entry page PMT PID field MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream Table 7 12 Program Map Table PMT Table Syntax CG Value Comment TS program map _section table _id section syntax_indicator 0 reserved section length program number reserved version_number current_next_indicator section number last_section number reserved PCR _PID reserved program _info_length for i 0 i lt program_info_length i descriptor for i 0 i lt N1 i stream _type reserved elementary PID reserved ES info length for i 0 i lt N2 i descriptor 0x02 0x3 user Program node gt Properties gt PMT entry page Program Number field 0x3 CG does not support table versioning 0x7 user Program node gt Properties gt PMT entry page PCR PID dropdown menu OxF auto user Auto generatio
116. 29809 7 Loop interval booo r M Loop Start Stop Time Enter the times that the selected source stream is to start and stop within the host transport stream Note that the overall duration of the host transport stream is defined through the Transport Stream Properties dialog box Loop Select this checkbox to loop the selected source stream for the duration of the synthesis A Loop Interval can be set that introduces a delay between each repeat of the source stream if zero is entered the source stream will loop continuously The Loop checkbox will always be disabled for transport stream types The Multiplexer can not loop transport streams Select OK to accept all changes and close the dialog box MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 95 Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Defining the PCR Placement On the Add Stream dialog box select the PCR tab this will allow PCR placement to be defined Add Stream EJ PID Source Timing PCR E Carny PCR Set Defaults PCR PID 156191 Initial PER i PCF Interval 26 m M Eesere PER hac uacy P Preserve PER internals Cancel Apply PCR for Elementary Streams Includes File Type Transport Packets PCRs are placed in the packets at the specified interval starting with the specified initial value PCR for Remultiplexed PIDs Includes File Type Transport Stream m If the Carry PCR checkbox is not enabled any PCRs in the packets will be re
117. 382 Rev 4 Implementation guidelines for data broadcasting DVB Digital terrestrial television MHEGS specification DTG ISO IEC 13522 5 1996 E MHEG S5 IS MHEG 10 A tutorial introduction to MHEG 5 Authors Strategy and Technology Ltd 11 ARIB STD B24 Data Coding and Transmission Specification for Digital Broadcasting 12 Multimedia Home Platform ETSI TS 101 812 v1 1 1 DVB MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual ee Ae Carousel Generator re oe ees Getting Started The Carousel Generator is aimed principally at the content provider user who simply wants to create a carousel to deliver content to a set top box quickly and efficiently The product also aims to support the more experienced MPEG user who wants to modify a carousel to test the effects on equipment along the broadcast chain Similarly the more experienced MPEG user can incorporate a carousel into a transport stream alongside video and audio content The assembled transport stream can be saved to an MPEG file Data Broadcasting Overview Data Broadcasting allows data to be transmitted in a similar way to the way in which video and audio services are delivered to end users Object and Data Carousels are intended for the periodic transmission of information in a transport stream Data Carousels contain modules of data of unspecified content whereas Object Carousels contain identifiable data objects such as JPEG files text files and application software Mul
118. 5 2 4 Short_event_descriptor The fields of the short_event_descriptor for the present event are all accessed through Program Node gt Properties gt Additional SI page This page also contains the checkbox Include EIT present following section for this service that controls whether an EIT will be transmitted for a particular service Table 7 27 Short event descriptor Descriptor Syntax CG Value Comment short_event_descriptor descriptor tag 0x4D descriptor length ISO_639 2 3 language code user gt Language Code dropdown event_name length for i 0 i lt event_name_length i event_name_char user Set to match the service name field I text_length for i 0 i lt text_length i text_char user gt Description field I ETSI EN 300 468 section 6 2 33 7 96 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream Time and Date Table TDT Table 7 28 Time and date table Table Syntax time date section table id section syntax_indicator reserved future use reserved section length UTC time I ETSI EN 300 468 section 5 2 4 Application Information Table AIT The TDT is accessed through the Time Date Table node under the DVB SI node in the program tab It carries current time information and the user can specify whether that information will be filled with the current system time or start at a time specified by the user and increment in real time CG Val
119. 6 EIT O to EIT 127 First Loop cogs table_type FID 21 0x15 conien A ear table toe version number 0 00 of the first eet number_bytes 16 0x10 A table type descriptors len 6 0x6 o descriptors ed 256 EIT Oto EIT 127 BR 256 EIT O to EIT 127 Contanertora A ty descriptors length 6 0x6 set of zero or Last Loop Bt descriptors more a i registration descriptor L desnintar tan f Mss Second Loop The loop for the first table EIT O has been expanded to show the fields and subordinate loops that it contains 8 50 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Views Syntax of a Multiple String The ATSC standard A65 defines a data structure called the Multiple String Structure Structure An instance of this structure may contain zero or more strings and each string may contain zero or more segments The syntax specified for a Multiple String Structure in A65 is multiple string structure number_strings for i O 7 lt number strings i ISO 639 language code number _ segments for j 0 j lt number_ segments j compression type mode number bytes for k 0 k lt number bytes k compressed string byte k j Using the notation of container loop and field nodes Section View represents the Multiple String Structure in the same way as any other data structure For example an Extended Text Table ETT carries its extended_text_message in a Multiple String Structu
120. 691 s Standard j n i Standard Interpretation TS Rate TS Duration Progress From left to right the following information is displayed on the Status Bar Message Field Filter Status Standard Interpretation TS Rate amp Duration User Mode Processing Status Processing Progress Provides a description of any button or menu option over which the cursor pointer is placed Other non criti cal messages may also be shown Indicates the status On Off of the SI Filter Indicates the standard selected with which to process the file MPEG 2 ATSC or DVB Shows the transport stream rate and the duration at that rate A default rate is displayed during initial analysis Shows User mode selected Expert or Standard Stan dard mode prevents changes to certain fields Expert mode enables editing Indicates the progress during initial analysis and multiplexing Indicates the progress during initial analysis and multi plexing The Status bar may be hidden from view View gt Status Bar 8 20 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Menus and Controls User Interface Title bar gt Ben ee a T _ Fie dt view Gpdons Multipex window Help Menu e E Bar wa a e EE el el S A E Mavigakre CGheeame dek 116 Fest _ 7 3 Sectinn SIT _ackival Nek wnk M 1 Versinn Gerrian Pid 1a inji H H Yetwork version U
121. 99 OxC MGT jn secton_spntax_indicator 1 juu B secton_length 53 A table_id_estension U co version number 0 0x0 a A curent_nestindicator 1 z A sention number 0 n last section number lt i prokocal version O 0x0 tables_defined 3 043 Es tables E EF O CIE isos ogcasacace table type 256 EIT 0 to EIT 127 oopey table_type 256 EIT O to EIT 127 Dl table_tupe PID 24 0x15 E table_type PID 21 O15 o PPE IE 0 table lyoe_ version number 0 0x0 ooo table_type_version_number 0 0x0 Cl eee A number bytes 16 0x10 ogee number bytes 16 0 10 laa ee x10 SB chlo nes a Ene Sse On table_type_descriptors_len 6 0x6 E descriptors Elt descriptors fe 256 EIT Oto ElT 127 Et Tepa descriptor 1 descriptor tag b U5 descriptor length 4 1 format identifier 1054795585 fy additional into At descriptors _lerngth 6 O46 e 256 EIT 0 to EIT 127 jun descriptors length 6 Ox F descriptors E registration descriptor ff desecrintar tan ATNA gesege Standard Mode Expert Mode NOTE current_next_indicator in both Standard and Expert mode cannot be edited This is because the field is affected solely by the Section Properties concerned with Version Timing see Version Timing page 8 87 The selected mode is also reflected in the Wizards that are used to facilitate creation of multiplexes Elements that are restricted in the table
122. Allows the active script to be printed Le Le LB S MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 14 9 Script Pad Menus and Controls Status Bar 14 10 Opens the About ScriptPad dialog Parses the currently active script for syntax errors Toggles the display of the Script Parser Messages window Allows the color coded highlights in the active script to be refreshed Enables encryption Scripts saved while this function is enabled will be saved in encrypted format scx and encrypted format scp Se The Toolbar can be dragged off the edge of the main window into a floating pallet To do this click on the background inside the Toolbar that is not on one of the buttons and drag into the main window area The result is a self contained window which looks like this Pi el oo amp 25 e S 2 RAER To replace the Toolbar on the window border drag it over the border until the outline changes shape It can be placed on the top bottom left or right edges The Status Bar displays an information message when the cursor is placed over any toolbar button or menu option MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual i 4 Script File Editing and Encryption Because script files are saved as ASCII files editing follows normal text editing customs However ScriptPad does provide extra features to enhance and verify the process Keyword Color Coding When the Auto Syntax Highlights option in the
123. C in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 4415 Version 11 Section O Pid 4415 0 113F Elementary PID 651 08286 in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 4415 Version 11 Section O Pid 4415 0 113F Elementary PID 652 0226 in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 4415 Version 11 Section O Pid 4415 0 113F Elementary PID 1015 Ox3F 7 in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 4415 Version 11 Section O Pid 4415 0 113F Elementary PID 1016 023F8 in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 41767 Version 12 Section O Pid 416 01047 Elementary PID 602 02254 in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 41767 Version 12 Section O Pid 4167 0 10477 Elementary PID 1006 023EE in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 41767 Version 12 Section O Pid 416 01047 Elementary PID 1007 O3EF in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 4167 Version 12 Section O Pid 416 010477 Elementary PID 651 0286 in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 4767 Version 12 Section O Pid 4167 0 1047 Elementary PID 652 0228 in PMT not found in multiples Warring Program 4357 Version 24 Section O Pid 4351 0s10FF Elementary PID 651 08286 in PMT not found in multiplex Warning Program 4351 Version 24 Section O Pid 4351 0x1 0FF Elementary PID 652 0828C in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 4351 Version 24 Section O Pid 4351 0x1 0FF Elementary PID 1012 Ox3F 4 in PMT not found in multiplex Warning Program 4357 Ve
124. Carousel ld 2147483673 080000019 PID 352 041 60 E geh Carousel ld 2147463711 00000003H PID 353 0161 M Carousel ld 2747483710 O 8000003e FID 576 0240 Carousel node Download Module node Resource node 6 46 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views Carousel node This node represents a single Data Carousel in the ARIB data carousel structure Right Click Menu Options View U N Message Displays a structure view of the next appearance of this DII message that can be formed from the current stream position onwards as indicated by the Transport Packet number displayed in the Transport Packet Bar View Carrier Section Displays a structure view of the next appearance of the section that carries this DII message View Cycle Time gt Allows either cycle time statistics or graphical view of the object to be selected View Repetition Activates or creates a repetition view of the DII mes sage View Bitrate Activates or creates a bit rate view of the DII message Download Module node W This node contains all of the resources available to a module Right Click Menu Options View Resources Displays the Resource view of the selected module Save Resources Saves the resource files to a selected location The head er information is not saved View Cycle Time gt Allows either cycle time statistics or graphical view of the object to be selected View Repetit
125. Definition dialog box Keyboard shortcut Insert Copy Creates a copy of the highlighted application The new application is allocated a modified name Copy of Edit Allows the highlighted application to be edited in the Edit Application Definition dialog box Shortcut Double click application name Rename Allows the highlighted application to be renamed Keyboard shortcut F2 Delete Deletes the highlighted application after receiving con firmation from the user Keyboard shortcut Delete 6 72 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Application Support Auto Create Creates an application definition for each MHP applica tion that is found in the stream The boot class for each application is also set up Select OK to close the dialog box All of the buttons except New are disabled unless an application is highlighted New is always enabled Application Definition Applications are defined using the New Application Definition dialog as shown in the following illustration Hew Application Definition Object Carousel y Computer E EH ACE Object Carousel 1D 1 0 11 D510 0 0 0 FID 1606 OeB46 comortikonsseppotengineselet Application Mame Dezcnphor TicT acT oe AKA Noughts and Crosses E E Assets A E Boot Class J T Het PA Seppotlet clasg asiels dd Epot Add Asset Test Lok Cancel Initially the Application panes will be empty except f
126. Depot com
127. Displays a dialog for selecting scripts to be used during analysis The DTV standard to be used for analysis must be selected before any streams are opened Select the required standard from the submenu m Carousel Analyser Analysis Help Set Interpretation d MPEG Settings v DVE Scripts are available to the Carousel Analyzer to enable structures to be analyzed successfully If any script is not selected or enabled the stream will not fail to be analyzed but any data normally interpreted by that script would be ignored Scripts can only be selected and enabled when no files are open The option is not available when a file is open Handling Script Files To open the Analysis Settings dialog box select Settings from the Analysis menu J Analysis Help Set Interpretation MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Getting Started The dialog box shown below is displayed Analysis Settings MPEG Transport Scripts Joptions s Section i Userto M etwork Download U U Object Carousel C Program Files Tektronix Carousel Qnalyserdsmcc_ descript DE C Program FilesiTektronix Carousel Analyserpat cat scp Transport C Program FileskT ektronix socripts demcc scp C Program Filesi7ektronix acriptesMHP SCP C Program FilesiTektronix SScriptss MHP_ DOVE SCP DSM CC Section C Program FilessTektronix Scripts HF MPEG SCP oo Userto Metwork
128. Dovnload C Program Files ektronix sScrptssMPE SCP DVB Data Carousel Z O U Object Carusel L DYB Object Carousel ARIE Transport concel_ In the Analysis Settings dialog the left window shows a tree structure of the test protocols available The right window shows the scripts currently allocated to the test protocol in the example the listed scripts are associated with the DVB Section protocol The right window also contains the controls needed to manipulate the scripts Note that across the standards the scripts are not hierarchical that is each DTV standard must be self contained in terms of the scripts that it uses The currently available script files are listed in the Reference section page 6 98 The following paragraphs describe the available script manipulation activities The activities are applied to the currently selected test protocol MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 7 Carousel Analyzer Getting Started Adding a Script file 1 With the required test protocol highlighted select the Add New Script button Shortcut key Insert 2 Ifthe script path name is known enter it into the blank field Scripts options C Program Files Tektronix Carousel Snalysery C Program Files Tektronix Carousel Analyser New insert t C Program Files Tektronix Carousel Analysen MHP SCF C Program FilesiTektronix Carousel Analysen MHP DWB SCF C Program Files Tektronix Csrousel An
129. EG 2 Video F O34838 4 Tektronix IY 450 MPEG 2 Audio 0 219359 420 MPEG 2 Audio 0 222019 H0 MPEG 2 Video 10 0660 7 4 a 5 Tektronix P30 MPEG 2 Audio 0 28401 2 FeO MPEG 2 Audio 0 407360 E10 MPEG 2 Wideo 15 168662 a 2191 Mull 226b MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 65 Multiplexer Views 8 66 Component Duration The Component Duration view provides a graphical view of the timing and duration of each program component within the current stream Adjustments can be made to the duration of each component Open the Component Bit rate view by selecting either View gt Component Duration from the Menu Bar or the toolbar button o Component Duration tek_sym1_test mpg File Showing ooo 53 63 Cument 0 00 qu EJ lal i mponent Duratio J hae Program Description Pid Start Stop Length Bitrate Mb s Extent 1 Tektronix 0 00 59 34 559 33 F MPEG 2 Video 110 0 00 5934 5933 2 029528 _ eS MPEG 2 Audio 120 0 02 59 30 59 28 0 094025 SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSEEEq MPEG 2 Audio 130 000 59 32 59 31 0 407350 E 2 Tektronix Il 0 00 59 84 59 84 F MPEG 2 Video 210 0 00 59 84 59 84 4 007894 SESEEEEEEEEEEE MPEG 2 Audio 220 00 59516 59 15 0 156667 ET MPEG 2 Audio 230 0 02 59 28 59 25 0 094015 E 3 Tektronix III 0 00 59 78 59 78 F MPEG 2 Video 310 000 595 78 5978 5 034635 TE MPEG 2 Audio 320 0 01 59 31 59 30 0 219350 SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS
130. EG Test Systems User Manual 6 31 Carousel Analyzer Views Service Program Node Elementary PID Node 6 32 ta This node represents a specific program or service DVB or ARIB in a transport stream If a name for the program is available in the SDT Service Description Table it is displayed Each Elementary PID listed in the PMT Program Map Table will have a corresponding node displayed as a child node of the Services Program node Similarly any Object or Data Carousels associat ed with the Services Program node are listed as child nodes Right Click Menu Options View PMT Opens the Section Table view for the PMT View Bitrate Activates or creates a bit rate view of the sum of the ele mentary streams that are listed in the PMT for this pro gram Al gz een This node represents a PID referenced by a program If the PID carries Sections these are represented as Table nodes Right Click Menu Options View Transport Packet Displays a structure view of the next transport packet encountered on this PID from the current stream posi tion as indicated by the Transport Packet number that is displayed in the Transport Packet Bar View Cycle Time P Allows either cycle time statistics or graphical view to be selected View Repetition Activates or creates a view of the repetition rate of this PID in the transport stream View Bitrate Activates or creates a bit rate view of this PID MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User
131. EIT_other_pi a NIT_actual lf PAT EB Transport Stream Id 4103 Version 12 Section 0 Pid 0 0s0 H PMT i e SOT_actual EB Transport Steam ID 4103 Version 3 Section 0 Pid 17 0411 fea SOT_other d e TOT ee ba 4 Programs Tables Any PSI SI information that the program cannot confidently analyze will be shown in the PIDs view MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 45 Multiplexer Views PIDs View The PIDs view displays the PIDs contained in the stream The PIDs are displayed in ascending numerical order x Navigator EBCIAUG _ mpg ime e em 0 System Information of PAT Transport Stream Id 4103 Version 12 Section 0 Pid 0 0 Ff 16 System Information fg 17 System Information H 19 System Information 20 System Information h E TDT Pid 20 0x1 4 600 Elementar stream type MPEG 2 Video BBCIAUG27 mpg oJ 601 Elementary stream type MPEG 1 Audio BBCIAUG2 7 mpg rene 104 BOS Elementary stream type PES private data BBECTAUG mpg wi 610 Elementary stream type MPEG 2 Video BECISUG2 mpg JO 611 Elementary stream type MPEG 1 Audio BBC1AUG 27 mpg JJ 612 Elementary stream type MPEG 1 Audio BBCI4UG27 mpg vee wmi 613 Elementary stream type PES private data BBECTAUG mpg gM B20 Elementary stream type MPEG 2 Video BBCTAUG 27 mpg D 621 Elementary stream type MPEG 1 Audio BBCI4UG27 mpg JJ 622 Elementary stream type MPEG 1 Audio BBCIAUG2 7 mpo m0 623
132. Editor The text gives the interpretation for the bit pattern according to the standard that is currently selected MPEG2 DVB or ATSC Use the View menu to select the required option The Adaption Field Control displays the two bit Adaptation Field Control as a binary bit pattern with a text description Adaptation Field Control Note 4 setting of 00 or 01 will disable all the fields on the other tabbed pages o Payload Only 00 Reserved for Future use 01 Pavhoad Only 10 Adaptation Field 0 nly 11 Adaptaton Pavload Use the drop down list to select a different value The Adaptation Field and Adaptation Field Extension Tabs will be empty grayed out when the 01 Payload Only or 00 Reserved values are selected Adaptation Field Tab Header Information Adaptation Field Adaptation Field Extension Adaptation FieldLength fj M PCR Flag Flags PCR Value i 2604236616 T Discontinuity Indicator OPC Flag WETA value l l Splicing Point Flag Spliee Fountan Transport Private Data Flag Wata llerngth l Random Access Indicator Elementary Stream Priority Adaptation Field Extension Flag The Adaptation Field Tab interprets the contents of the Adaptation field shown in blue text in the Hex Editor if one is present in the packet To be able to edit an Adaptation Field the Adaptation Field Control value in the Header Informa tion Tab must indicate that an ad
133. Eee hele Laan eese Y wpwnwnn Ds l I l O 0 oo N l O09 CO WMA WAONNADADANHA AANA Pac ee ee ai Ve A WOoORrR OAR ON W Oo ere ae a jm gt m l I WwW Ne e N me B W T N O ji MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Table of Contents Volume 1 Packet Header Interpretation ccc ccccccccccccccees Program Srur s6 0 5 6 5 0 iGo kw ne ETSE ewe eG eee eN es MING ID PAG AMA a wren tare R tee end rete Sry ee anne ease Selecting a Packet VY PC w0c cece ie takodhewrtietece Merete eevee ake PTS DTS Timing Analysis sssssssssscssscscscscooeoooo Access Umt Selection secin ards henio bier EAR A Grew a a iaia A Bede Saad Scrol NEV EW sprstiianoreetie bipi aneor araa naa a Maco SciS sata n508 ainn i ORAL i na ea na Ea a Aaa a Audio SEIMS G25 5h 3 04 6 28 nenia eiai nae aa ae a a AC 3 Audio StreamS 2 0 ce ccc ce ee cece eee a a eee AAC Audio Streams 0 0 cece ee ce cee eee eee eens T STD Buffer Analyzer GUNG Started o cer neria Cates eae eb Cee to ee aes SUIADIC SUCAINS eaea bint Gus a n Sunk God aber Gwneen wae eaten ace Table Handlinga 2 s 6 Siare ekasis Ged sp ten eee Beds Ged ke as eds Ge Starung the PROG AM ii aguas Ged ohn E Beda Seed A Bee eae Beads Ge aS SODES epiniai tein einai Gove be wna Bina Resend a e Sena Bh Openine an MPEG Fil o2 3 60 36 4e dh aia Rok oad eee bewes mae oe eee Opening a BMR File os5 acs ooh he bois Bo ed ee ews Bee oe eed WINGO Way OWLS xx
134. FF Cancel This option opens the Fill Byte dialog box Enter the fill value then select the OK button The Cancel button abandons the operation leaving the bytes in their original state There are no Toolbar buttons for the Select Packet and Fill commands MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 19 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com Header Editor The Header Editor has three tabs These show and allow editing of the basic header adaptation field and the adaptation field extension contents The Hex editor is immediately updated to show the new values when changes are made in the Header Editor Binary flags are shown with check boxes whose state can be changed by clicking in the box with the mouse pointer Multi bit fields may be edited by typing in the new values or selecting a value from a drop down list NOTE It is important to remember that changing a flag or field often alters the structure of the header The other flags and fields will be reinterpreted according to the data underlying their new position in the structure Header Information Tab Header Information Adaptation Field Adaptation Field Extension PIC yale 32 Flags Continuity Count 2 I Transport Error Indicato Cony Count 2 i Payload Unit Start Indicator Transport Serambling Control Transport Friority 00 Mot Scrambled m Aot S crarbiad
135. G Test Systems User Manual 14 5 ee Menu and Controls The following pages contain descriptions of the menu options toolbar controls and status bar Menu Bar Different menus and options are presented before and after file opening and depending upon whether the file window or the message window is active The Menu Bar offers all of the options available currently Options are context sensitive they will only be available where relevant Some options are also available through keyboard shortcuts these are indicated on the menus A check mark next to an option indicates that the function is currently visible or active no check mark means that it is hidden or inactive File Menu Options Table 14 3 list the File menu options Table 14 3 File menu options Option Function New Opens a new file Open Opens a script file scp for analysis The program opens the file selection dialog box allowing the user to choose the required file Close Closes the active script file window Save Saves the active script file window Save As Allows the active script file to be saved under a different file name Encrypt When enabled scripts will be saved in encrypted format scx and unencrypted format scp Print Opens Print dialog Print Preview Previews print using current print settings Print Setup Opens a dialog for selecting which printer and associated options to use 1 lt filename gt A list of the four most rec
136. ID 0 75 10 0 g 8 aa Frog 1 PMT PID 1100 00440 aoe oe MAP Object Carousel O 1 PID 100 00064 Proc i fle Elementary Streams re Program 2 Prog 2 PMT PIG 1100 0044C n OTT Object Carousel ID 1 PID 200 DQUL8 Prag a did Elementary Streams e ile Elermentan Streams 2 Jd MPEG 1 Audio Src Pid 607 020259 Dest Pid 601 a St MPEG 2 Video Src Pid 600 0 0258 Dest Pid 600 ak Aag PES private data Sre Pid 603 00256 Dest Pid 6 is Carousels Ta collections E Programs Carousel Definition File The current state of the Carousel Generator session can be saved to disk at any time during the creation process using the carousel definition file The format of the saved file is standard XML and can be viewed in any XML compatible viewer for example Internet Explorer 5 and up editing the XML file directly is not recommended MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 5 Carousel Generator Getting Started Starting the Application 7 6 The application can be started by selecting the Carousel Generator option from the Start gt Programs menu or by double clicking the Carousel Generator shortcut on the desktop In addition files with an XML extension have an additional option in the right click menu Open with Carousel Generator When this option is selected Carousel Generator opens and attempts to use the file as a Carousel Definition file see page 7 5 Jiz BH Carousel mpg ka MbpObjec
137. ID 21 90 Ox1FFE db Cut DVB SI E TimesD ate Table font 6 8 Network ID 0 0x0 GP Faste F md RK Ie Oo Tee ee 3 Inthe PCR PID Properties dialog box make the changes required and select OK PCR PID Properties PCR FID 615 Ox1FFO Interval 35 m Cancel Initial alue 0 Note that the new PCR is added to the Clock Reference node Also available on the Clock Reference right click menu are Cut Copy and Paste These operations follow normal Windows conventions Messages will be displayed where conflicts arise between existing PCRs and proposed new or pasted PCRs MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation PCR Edit The PCR PID Properties dialog box of an existing PCR PID can be opened by highlighting the PCR PID and selecting Properties from the right click menu a RGSERPRAS SI Voor E 1I OY cise I SrhSeiPisew tel Clock Reference 1 PCR only PID S EFCA PID 8190 Ox1FFE Pd F Properties ED Time Date Table t E Network ID 0 0x0 eae EBB Transport Stream Nel sail Pacte J Program 1 Prag 1 PMT PID a wo MHP Object Carousel 1D Delete j PCR PID Properties PCR PID 615 O1FFO Interval 35 m Cancel Initial alue 0 PSI SI The content of the SI node will depend on the SI Type selected MPEG or DVB SI Type SI Type is normally set in the Stream Generation properties see page 7 40 Howeve
138. ID signal in the range of 16 to 255 bytes MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 25 MPEG Player Menus and Controls Press the OK button to enable all setting changes PCR Intial Value Dialog Box When you select the PCR Initial Value command from the Play menu the PCR Initial Value dialog box is displayed PCR Initial Yalue PCR Initial Value Base Value 33 Extension Value 9 Figure 10 8 PCR Initial Value dialog box Base Value Sets the initial value for the program_clock_reference_base value You can set the value from 0 to 8589934591 The bracketed number represents the number of bits for the program_clock_reference_base field Extension Value Sets the initial value for the program_clock_reference_ex tension value You can set the value from 0 to 299 The bracketed number represents the number of bits for the program_clock_reference_extension field 10 26 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Menus and Controls Start Stop Position Dialog Box When you select the Start Stop command from the Play menu the Start Stop Position dialog box is displayed Start Stop Position Stake Stop Position Y 0 Start Stop 1649999 100 ints 0g Play 500001 100 Figure 10 9 Start Stop Position dialog box m Start Sets the start position of the stream by time h m s or the number of packets the number of super frames for a M TMCC file or the num
139. ID tab of the Import Section Data dialog box identify the PID that is to carry the information Similarly in the Source tab identify the file that holds the section data to be imported Select OK to confirm the selection During the import action the content of the file is examined to determine where the section s should be placed ES PIDs ES PIDs that carry additional Elementary Streams can be multiplexed into the synthesized transport stream The following actions are required when defining an elementary stream to be added m Allocate a PID number m Define the source of the elementary stream to be added m Define the timing to be applied to the new stream m Define the PCR placement MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 91 Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Adding an Unreferenced Elementary Stream 8 92 Methods available Highlight the ES PIDs in the Navigator Tables view and select Add from the right click menu Drag and drop copy only from the Examine TS window Tables view to the Navigator Tables view Drag and drop copy move from another instance of Multiplexer to the Navigator Tables view To add a new stream highlight ES PIDs in the Navigator Tables view and select Add from the right click menu Havigator tek syml test mpg Add Kidi DEEte Lut apy deo tek_syml i EK rT Espot seckan Mata dio tek_syml_ Import Section Data Paste deo tek
140. IID 0x2 Proto 0x1 EH VIDEO PID 0x6E StrmTyp 0x2 A AUDIO FID 0x78 StrmTyp 0x4 A AUDIO FID 0x82 StrmTyp 0x4 PCR PID 0x6 ES PMT PILOS THILO PraNorOx2 E VIDEO PID OxDe StrraTyp 0x2 A AUDIO FID OxDC StrmTyp 0x4 A AUDIO PID OxE6 StrrTypidx4 PCR PID sD ES Pe Plb0x12C TEID 0x2 Proto ES PT Plb0x190 Tb Ox2 PrgMo 0x4 PMT PID Ox1F4 ToD 0x2 FPrg o 0x5 NIT PIB Ox10 TEID 0x40 SOT FPID 0x11 THD 0x42 BAT PID 0x11 ToD tod 4 EIT PID Oxi2 Thi 0x4E ES TOT PID Ox14 TID 0x70 ES TOT PID 0x14 TEID 0x73 NULL PID 0x1 FFF INTERNAL 19 392653 Mbps Figure 10 4 Example of the hierarchical display The symbol displayed to the left of some icons indicates that the item includes lower level transport stream components that are not displayed The symbol changes to when the lower level components are displayed To expand the hierarchy click on the symbol Similarly to collapse hierarchy click on the the selected upper level icon press the left control button When a transport stream contains more items than will display on the screen at one time a scroll bar appears at the right of the screen The icon cursor is used to select individual transport stream components as represented by the icons The icon cursor is displayed as a red square border 10 7 MPEG Player Getting Started Hierarchical Display Icons 10 8 surrounding an icon see Figure 10 4 Use the arrow buttons
141. It is analo gous to the for i 0 i lt loops_defined i statement used to describe the syntax of a table in the ATSC standards The container is always preceded by a field which speci fies the number of loops it contains Loop Describes a data structure composed of a specified set of fields and subordinate loops The structure diagram shows each loop as a node with the fields and sub ordi nate loops as children Each loop node in the section view represents one iteration of the loop body the con tents of the curly braces in the syntax specified by the ATSC standards Field Fields are referred to in the standards documents as both data items and fields They are the smallest pieces of information that make up a table MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 49 Multiplexer Views For example taking an MGT that defines three tables the Section View represents the syntax and contents of the Tables container like this x Section MGT Yersion 0 Section O Pid 8187 0x1 8187 0x1 FFB A 4 Table Header see A table td 199 O C MGT ov MS sechon_syntax_indicator 1 oo i section_length 59 e A table id_exbensian U A verion number 0 0x0 A curent nest indicator A section number 0 Number of oe HO last section number 0 Loops protocol version 0 0x0 Ea tables_defined 3 0x3 Container gt 4 tables 256 EIT Oto EIT 127 begs table_type 25
142. M frame start flag before the specified stop position At this time if the number of OFDM frames between the start packet and stop packet is not an even number the packet in the last OFDM frame becomes the stop packet You can set the start stop and initial positions by using either the slider or the text boxes Using the Slider Ensure that Packets is selected from the Format drop down list 1 For the start and stop positions a Select the Start option button b Using the mouse drag the slider to the required start position c Select the Stop option button This moves the slider to the right end d Drag the slider to the required stop position e Select the OK button to enable the values 2 For the initial start position for loop output a Enable the Initial checkbox A red arrow appears on the slider b Drag the red arrow to the required initial start position c Select the OK button to enable the value Using the text boxes Ensure that Time is selected from the Format drop down list 1 Select the Start option button 2 Enter the time in hour minute second format 3 Repeat for the Stop time and the Initial Start Position time 4 Select the OK button to enable the values To reset all of the settings to the values that were in effect when the dialog box was first displayed select the Reset button and then press the OK button MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Menus and Controls Timer Pl
143. MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Views Common Features Columns in the Component views can be sorted and rearranged to suit your preferences Column management in the two Component views is similar Field Selection You can select the fields to be displayed in each Component view The Header bar indicates which fields are currently displayed When you right click on the Header bar a menu is displayed You can select which fields are to be displayed A check mark next to a field name indicates that the field display is currently enabled The version number of the PAT and PMT can be displayed in the Description column by enabling the Show program version option in the right click menu from the Description column header gram Description Pid Tektronix MPEG 2 Audio Description Pro Fo mia IE oo Prograrn Tektronix Description MPEG Audio Pid MPEG 2 Audio Y Start MPEG 2 Video M Stop y Length Tektronix Il w Extent MPEG 2 Audis Bitrate bibr MIFE G 2 Audio MFE G 2 Video T LE I n nn cote co o Show program wersion T o0 To gram Description Fi Tektronix PAT v0 PHT w MFE G 2 Audin 12 RAPE G J Adodin 13 Similarly the PID numbers can be displayed in hexadecimal by selecting Display in hexadecimal from the PID column right click menu MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 71 Multiplexer Views Column Repositioning Columns can be
144. MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 33 MPEG Player Menus and Controls SPI ASI 310M Interface 10 34 NPT Sets whether to update NPT Normal Play Time STC_Reference field in NPT Reference Descripter defined by ISO IEC 18318 6 The NPT check box is only available when PCR PTS DTS is enabled and Update Method is set to Software When the check box is enabled PCR PTS DTS becomes enabled and Update Method is set to Software In addition the Fixed ES Rate option in the Clock dialog box becomes disabled Reed Solomon ISDB T only Sets whether to update Reed Solomon codes in an ISDB T transport stream Select the OK button to enable all setting changes Menu Play Table 10 10 describes the commands available in the SPI ASI 310M menu Table 10 10 SPI ASI 310M menu commands Play screen Command BNC Port Description Sets the format of the output signal at the ASI SMPTE Out connector ASI 310M 8VSB Through Out Sets whether the signal supplied to the ASI SMPTE In connector is looped back to the ASI SMPTE Out connector when there is no recording or playout selected ASI Format Selects either Byte or Packet when an ASI output is selected at the BNC Port For Byte valid data is output using a burst transmission mode For Packet valid data is output in each transport stream packet Utility Menu Table 10 11 describes the commands in the Utility menu Table 10 11 Utility menu comman
145. Manual Carousel Analyzer Views Table Node This node represents the stream of sections present on a specific PID with a specific table identity Right Click Menu Options View Section View Cycle Time gt View Repetition View Bitrate MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Displays a structure view of the next section with this PID and table identity that can be formed from the cur rent stream position onwards as indicated by the Trans port Packet number displayed in the Transport Packet Bar Allows either cycle time statistics or graphical view to be selected Activates or creates a view of the repetition rate of this PID with this PID and table identity Activates or creates a bit rate view of sections with this PID and table identity 6 33 Carousel Analyzer Views Object Carousel View 6 34 Menu Bar View gt Object Carousels Toolbar on The Object Carousel view shows a static view of every object carousel in the transport stream The view is in the style of Windows Explorer The left pane shows the directory structure of the object carousels and the right pane lists the versions of the BIOP message currently selected in the left pane OC_abecd mpg Object Carousels Miel x Flug Object Carousel Pio E A Object Carousel ID 3 083 DSI ID 0 020 PID 150 11T 0 433KB 150 9 Service Gatevvay Eig c T Adocdect h vs eA ADOCFILE CPP LA ADOCFILE H TR AFRM
146. Modify dialog box and shorten the string MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Editing in Section View Text The Modify Text dialog box displays the name of the field and the current text on a single line Text can be entered deleted copied to and pasted from the windows clipboard In this screenshot the field being edited is an ISO_639 language code and the current text is eng Modify alue ISU 634 language _ code eng Cancel View Walue s Character sting Hexadecimal number View Value As You can choose between viewing the text as an ASCH character string or a hexadecimal sequence Most text strings have a maximum length specified by the governing standards which this dialog box will enforce Edit the text and select OK to continue Select Cancel to abandon the edits and leave the original text unchanged Numeric The Modify dialog box displays the name of the field and the current value in decimal Edit the existing value or type in a new value In this screenshot the field being edited is a version_number and the current value is Oxc Modify Yalue verson number Decimal 12 Hex c Cancel Dec View Value As i iheracter sting Bevedecinal Humber A new value can be entered using either decimal or hexadecimal notation Values are assumed to be decimal unless preceded by Ox The dialog box is not case MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 109 Mult
147. Move to Collection list All current collections will be included in the list Incl g F Directory Properties howe Eo Collection Dollestion Callestion2 Explore ScorDisplay class See Carousel Generator Overview page 7 2 Programs allow audio and video content to be added to the carousel carrying stream An example of the Program view is shown below SEFE Carousel Session 1 Program 1 Carousel i e Clock Reference 1 PCR only PICI fi PCR PID 8190 0x1 FFE Eifel OVE SI AE Time Date Table Network ID 0 0x0 be EEE Transport Steam NetID 0 TS ID 0 Ae Program 1 Prog 1 PMT PID 1100 Ox044C es MHP Object Carousel D PIO 100 00064 Prog 1 PMT PID 111 ee Elementary Streams af MPEG 2 Audio Src Pid 6018 041782 Dest Pid 601 8 0 1 782 2 ae MPEG 2 video Sre Pid 6017 017511 Dest FPid 601 7 0 1 781 e ne Elementary Streams J MPEG 2 Audio Src Pid 6018 01782 Dest Pid 6016 0x1 782 Lo MPEG 2 Video Src Pid 6017 041781 Dest Fid 6017 081781 4 Carousels Collections Programs MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Note that the Carousel Session is still the root of the view but in this view the program content is also shown this includes tables and streams PCR PID references are displayed under the Clock Reference node Mandatory PSI SI information is created by default and included
148. O clt Base_btn png gleen_bar png Jad Resources node one Module 000 000 000 O00 O00 O00 O00 O00 000 000 o00 000 000 000 000 000 o00 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 00010 o0020 00030 o0040 00050 o0060 oo070 o0080 o0090 O00A0 oo0BQ AOU oo0D0 OO0E0 OO0FO 00100 00110 00120 00130 00140 00150 00160 00170 00160 00190 OO01A0 00160 o01C0 001D0 O01E0 Content Type mu 6C 74 69 70 61 72 74 2F 6D 69 78 65 64 3B 62 F ltipart mized bo 75 6E 64 61 72 79 3D 22 50 61 6E 61 73 6F 6E 69 undary Panasoni 63 4D 44 43 22 OD OA 43 6F 6E 74 65 6E 74 2D 4C cHDC Content L 65 6E 67 74 68 3A 20 31 36 38 32 38 OD OA 43 F ength 16928 Co 6E 74 65 6E 74 2D 45 6E 63 6F 64 69 6E 67 3A 20 ntent Encoding 6E 6F 6E 65 OD OA 43 6F 6E 74 65 6E 74 2D 4C OF none Content Lo 63 61 74 69 6F GE 3A 20 OD OA OD OA zD 2D 50 61 cation Pa 6E 61 73 6F 6E 69 63 4D 44 43 OD OA 43 GF OE 74 nasonicHDC Cont 65 6E 74 2D 54 79 70 65 J 20 61 70 70 6C 69 63 ent Type applic bl 74 69 GF 6E 2F 58 2D 61 72 69 62 2D 72 65 73 ation E arib res 6F 75 72 63 65 4C 69 73 74 OD OA 43 OF GE 74 65 ourceList Conte 6E 74 2D 4C 65 GE 67 74 68 3A 20 31 36 30 OD OA nt Length 160 43 6F 6E 74 65 GE 74 2D 45 6E 63 OF 64 69 6E 6 Content Encoding J 20 6E 6F 6E 65 OD OA 43 6F 6E 74 65 GE 74 2D gt none Content 4C 6F 63 61 74 69 6F 6E 3A 20 OD OA OD OA 06 18 Locat
149. P DDB DU DSI DSM CC DTV DVB ID IOR JPEG MHP MPEG PID PMT PSI SDT SI U N U U Application Information Table Association of Radio Industries and Businesses Broadcast Inter ORB Object Request Broker Protocol Download Data Block DownloadInfolIndication message DownloadServerInitiate message Digital Storage Media Command and Control Digital Television Digital Video Broadcasting Identity Interoperable Object Reference Joint Photographic Experts Group Multimedia Home Platform Moving Picture Experts Group Packet IDentifier Program Map Table Program Specific Information Service Description Table Service Information User to Network User to User MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 97 Carousel Analyzer Reference References 6 98 ISO IEC 13818 1 Information technology Generic coding of moving pictures and associated audio information Systems MPEG ISO IEC 13818 6 Information technology Generic coding of moving pictures and associated audio information Part 6 Extension for Digital Storage Media Command and Control MPEG ETS 300 468 Digital broadcasting systems for television sound and data services Specification of Service Information in Digital Video Broadcasting DVB EN 301 192 Specification for data broadcasting DVB A027 Specification for the transmission of data services in DVB bitstreams DVB A047 Implementation guidelines for Data Broadcasting DVB SI DAT
150. Position field set the trigger position MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Reference 8 If you want to start recording by a trigger signal on the External Trigger connector a Select Record gt Other to open the Others dialog box b Select Rise or Fall in the Ext Record Start field 9 Select the Record button to start continuous recording While Continuous Recording is running the total number of captured files are displayed in the file counter on the record status indicator When the specified number of files are created or you press the front panel STOP button stream capture stops After the stream capture stops recording of the captured streams starts The file counter value decreases every time recording of each file is complete The recording starts from the last captured file If you press the STOP button while the captured streams are recording the recording process terminates to the file currently being recorded NOTE The error message Drive Full appears when there is no space to record a captured file with the specified file size on the hard disk MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 53 MPEG Player Reference Remote Commands 10 54 The MPEG Player can be controlled remotely through the 100 10 BASE T port on the MTS400 Series rear panel The set of remote commands is described in the MTS400 Series Programmer Manual 071 1725 xx This is supplied as a PDF file on th
151. S AW W W nat a uan V nonin g NANNAN Un I U nw l i i n MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual ee Table of Contents Volume 2 Carousel Analyzer General Safety Summary xi Service Safety Summary xiii Preface XV Related Material XV Manual Conventions xvi Getting Started sorser t EEEE EEEO ETETEN 6 1 Data Broadcastin OVGIVIOW Ks itietveuetbaeceeectdotete ET a cies 6 3 Starmie Prootanl 2452 ene2 Mievewd beet pane E tenses A eke kis 6 4 Menusand Controls sa6 0 s ac cs0ieuseeee eu wiaewene ewan 6 13 NICMOS MONS 6 2152 an ouiiats ao eenta no hoa teats Re aee nas 6 13 TOOGE fork bec asc a os 8 Oo eS ae aes hee ete OEA 6 17 Transport Packe Bar 3s 4 43558 2 0 0 Shu eite cate see es ane beats soos 6 19 ARUSHA 2 ss 2d A cash htt hook OOM OS ae bales OLE aaa eet aeea oes 6 20 WORKS O s 3 Se 3b eo 8e 2 Oe Beene eaten One as ane neuasee ous 6 21 IV TCWG aaraa aad ares a Sere pae aula at sland auanal eaten aunt ae alaas aoe ee 6 27 PrO ranis Services VIEW aaeeea eree e hue ber eke eile Bone tes 6 30 Object Carousel View wssnevobated oe ty ieee earbealeh De lee aie ees 6 34 WEN Dowiload VEW 2 4 sou chastec e eS eee ee eara ee ten einai 6 41 Data Carousel DVB VEW eera erae tenant si tis EEEO 6 45 Data Carote ARIB VEW errr eusi er eE EAEE EEEO 6 46 Resource VICON Jeren aero onnted ob E E EA E EEEa 6 50 SMOC Vi WS rerin rieren ua e e Dy e e aar ae a n Ea 6 52 Bine VEW aei ne Eea e ee E eA e Bn whe EEEa 6 55 Repenton MEW 45
152. SEMINOS 24 2eie cots Hie reba baeteset Mee ceee th hetekae kis WRG FET E T E Cacao N taal Siete eRe ls E T N E A E A O nosis he hha a Sebi oho ae acto heady a E ete dnd Transport Stream Editor Geine Stared atc raia rana ETE a ee we ae em ees Starline the Progra eertain eke clea eee Ree wae eee ea eee ie ODEON 3240 32 tose ee eds nde een oat ane da aired Pra eae ee Opening a File Menus and Controls ccc ccc ccc cece ccc c cece cece e scene TOODI 33 65 hx ead Balen tora ea Sa aos RA ea ed bate Ga ad hae N Aa eaten Status DAE hss lasses ea a aig ehh eects A ale see Bh ap ra seis dot BU a Site oe Be Ok el al Slidet Bat Ka a ccnhh Gitta Bal ioe A aera Aa ate Al eet BB al ed et WIEN OPHONS 22053 2a aE een anche A eal cauta ed teense aa ae Hex Editor COOC I sr ire an iE jet ee dhe cere Senha ced ens aden EN Rte ere iat Se le CU IS oa anc ep ins te Bae ee eae ona he oes We ea eens ee ees MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual QO I i l l Aa OONN ROP ON AA DB Ww UON 2 20 0 0 G0 CO P CO CO l UJU ADANUMNUANAA A ooo wovworv ooo l I PR m a l JNa ereoOoONN AU N m vii Table of Contents Volume 2 Adaptation Field Tab Adaptation Field Extension Tab Jitter Functions MPEG Player Adding Jitter to PCRs Tracer Make Seamless Wizard viii Header Editor Header Information Tab PID Remapping PCR Recalculation Getting Started Display Elements Hierarc
153. SIT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x1F and a table _id value of 0x7F Local event Information Table LIT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x0020 and a table_id value of OxDO One or more transport packets with a PID value specified by the elementary_PID in the PMT and a table_id value of OxDO when a stream type value is 0x05 Event Relation Table ERT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x0021 and a table _id value of OxD1 One or more transport packets with a PID value specified by the elementary PID in the PMT and a table id value of 0xD1 when a stream type value is 0x05 Index Transmission Table ITT One or more transport packets with a PID value specified by the elementary PID in the PMT and a table_id value of 0xD2 Partial Content Announcement Table PCAT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x22 and a table _id value of OxC2 Software Download Trigger Table SDTT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x23 and a table _id value of 0xC3 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Getting Started Table 10 3 Icons specific to ARIB format Cont Icon Element type Download Control Table DCT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x17 and a table _id value of 0xC0 DownLoad Table DLT One or more transport packets with a PID value specified by the DL PID in the DCT and a stream_type value of 0xC1 A loc
154. Select File gt Load Preset The Open dialog box is displayed 2 Highlight the required file 3 Press OK to load the preset file into the MPEG Player MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 49 MPEG Player Reference Using the Continuous Recording Feature The Continuous Recording feature allows you to record multiple stream files continuously on the hard disk Continuous Recording has the following features Record multiple stream files continuously on the hard disk m Variable file size operation The time stamp information of the first trigger event in a file is recorded as the updated date property of the file m Can be used in disk recording mode Basic Action of This section describes how files are recorded by the location of the trigger events Continuous Recording in Continuous Recording The following explanation requires that both pretrigger and posttrigger sizes to be set to 500 MB m In general each trigger event occurs intermittently In this case each file contains one trigger event in the file and the pretrigger and posttrigger areas have the specified size Trigger event File A S00 MB 500 ME Trigger event File B 500 ME S00 ME SS Pretriqger area Posttrigger area 10 50 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Reference m Ifa trigger event occurs while the pretrigger area is filled with data the pretrigger area becomes smaller than the specified size Howeve
155. Session window edit the collection s properties to set the field Using DII to the new DII MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 47 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation M H p Carousel Properties X General MHP PID settings DSI DII settings AIT PID 500 HF Use default value Use fico ms T cycle time I Use old style MHP 1 0 0 HTML application descriptor Cancel AIT PID This is the PID that carries the Application Information Table AIT Range 0 to 8191 see PID Values page 7 45 AIT cycle time Set the time to be taken for the selected Carousel s AIT to be repeated Default 100 ms Use Select this option to allow the AIT cycle time to be set manually Range 1 ms to 3600 s Use old style If this box is checked the DVB HTML application des criptor format as defined by MHP v1 0 0 see MHP ETSI 101812 Version 1 1 2 and 1 1 1 will be used If this box is not checked the new format as defined in MHP v1 1 2 see MHP ETSI 101812 Version 1 1 2 and 1 1 1 will be used This will cause the DVB HTML Application Descriptor to be properly formed and in clude an empty set of application IDs To add applica tion IDs to this descriptor use the HTML Properties page on the MHP File Properties dialog box 7 48 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation DTT Applications General DTT Applic
156. Show message bos when fatal errors occur during stream generation Number of items Relative Paths Update base path Fix relative paths 7 34 A list of the most recently used carousel definition files is displayed in the File menu Use this parameter to se lect how many file names should be displayed Range 0 to 15 The paths of source components associated with a carou sel file can be stored in relative or absolute format When a carousel definition is saved to a different new location components stored with paths relative to the original carousel definition may no longer be found at the same relative location If Yes is selected from the drop down list the base path will be modified so that the components can still be found Select Ask to allow the user to make a decision when the carousel definition is saved If No is selected no modification will be made to the base path carousel components may no longer be accessible to the definition file When the base path for components referenced by a car ousel definition file is changed the existing relative paths may not refer to the correct locations If Yes is se lected from the drop down list the relative paths will be adjusted so that they are referenced correctly to the new base path MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Regenerate Show message When enabled launching Carousel Analyze
157. Shown in bytes KB MB or GB 204 bytes File Size D9 4MB Packets 300001 Packet Size 204 dTektronix MPEG 2 TS Editor Ce File 18 View Tools Help Unda CtreZ Redo oth ee Copy Cte Copy Packet Paste Cty Select Packet Eill s Options File Size 99 4M B Packets 300001 Packet Size 204 When no file is open the File Size Packets and Packet Size fields are all set to zero or null Ready File Size O Bytes Packets Packet Size 9 8 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Transport Stream Editor Menus and Controls Slider Bar PID Filter fw E lt gt Se See mela 54892 mata The contents of any transport stream packet in the currently open file can be selected using the Slider bar Packets are numbered according to their position in the file with the first packet being 0 zero The controls in the slider bar are PID Filter 7 PID Filter ption PID Humber In operation when Sets fiter to select only checked like this packets of this PIL FID Filter W J160 _ hen type In the PIL number check the PID Filter option To select packets from a specific FIL Slider Move to Slider next Scrolls through all packet packets in the file Move to previous packet MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Transport Stream Editor Menus
158. Stream Editor Header Editor Displays the state of the LIW Flag I LT Flag LTw Valid M LT Offset 13525 L 0 or false vo or true When LTW is true the state of the LIW Valid flag and value of the LIW Offset are Shown The Valid flag may be toggled and new Offsets can be typed in decimal Displays the state of the Piecewise Rate Flag IY Piecewise Rate Flag Piecewise Rate 235701 L 0 or false M 1 or true When the flag is true the Rate is shown and can be edited in decimal notation Displays the state of the Seamless Splice Flag Iv Seamless Splice Flag Splice Type 1100 gt OTS Nest AU 2325264584 L 0 or false M 1 or true MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 27 Transport Stream Editor Header Editor When the DTS Next AU value is shown and it can be edited in decimal notation The 4 bit Splice Type is shown as a bit pattern IY Seamless Splice Flag Splice Type fon 0 DTE Next ALI 0010 It has a drop down list containing all 16 possible bit patterns Use the list to select a different value 9 28 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual a PID Remapping NOTE The packets of one or more PIDS may be remapped moved to different PIDs Only the PID in the packet headers is changed Any packet payload contents such as SI and PSI tables are unaffected So remapping can break the references from tables to PIDs or be used as an investig
159. Stream option allows the non packetized elementary Streams stream data to be extracted from an elementary stream and saved to a binary file note that this data will not include the transport packet or the PES packet headers In the Navigator Programs view highlight the elementary stream whose payload is to be exported Select the Export Elementary Stream option from the right click menu Name the file to be created and choose a location Select Save to confirm the action Exporting PES Packets The Export Payload option allows the PES packets to be extracted from an elementary stream and saved to a binary file note that this data will not include the transport packet headers In the Navigator Programs view highlight the elementary stream whose payload is to be exported Select the Export Payload option from the right click menu Name the file to be created and choose a location Select Save to confirm the action Modifying PES PID Details To modify any of the ES PID parameters highlight the required PID in the Navigator Tables view and select Properties from the right click menu The Stream Properties dialog box and its tabs are identical to the Add Stream dialog box refer to Adding an Unreferenced Elementary Stream page 8 92 Locate the parameter to be amended and when changed select the OK button ES PID parameters can also be modified in the Navigator Programs view Highlight an Elementary Stream in the Programs view and select Pro
160. Systems User Manual Multiplexer Views Menu Bar The Examine TS window menu bar comprises only two items File and Edit File Menu Table 8 11 lists the items in the File menu Table 8 11 Examine TS File menu options Command Function Open Analyzes and opens the selected file in the Examine TS window Closes the current file Exit Closes the Examine TS window Edit Menu Table 8 12 lists the items in the Edit menu Table 8 12 Examine TS Edit menu options Command Function Copy Copies the currently highlighted section to the clipboard File Summary These fields provide a brief summary of the analyzed file Filename The filename of the examined stream Interpretation The interpretation applied to the stream This is the same as that selected in the Multiplexer application via the View menu MPEG 2 DVB ATSC or ISDB TS Rate The transport stream bit rate derived from the stream Duration The duration of the transport stream Status The status of the stream analysis Navigator Views The Examine TS Navigator views correspond to the Navigator views in the main application Programs Tables and PIDs are shown as they would be after a full analysis The PSI SI tables are expanded and collapsed in the same manner The Section view is not available in the Examine TS window MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 59 Multiplexer Views Examine TS Section Copy 8 60 While examining transport stream
161. Systems User Manual 6 91 Carousel Analyzer MHP Support Right Click Menu Options Right click on an MHP application node to display the following menus View Application Timing See Application Timing page 6 71 View AIT Opens the AIT structure view see also Structure Views page 6 52 View Application Lifetime See Application Lifetimes page 6 71 J WUC Lo ASDI IL Usj bol IL L Object Carousel ID 4 04 DSI ID 0 0x0 PID 240 0x961 Zj h MHF Applications BEER E Tickers p Service Ga En View Application Timing Object Carousel F View AIT a Object Carousel Object Carouse Object Carousel ID 5 051051 ID 0 0x0 PID 2506 O 9c View Application Lifetime 6 92 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer MHP Support Application Lifetimes This Gantt style graph displays an analysis of the lifetime of an MHP applica tion Multiple applications can be displayed each application is subdivided and color coded to indicate the changing state of the application The Applications Lifetimes view can be opened by highlighting an MHP application node and selecting either the toolbar icon or View Application Lifetime from the right click menu Abel mpg Application Lifetimes Apo Autostart Time 0 471334 Lo LJ Lo Lo Lo lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo LJ LJ Lo Lo eI _ B B m m I eI EI D m 5 5 B B m D 2 2 m pm 2 2 2 pm I D 2 2 Lo LJ Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo LJ LI Lo Lo rm Ha Em
162. TE In BNC connector Target Sets the record size trigger position and target source to record the input stream When you select this command the Target dialog box appears Refer to Target Dialog Box on page 10 39 for more information Timer Record Sets the time used to record the input stream automatically When you select this command the Timer Play Record dialog box appears Refer to Timer Play Record Dialog Box on page 10 29 for more information Other Sets the standard used to display the input stream and the external trigger status When you select this command the Others dialog box appears Refer to Others Dialog Box on page 10 30 for more information MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Menus and Controls Target Dialog Box When you select the Target command from the Record menu the Target dialog box is displayed T arget 33 6 GB Free Record Size Limit record size to 00 o0 h m Trigger Position J o o0 h m L Continuous Recording 32767 Aao ek Format m Target Sets the record target RAM or hard disk m Record Size Sets the recording time h m s or file size MB to record the input stream Use the Format list box to select the way to set the record size The amount of free space available for the RAM or hard disk is displayed below the data size text box You cannot set the record size beyond
163. Test Equipment Depot User Manual 1 800 517 8431 Tektronix MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems Volume 2 of 2 071 1507 01 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com ee Table of Contents Volume 1 General Safety Summary xi Service Safety Summary xiii Preface XV Related Material XV Manual Conventions xvi Introduction MTS400 Series Software Application sssssssssssssseeee 1 1 Transport Stream Compliance Analyzer Gena Started ss 3 a5 t board a a a a ees a 2 1 TSCA PCAMiCS ie haan h eee haa Naot beta aes 2 2 Deterred and Real Time WodeS 5 Aone hens hak Lene eae aae hoes 2 2 Technical Backeround saratie ae Wheat aa Renee RRS eae ties 2 3 WSer INCH Ce etre elect eh Renews Ba ein eee Dee he Oh aah oh has 2 3 Cipre Vil Pearce merina eni deri ee hank tere ees aeeh tek 2 5 THe Sered RECOMING sr rasakake i wheat ahk Meme te Wheel ane ties 2 5 Starting he TSCA SOMWA 4 023 pews hero haeh APN hbase het 2 6 Setting Up the IP IMENICE sicari poe Panak pea Pieeseeeh et 2 12 Seting the Stream Content FONE i 2 056 ates abl aeewieeineesaae vies 2 15 Understanding the Analyzer Window cceccccccccccees 2 19 TSCA Window Components 0 eee ee eee ee eees 2 20 Emon Status CED scor wise deeds Bar ed ee ee eed eB Read eee Gow an Bae 2 24 COMERME CIU Saree hed ta Poets eae a at Rowe ee ears BS 2 25 Using the Program View ccccccsssccsssc
164. The Original TS PID will require setting The content of the file will be Sections The sections will be in binary form The file will consist of one or many sections appended one after the other 8 93 Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views 8 94 Other When multiplexed the sections will be encoded on the given PID as SI If the resulting multiplex is subsequent ly opened in the Multiplexer the sections will be inter preted as SI and displayed under the SI Tables node in the tree A file generated using the Edit O Export Section Data menu option can be used here The Bit rate value will require setting Any binary or ASCII file that is to be packetized into the transport stream at the specified bit rate The Bit rate value will require setting The remaining fields are interactive and will only be enabled when a value is required Bitrate Original TS PID Extra DTS offset Stream_id When first defining a source the bit rate is unknown and 0 Kbps is displayed If the Transport Packet Stream or an Other File Type is selected the field is enabled and a value in kbit s can be entered For streams other than transport streams this field will be blank and disabled When multiplexing ES or PES streams the Multiplexer will derive an offset between the PCR and the decoded timestamp DTS of the first access unit video picture audio frame You can override this offset and make it larger
165. This only works for file messages that have an associated viewer applica tion on the PC Save As Save the BIOP message to a separate file View BIOP Message Displays a structure view of the next appearance of this BIOP message that can be formed from the current stream position onwards as indicated by the Transport Packet number displayed in the Transport Packet Bar MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 35 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com Carousel Analyzer Views View Carrier Module Activates or creates the U N download view and high lights the module that carries this BIOP message View Cycle Time P Allows either cycle time statistics or graphical view of the carousel to be selected View Repetition Activates or creates a view of the repetition of this BIOP message View Bitrate gt This BIOP message Activates or creates a view of the bit rate of this BIOP message gt Including nested messages View the sum of the bit rates for this BIOP message and all descendant messages that is all children and their children These options are only available for BIOP directory messages NOTE If a Service Gateway is viewed in the Bitrate Repetition or Structure view its name in these views reflects the DSI transaction ID and PID in which it was carried OC_abed mpg Object Carousels OF x El Object Carousels E
166. Warn about remapping to existing PIDs Warns if an operation will remap a PID onto one that is already in use Any stream that is held in a file can be edited with the Transport Stream Editor To edit a file select the Open option from the File menu If the required file is in the list of recently edited files it may be selected from the list to save using the Open file dialog box JES Edt iew Tools Help lose 1 Copy of Ad 10s mpg 2 Copy of 4d_8s mpq 3 Copy of 4d_5s mpg 4 Copy of Test rpg Eit EFE Prat HESIEN Print Setup Exit Alternatively use the Ctrlt O keyboard shortcut There is also a shortcut button available on the Toolbar for opening a file which has the standard file open symbol Be S ol a MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Transport Stream Editor Getting Started Opening a File from Windows Explorer or a File Browser Window Copying File before Editing The program can be started and a file opened with the last set of program options in a single operation from Windows Explorer or a File Browser Window Place the pointer over the file name or icon press the right mouse button to open a menu and then select the Edit option PN Exploring Samples File Edit iew Jools Help 2 86s alz 4e x cko All Folders Contents of Ses Desktop AS My Computer Ad Ssmpg TA d 8s mpq aH Ad 10s mp Play 22 0326E MPEG Fi
167. _descriptor to the SDT Table 7 23 Data broadcast descriptor Descriptor Syntax data_broadcast_descriptor descriptor tag descriptor length data_broadcast_id component_tag selector length for i 0 i lt selector_ length i selector byte 7 92 CG Value Comment 0x64 depends on the type of carousel user LSB of the assoc_tag of the PID carrying the carousel s DSI depends on the type of carousel MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream Table 7 23 Data broadcast descriptor Cont Descriptor Syntax CG Value Comment ISO_639 2 3 language code CG does not use the text field so the language code is set to und efined text_length for i 0 i lt text_length i text_ char Not used Q I ETSI EN 300 468 section 6 2 10 The use of the data_broadcast_descriptor and the contents of the data_broad cast_id and selector_bytes fields depend on the type of carousel s in the program DSM CC Object Carousel The DSM CC standard does not define the data_broad cast_descriptor and so a data_broadcast_descriptor is not added to the service entry for a program containing a DSM CC object carousel MHP Object Carousels MHP uses the AIT for all its signaling requirements and so does not require the use of the data_broadcast_ descriptor DVB Object Carousels A data_broadcast_descriptor is added for every DVB Object Carousel cont
168. a carousels associated with it OC_abed mpg Servines Fa Services tay 1 E DSM O0 O H messages on FID 1500 0456 tag 100 0E _ Section table id 59 Ox3b OSMCC_UN is Section table_id 60 0x32 OSMCC Download H E Object Carousel E l Figure 6 2 DVB Programs Services view typical 6 30 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views New SRIB S1 1 cutmpg Services Ega Serv ICES Version Size ni BY Service 103 ieee a Service 104 e zj Pi service UU Gee DSM CC sectons on PID 5888 027 700 tag 64 0x40 gt fan b E Section table_id 59 Usb CSMCC_UM EB Section table_id 61 0s3d DSMCC_StreamDescripte ad Data Carousels p dmi Service r kaaas rr H Figure 6 3 ARIB Programs Services view typical The diagram below indicates the primary nodes that are accessible from the Program Services view fe OC_abecd_mpg Services Fem Series ker Semice c source I oan OSM CC U M messages on PID 150 0x96 _ F Section table_id 59 0s3b OSMCC_UN m n Section table id E0 0s2c DSMEC Do ot Object Carousels E a Object CarnusellD 3 031 051 10 0 Oe E ela Gateway Service Program nod Elementary PID node see gt Object Data Table node Carousel View Ee PY Adoo cpp ew Adoc h PY Adocdect cpp oY Adocdecth ADOCFILE CPP fy ADOCFILE H fa AFAMICPP of D b MTS400 Series MP
169. a Mpeg File It can also help pou repair some damaged tiles fou can ute the Stream Editor or Strear Analyser ko view the files in hexadecimal format to assist in selecting regions to cut Digital video Hroadcasting Skip this page on startup Tektronix Cancel The introductory page can be disabled by checking the Skip this page on startup option Select the Next button to move on to Step 1 13 2 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Transport Stream Cutter Step 1 Specify the name and location of the source file to copy a slice from TS Cutter Wizard Step 1 Emeeen OO Digital Video Broadcasting Select the Browse button to open a standard file browser window to look for and choose the required file Then select the Next button to move on to Step 2 In step 2 the slice is specified by typing in the first packet and the number of packets to copy The total number of packets in the file is also shown TS Cutter Wizard Step 2 Digital Video Broadcasting Selecting the Back button will return to Step 1 so that the source file name and location may be changed MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 13 3 Transport Stream Cutter 13 4 Step 3 is the last Specify the name and location for the new file TS Cutter Wizard Step 3 ou can specify the destination file manually OA Drag and drop a file from an Explorer window OF Search for the file by clicking Browse
170. acket at the current stream position as indicated by the Transport Packet number displayed in the Transport Packet Bar om PID node Represents all the transport packets with a particular PID If the PID carries sections then the PID tree node will have child table tree nodes Right Click Menu Options View Transport Packet Displays a structure view of the next transport packet encountered on this PID from the current stream posi tion as indicated by the Transport Packet number dis played in the Transport Packet Bar View Cycle Time gt Allows either cycle time statistics or graphical view to be selected View Repetition Activates or creates a view of the repetition of this PID in the transport stream View Bitrate Activates or creates a view of the bit rate of this PID 6 62 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views or Table node This node represents the stream of sections present on a specific PID with a specific table identity Right Click Menu Options View Section View Cycle Time gt View Repetition View Bitrate Signal Carousel MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Displays a structure view of the next section with this PID and table identity that can be formed from the cur rent stream position onwards as indicated by the Trans port Packet number displayed in the Transport Packet Bar Allows either cycle time statistics or graphical view to
171. added Mandatory SI tables are added automatically The structure of the carousel can be saved in XML format this definition file can be subsequently reopened in a new session for further edits The end result of a session is the creation of a transport stream which can be saved to a file One of the main advantages of Carousel Generator is that many of the more complex concepts in the various Object Carousel standards are hidden from the user for the sake of clarity and user friendliness Three views of the assembled stream are offered Carousels Collections and Programs Each view displays aspects of the stream from a single perspective The three following screenshots show the same stream in each of the views MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Getting Started Carousels View The Carousels view lists the carousels and the associated objects that are included in the session Carousel Session Programs 2 Carousels rl ss MHP Object Carousel D 1 PIO 100 00064 Prog 1 G Tia Carousel Contents 20 items 7 25 87 kbytes lt lt Service Gateway gt gt i snake de i maz ke Controler class GamePane class Hodel class ScoreD isplap class Snakeeletclass aE res Bi OTT Object Carousel ID 1 PID 200 00008 Prag 2 Ta Carousel Contents 0 items 0 bytes 4 Ae Carousels Collections Q Programs Carousel Types The supported carousel types are as fol
172. ained in a program The data_broadcast_id is set to 7 and the selector_byte format is as follows Table 7 24 DVB object carousel for i 0 i lt N i DVB selector_bytes Syntax Comment Carousel type id Reserved Transaction id auto Matches the carousel DSI transaction ID time out value DSI not used time _out_value_DIl not used Reserved leak_rate O a MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 93 Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream Table 7 24 DVB object carousel Cont DVB selector_bytes Syntax ISO _639 language code object_name length for j 0 j lt object_name_length j object_name_char I ETSI EN 300 468 section 6 2 10 Table 7 25 DTT object carousel DTT selector_bytes Syntax for i 0 i lt selector_byte_length i application type code number_languages for j 0 j lt number_languages j ISO_639 language_code I application specific data length for j 0 j lt a_s_d_ length j CG Value Comment n a The object names loop is not used by the Carousel Generator n a n a DTT Object Carousels The DTG D Book requires that there only be a single data broadcast _ descriptor per service to identify the application type carried in that service The Carousel Generator uses the first Carousel it encounters in a program that has at least one application id set as the carousel referenced by the data broadcast descriptor Generally only one of the DTT Obj
173. ait for that asset and all child assets that are found in the transport stream This means that a directory can be specified as a wildcard asset and any content found underneath it in the transport stream will be treated as an asset for example specify bin star tup class as the boot class and images as a wildcard directory asset Any content in the images directory in the carousel will be treated as an asset MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 71 Carousel Analyzer Application Support To open the Applications management dialog select Edit gt Applications The following dialog box is displayed Application 1 New advert clogs Poll test Grr Edit Henane Delete Auto Create Invites user reaction and logs response test In the Applications management dialog the main list displays those applications that have already been created Application data is stored locally in the file C Program Files Tektronix DataTestS ystem applications dat this is the installation directory but it may have been modified by the user This data file can be copied to other Carousel Analyzer installations if required A summary of the highlighted application is displayed below the list the user should enter this summary when the application is created The dialog button functions are described as follows New Allows a new application to be defined in the New Ap plication
174. aling for DTT Object Carousels is the same as for DVB Object Carousels However the D Book does specify the contents of the id_selec tor_byte section of the data_broadcast_id_descriptor and also requires that the data_broadcast_id value in that descriptor is 262 0x106 Table 7 17 DTT object carousels DTT id_selector_bytes Syntax CG Value Comment for i 0 i lt descriptor_length 2 i application type code user DTT Object Carousel node gt Properties gt DTT Applications page Application codes list contains the app codes used boot_priority_hint user Boot priorities accessed as above app specific data length N2 for j 0 j lt N2 j app specific data byte Not used Q I UK DTG D Book Digital Terrestrial Television Requirements for Interoperability section 18 5 2 1 MHP Object Carousels ETSI TS 101 812 MHP uses an additional table the AIT for most of its signaling requirements The location of the AIT table for a program is identified through an elementary stream PID entry in the PMT with stream type 5 The ES _ info loop for the AIT PID also carries an applica tion_signaling descriptor AIT information is given in the DVB SI Tables section of this appendix MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 87 Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream Table 7 18 MHP object carousels Application signaling Descriptor Syntax CG Value Comment application signaling descriptor
175. allocated to the test protocol note that currently options are only applicable to DSM CC Sections and U U Object Carousels Available options are applicable to all standards for example an option set in the DVB DSM CC Section will be applied in the MPEG and ARIB protocols 6 10 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Getting Started Opening a Stream File Any Transport Stream file can be opened for browsing by the Carousel Analyzer However only those streams containing Data and or Carousel Objects will provide meaningful results Transport Stream Analyzer should be used for normal stream analysis Only one file can be opened at a time To open a file select File gt Open If the required file is in the list of recently analyzed files then it can be opened from the list to save using the open file dialog box ae Pehtrona Corcese Anaeses Fie View Analysis Help Print Setup 1 OC_abed mpg 2 OC_abed errors mpa 3C Streams Nilesatl mpg Exit Alternatively use the Ctrl O keyboard shortcut There is a shortcut button available on the Toolbar for opening a file which uses the standard file open symbol File wiew Aral As the file opens a progress bar is displayed analysis may require more than one pass through the transport stream file The current pass number is shown in the title line After the first pass a second progress bar new resolved links sh
176. alvsersMHP_MPEG SI C Program Files Tektronix Carousel Analyser MPE SCF Program Files Tektronix C srousel Analvserspat cat scp If the script name is unknown use the browse button at the right side of the blank field to display a standard Windows file Open dialog box 3 The new script file name will be added at the bottom of the script list Note that script files are parsed in the order that they are listed because the file may require moving up in the list see Moving Script files in the list below Removing a Script File 1 Highlight the file to be deleted and select the Delete Script button Shortcut key Delete oCripts options C Program Files Tektronix Carusel Snalpserdsmgste C Program FilestTektronix Carousel Analserndemd Leete Delete r Program FilesiTektronix Carousel Analise MHF SCP L Program FilesiTektroniz sE arusel nasen MHP DVB SCR z Program FilesTektroniz Carousel Analysen MHP MPEG SI L Program FilesTektronis Carousel Analysen MPE SCP I Oem ee eee Cl T lbp m Pa L p n ri mab met s mm 6 8 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Getting Started Moving Script Files in the List Script files are parsed in the order that they are listed the file may require moving up in the list 1 Highlight the file to be moved and select either the Move Up or Move Down button Shortcut keys Alt A and Alt W respectively The file will move up
177. am from the drop down list The remaining fields on this tab will be enabled or disabled depending on the Stream Type selected Complete the enabled fields as necessary Timing Tab The Timing tab of the Add Program dialog box is used to specify for what portion of the new multiplex the selected stream will be used Start time a Stop time i 1 56 z Loop interval a 5 Iv Loop 10 Complete the fields as required The default settings assume that the stream is to be carried throughout the new multiplex looping if necessary MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 37 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com Multiplexer Wizards 8 38 PCR Tab The PCR tab of the Add Program dialog box is used to specify whether PCR information should be carried with the selected elementary stream or in a separate associated PID Source Timing FCR M any BCE Serbere FCR FIO 16151 Initial PCR f PCR Interval E ms M Presenre RER leery Preserve PER intervals 11 If the PCR is to be held in an associated PID disable the Carry PCR checkbox and enter a PCR PID number 12 If the PCR is to be carried with the stream enable the Carry PCR checkbox and complete the remaining fields as required 13 Select the OK button to complete the addition of an elementary stream to the listing in the Program Wizard Set Defaults returns the settings to
178. ances this may be important To move a file in a list highlight the file name and select the Move Up or Move Down button as required Each press of the button will move the file up or down one place in the list until it reaches the top or the bottom Viewing a Script File Script files can be viewed and edited in a text editor provided that the scp extension has been associated correctly in Windows Explorer To edit a script highlight the script name and select View This will open the script in Notepad or its equivalent The required edits can then be made and the script saved When the filename is satisfactory and any scripting actions have been performed select Next to analyze the file Progress is indicated by the progress bar and the appearance of messages in the Progress amp Information log MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Make Seamless Wizard Select a Program to Make Seamless During the input file s analysis the selected transport stream is analyzed to determine it s program content If analysis is unsuccessful in determining program content the stream will not be opened and an appropriate message will be displayed in the Progress amp Information log Each program found is displayed in the drop down list Program accompanied by an indication of the number of program elements video audio etc At this stage a priority program must be selected in order for it to be analyzed and tested for suitabilit
179. and Controls Packet Number Packet Humber Shows current packet number Mewe values can be typed in Tao sel ect a packet by number Packet the new value click in the Packet Humber Field and type in Goto Button Selects packets shown in Packet number then click on the Goto Button It is normal to edit a copy of a transport stream Transport Stream Analyzer uses the same packet numbering as Editor So the packet number can be used to find and view a packet in Analyzer and then edit the copy of the same packet in Editor The Slider Bar can be dragged from the edge of the main window into a floating pallet To do this place the mouse pointer on the background inside the Slider Bar hold down the left mouse button and drag the slider bar away from the window border The result is a self contained window that looks like this PID Filter 160 lt gt St ee re tele 34832 mata To replace the Slider Bar on the window border drag it over the border until the outline changes shape 9 10 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Transport Stream Editor Menus and Controls Menu Options The following pages describe all of the menu options Since many of the options are context sensitive they will be available only when their function is appropri ate for the selected window or display element When a menu option is not available the option is grayed
180. application name will display its description and a brief report on the availability of the boot class and assets If the boot class is reported as being not present the timing operation will be aborted after the first test pass Select Applications to open the Applications management dialog see page 6 71 On first opening this dialog a simple test is performed to detect the presence of the required boot classes Applications for which the boot class is found will be enabled Subsequently user selections will be recalled 6 86 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com Carousel Analyzer Application Support Treat Intermediate Directories as Assets If this checkbox is enabled all directories that form part of the asset path are also treated as assets They must be downloaded as part of the timing test This will not usu ally have any significant impact on the results because directories are generally much smaller and transmitted at a higher frequency than files Calculate Cold Boot Time If this checkbox is enabled the Cold Boot timing test will be applied see page 6 84 this may take some time NOTE In MHP mode if the Cold Boot time is to include the AIT acquisition time the Application Timing selection must be made from an MHP application node Java or HTML By selecting an MHP application
181. aptation field is present MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 23 Transport Stream Editor Header Editor The Adaption Field Length field shows the length of the Adaptation Field in bytes and allows it to be edited in decimal Adaptation Field Length 7 The Flags fields display the state of the binary flags in check boxes Flags T Discontinuity Indicator T Random Access Indicator Elementary Stream Priority L 0 or false M 1 or true Click in the box to toggle the state of a flag The PCR Flag field displays the state of the binary PCR Flag in check boxes lv PCA Flag PCR Value fi 2604236616 L 0 or false M 1 or true When the flag is true the PCR Value is shown and can be edited in decimal notation 9 24 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Transport Stream Editor Header Editor The OPCR field displays the state of the binary OPCR Flag in check boxes Iv OPCR Flag OFCA Value frist 9164970 L 0 or false vo or true When the flag is true the OPCR Value is shown and can be edited in decimal notation The Splicing Point Flag fields displays the state of the Splicing Point Flag in check boxes IY Splicing Point Flag Splice Countdown E L 0 or false Mo or true When the flag is true the Splice Countdown value is shown and can be edited in decimal The Transport Private Data Flag field displays the state of the Transport Private Data Flag WM Transport P
182. as the Stream type and set the bit rate The DSM CC section will be added Delete a DSM CC Section A DSM CC section can be deleted from a table by highlighting it in the Navigator view and selecting Delete from the right click menu To delete more than one section select and delete each one in turn MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 101 Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Export a DSM CC Section DSM CC data can be exported in the form of a binary file Highlight the required DSM CC section in the Navigator Tables view From the right click menu select Export Section Data Name the file to be created and choose a location Select Save to confirm the action Individual DSM CC sections can also be exported using the Navigator Programs view Under any Elementary Streams node highlight the DSM CC section to be exported From the right click menu select Export Section Data Name the file to be created and choose a location Select Save to confirm the action 8 102 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Editing in Section View Use the Section View window to modify the contents of a version section This includes version section and table specific data that the Navigator Tables view displays If the Section View window it is not already open highlight the Section View option from the View menu If a section version is selected in the Navigator Tables view the contents are automatically displayed
183. at Browse File type Section Bitrate 0 kbs Orignal TS PID Extra DTS offset f 5 Steamid 0 Starteach section in anew packet 8 100 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Adding DSM CC Sections Methods available to the Program Structure KSN Highlight an Elementary Stream in the Navigator Programs view and select Add from the right click menu m Drag and drop copy only from the Examine TS window Programs view to the Navigator Programs view m Drag and drop copy move from another instance of Multiplexer to the Navigator Programs view Adding a DSM CC section to the program structure is similar to adding an elementary stream to the program structure see page 8 92 with the following modifications The main dialog box fields Stream Type and Pid Number dictate the PID that will carry the stream and the stream type entry that will be made in the PMT The Stream Type should be set to one of the DSM CC entries Add Program Stream EJ Stream Type J13 DSM CC sections Pid Humber 399 Source Timing PCR File name D Streams carann dema mpg Browse File type Section Bitrate fo kby s Original TS PID Estra OTS offset fo Stream_id E Start each section in anew packet D l Componenti ag f Cancel In the Source tab of the Add Program Stream dialog box identify the File name to be added Select Transport Packets Sections
184. ate using the following methods the first method provides greater clock rate precision Enter values into the numerator and denominator text boxes see Figure 10 7 The MPEG Player will then calculate the clock rate based on the ratio of the numera tor and denominator values Enter a value into the clock rate text box The MPEG Player will then calculate the numerator and denomina tor text boxes based on the clock rate 10 23 MPEG Player Menus and Controls When you use the Ext P Clk or Ext S Clk mode set the clock rate to the same value as the input clock signal Also when you use the Ext S Clk mode you cannot set the value more than 32 Mbps Fixed ES Rate Sets whether elementary stream rate is fixed When it is checked the elementary stream rate becomes constant regardless of the clock rate setting If you fix the ele mentary stream rate you cannot set the output clock rate Data Rate more than the data rate set when the stream file was downloaded When the Fixed ES Rate check box is enabled PCR PTS DTS Update Method in the Select Update Item dia log box is set to Hardware automatically see Others Dialog Box on page 10 30 Default Rate Displays the default clock rate and packet size and then changes the values When you select this button the fol lowing Default Clock dialog box appears Default Clock Default Data Rate Packet Size Figure 10 7 Default Clock Dialog box 10 24 MTS400 Series
185. ation PIDs node ccc ccc eee eee eens Packet Donil View 22 5622 taak anea ENESE t een ease wer henakwes Common User Interface Concepts cccccccccccccccees Windows M magome it csi cases eaa e E eee as Aas ade anes DS ONS E E EEEE E E eet ane ent ede ae wat eet a Gee ade ave went ose aoe Sra pl ManaCeMenNt aeie aves i avs Stand aver ota Bove ea ae eens PTR AGEING re E T eon eaten Bane ested Gave ene Haves eens AERE NS tae Seated ers E EE EE E Geo eaten Bane etek Gave eae tere eters BERE CAIN cet Sense eat aed oattaok Gaon eatin Bane etek Gave eae E ean Parame eas perediku ah aun cette dete aged ceshtene E ds Saws oped awe ee EVM OO fe cock 3 de yet eset Sucre cls deat a ase gs este oe ee mee eee a BERIS aeee ete ve gece E E wetlg e etapa ara EPG VION eere eget ter carte eer we Name ave E ener wane eer eas MEE VICWS Sel ce ot de pagrd cane a e near oetig eos meee ae Nane oe aun ees Capurro VUTEC ALU Co coct ceecc ut vara wetted E gt eotterdomsmeny a e tve E Tg eored RECOTdIDE to oS her ducts ee ded tae ae eae ereetess Menu Bar and OpuOns ederrik eave ters neg ote haved ete he eens PYCICICNCES 5 pete oe he ete bears ote haere og eee ee eee SPET IES abet ttm yprt hea are catia E avec E eevee eters here ban Task Examples eee ane me er ere ear er er Which Tests Have Failed in an Analyzed Stream 0 0 eee How Many PIDs are in a Stream How many PIDs are Referenced and UM ICre NCCI ek eatin e ake hades
186. ation to correct broken references To remap packets from one or more PIDs select the Remap PIDs option from the Tools menu tMPEG 2 TS Editor No File TEM Tools l i PCA CN The program scans the file to build a list of PIDs displaying the Hourglass mouse pointer while it is busy It then opens the Remap PIDs dialog box Remap PIDs To remap 4 PID value first select a PID entry arid either double click or press the Edit button Then press the Remap button to perform the remapping Restore Cancel To specify a mapping from a current PID to a new PID select the current PID entry from the list by clicking on it MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 29 Transport Stream Editor PID Remapping 9 30 Remap PIDs E4 To remap a FID value first select a PID entry and ether double click or press the Edit button Then press the Remap button to perom the remapping Curent PID 1156 115 Restore Beman 1 Ei r Cancel Now select the Edit button which opens the PID Entry dialog box Alterna tively double click on the required entry in the list PID Entry Map PID 162 to Cancel Type in the value for the new PID to map to and select OK Map FID fisz to 3072 Cancel Repeat this process for each PID that is to be remapped The Restore button will change the value of the selected Map to PID back to that of the Current PID without having to
187. ations PID settings E DSIZDII settings Application Codes DTT Applications Appl Code Initial Objects Appl Code Initial Object Add de ms2 snake Controller class Remove Application Codes The entries in this list will be added to the data_broad cast_id_ descriptor in the elementary stream descriptor loop of the PMT This descriptor lists the application types that can be booted from the elementary stream with which it is associated The Boot Priority Hint is an indication of the application that should be booted in the case of more than one in the list being supported The application with the highest Boot Priority Hint in the range 0 to 255 will be booted first Add Displays the Add Application Code dialog box Add Application Code Ea Application lode Dy o Tj Bogt Priority Hirit o Cancel Remove Removes the highlighted Application Code MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 49 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Initial Objects The Initial Object list allows different languages to have different boot objects On stream generation entries here will appear in the ServiceCon textList part of the Service Gateway object Add Displays the Add Initial Object dialog box Add Initial Object E3 Application Code Ox 01 01 Language Code fund Carousel Object deems 2 snake Controller class Ha Bi Cancel The Application Code should correspond to a code that is already li
188. ay Record Dialog Box When you select the Timer Play command from the Play menu the Timer Play Record dialog box is displayed Timer Play Record Shark at oa22004 120726 Figure 10 10 Timer Play Record dialog box Start at Sets the date and time when the stream output or record starts When you press the OK button after setting the date and time the current date and time and the set date and time are displayed When the current date and time coincide with the set date and time the dialog box closes and stream output or stream record starts automatically If you want to cancel the operation select the OK button When the dialog box that prompts you to confirm the operation is displayed press the OK button to execute the operation MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 29 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com MPEG Player Menus and Controls Others Dialog Box When you select the Other command from the Play menu the Others dialog box is displayed Others 10 30 Standard TOT TOT Numeric ISDBYP TS Ext Flay Start SFI Output Enable Figure 10 11 Others dialog box Standard Sets the standard used on the hierarchy display screen You can select ARIB ATSC DVB or MPEG2 For a transport stream ARIB ATSC DVB or MPEG2 the standard is set to the previous setting as a default For an S TMCC M TMCC
189. ay the PID associations in the Selected PID association panel 7 44 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Select New Assoc to create a new association node in the tree The PID and Association Tag will be automatically allocated but they can be changed in the Selected PID association panel Selected PID association PID This is the PID of the elementary stream ES carrying the DII and or DSI messages Range 0 to 8191 see PID Values page 7 45 Association Tag This is the 16 bit value carried in the associa tion_tag descriptor which is inserted in the ES descrip tor loop of the PMT signaling this carousel Range 0 to 65535 Maximum bitrate This is the maximum bit rate allocated in the stream for this PID If there is not enough bandwidth to support this rate the actual bit rate will be less Range 0 25 Mbit s to 90 Mbit s PID Values As stated the valid range for PIDs is 0 to 8191 However there are a number of restrictions on the actual values that can be used since some are reserved or may be used in other carousels The following table shows the elements that can and cannot share PID values Unless otherwise noted No indicates the entities in the row and column headers may not share a PID value in any carousel in a single session Yes indicates that the PID value may be shared with other entities in the same session unless otherwise indicated in the
190. bars and methods for managing the workspace Menu Options The following pages describe all of the menu options Since many of the options are context sensitive they will be available only when their function is appropri ate for the selected window or display element When a menu option is not available the option is grayed out File Menu Options Table 6 4 shows the options available in the File menu Table 6 4 File menu options Command Open Close Save As Print Print Preview Print Setup Exit Function Open an MPEG transport stream for analysis The program opens the file selection dialogue box allowing the user to choose the required file Closes the current file Saves the file to a new file name Opens the Print dialog Opens the Print Preview dialog Opens the Print Setup dialog Closes any file that is open and terminates execution of the program Edit Menu Options Table 6 5 shows the options available in the Edit menu Table 6 5 Edit menu options Command Applications Go To Next MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Function Opens the Application Management dialog Jumps to next occurrence of the structure being viewed The Packet field in the Transport Packet bar will reflect the change of packet Carousel Analyzer Menus and Controls View Menu Options Table 6 6 shows the options available in the View menu NOTE An active depressed button next to an option indi
191. be automatically removed from the carousel by enabling the checkbox Select this option if you wish to delete invalid links from the carousel Individual files and directories listed in the panel can be included or excluded from the activity by enabling or disabling the adjacent checkbox Select Synchronise to synchronizes the carousel with the source files in accordance with the checkbox selections MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 65 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation NOTE If the Include in Synchronization checkbox is disabled for a directory this directory will not be compared to the source directory and neither will any subdirectories regardless of their individual settings Collections See Carousel Generator Overview page 7 2 Collections provide a means by which objects can be grouped and transmitted in a single carousel with differing properties such as repetition rate and compres sion Each collection can have different properties all objects in a collection are transmitted with the same properties Carousels H F pa Carousel Contents 20 items El B Carousel Session 1 Carousel El MHP Object Carousel D 1 PID Fifi lt 4 Service Gateway gt gt a snake eS Hl da mez B gs snake a Controller clase ig tes H b GamePane class Model class ScoreDisplay class om G pakeplzt alan js snake A down png 4 edge pnig
192. be saved to a separate file Print only available for bit rate and repetition views Edit Toolbar gt Jumps to next occurrence of the structure being viewed MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 17 Carousel Analyzer Menus and Controls View Toolbar The buttons in this toolbar open and close the associated windows The windows are described elsewhere in this manual wa View Programs Services View Section View PIDs View Transport Packet View Object Carousels a View Bitrate View Data Carousels i View Repetition Rate View U N Download Mes E View Lifetime sages View Log Zoom In View BIOP Message Zoom Out View U N Message Show All Timing Toolbar Edit Application Timing r View Carousel Cycle Time re View Entity Cycle Time E Pa Cycle Time rap y View Entity Cycle Time Graph Help Toolbar P About Carousel Analyzer Opens a dialog box which displays the program version number and license number This information will be required if a Technical Support is contacted 6 18 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Menus and Controls Transport Packet Bar The Transport Packet bar provides a quick method of locating and navigating to transport packets PIDs PID Filter Enable Packet Slider a eae 7 Number PID Filter Ry Number Previous Next Packet Packet To locate a particular Transport Packet enter the Trans port Packet number and select Goto PID Filter e
193. be selected Activates or creates a view of the repetition rate of this PID with this PID and table identity Activates or creates a bit rate view of sections with this PID and table identity See Manual Signaling page 6 39 6 63 Carousel Analyzer Views Log View Menu Bar View gt Log Toolbar The log view is a tabbed window with each tab representing information about a particular MPEG 2 layer Each tab contains any miscellaneous information about the transport stream that has been analyzed For example packets that have the transport_error_bit set will have an entry in the transport log tab The diagram below indicates the information that is accessible from the Log view OIC abed ming Log El 9 Summary Log Entries cof Analysis Started 10 49 39 E O Transport Errors A W arning s F 0 Section Enor s 0 Warnina s oof ODSM CC Section Errorle 0 Warningsts oe OU U Object Carousel Error s 0 V arning s ih 1 O51 Messages oo fe 1 Dll Message s I 23 DOB Message s et 0 One maa Data Carousells ai Summary Summary This view provides a summary of the transport stream analysis 6 64 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views Transport Packet Log view This view displays the errors that have been logged in transport packets during analysis of the stream Right Click Menu Options View Transport Packet Displays a structure view of the highlighted transport packe
194. ber of bytes for a Non TS file Use the Format list box to select the method of setting the position Stop Sets the stop position of the stream by time h m s or the number of packets the number of super frames for a M TMCC file or the number of bytes for a Non TS file Use the Format list box to select the method of setting the position m Initial Sets the initial start position of the stream for loop output You can set the value by time h m s or the number of packets the number of super frames for a M TMCC file or the number of bytes for a Non TS file Use the Format list box to select the method of setting the position m Play Shows the actual time or number of packets the number of super frames for a M TMCC file or the number of bytes for a Non TS file that is calculated by the values of the Start and Stop text boxes Format Specifies the method of setting the start stop and initial positions of the stream For a transport stream file you can select Time or Packets For a M TMCC file you can select Time or SF super frame For a Non TS file you can select Time or Bytes MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 27 MPEG Player Menus and Controls 10 28 For an ISDB T file the start packet is defined as the first appearing packet including an OFDM frame start flag after the specified start position The stop packet is defined as the packet at the front of the last appearing packet including an OFD
195. box will display the structure underneath the node Similarly if a box is adjacent to the node the level of detail immediately below it is already dis played this detail can be hidden by clicking on the box Components that are connected to a branch of the tree without a square box are leaf nodes they display the lowest and finest level of detail Right clicking on a tree node may open a context sensitive menu Component Selection Components can be selected or highlighted either singly or in groups When selected the views available from the View menu or a right click menu will be those that can be applied to all of the selected components MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 23 Carousel Analyzer Menus and Controls Single component selection Selected by clicking on a component Range selection Selected by highlighting the first component in the required selection and while holding the Shift key on the keyboard clicking on the last component The selected range will be B PER highlighted By MOORE Pet Shift m ADOCFILE H s AFRM CPP EY AFRMLH ad F gt freed Multiple component selection Selected by holding the Control key CTRL on the keyboard and clicking B CTRL the required components El i E B Adoc cpp CTRL A Adocdethong Q amp i EB CTRL Node selection Selected by holding the Alt key on the keyboard and clicking the required node all subcompo
196. carou sel and can be edited to point to another directory if re quired Newly created directories may not initially have a correct source directory but this can be edited if de sired This field does not appear in the output stream and is limited to 260 characters The Source Directory will be used when the carousel is synchronized only if the Include in Synchronization box is checked see also page 7 65 Member of Collection This is a list of all the collections currently included in this carousel Selecting a different collection effectively put this object into a different module with possibly dif ferent cycle times and compression characteristics In the case of a directory object all child objects below it are also moved to the selected collection New Create a new collection see page 7 66 Collection Properties This panel displays a summary of the properties of the collection of which the object is a member The proper ties can be edited by using the Edit button to open the Collection Properties dialog box see page 7 68 Applications In MHP applications are transmitted in object carousels Applications can be written in Java or HTML All files that make up the application should be added to the carousel However the receiver must be made aware of the entry point into the application and certain other information about the characteristics of the application This information is sent in the Application Information Table
197. cates that the window or toolbar is currently visible an inactive button means that it is hidden Table 6 6 View menu options Command Function Toolbars gt Submenu shows or hides the toolbar File Fa Edit y WE y Timing Help Transport Packet Bar Shows or hides the Transport Packet Bar Status Bar Shows or hides the Status Bar The remaining options in this menu open and close the associated window The options and windows are described elsewhere in this section m Program Services U N Download Object Carousels Data Carousels PIDs and Log m BIOP Message U N Message Section Transport Packet Transport Packet List Hex Dump Timing Carrier and Resources m Repitition and Bitrate MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Menus and Controls Graph Menu Options Table 6 7 shows the options available in the Graph menu Table 6 7 Graph menu options Command Function Zoom Applies to Bitrate and Repetition views only ousel Analyser OC_abcd_mpg Graph Window Help iH Zoomin Tab gave d coom u Shift T ab Copp Show All Zoom In Maximizes the central 50 x axis of the current graph Zoom Out Takes one step back in the Zoom sequence Show All Resets the graph to show all points Save Saves the graph in the selected format ousel Analyser OC_abcd_mpg Graph Window Help Zoom ta ch t Bitmap Copy d Jpeg Table 0 a e c source Cop
198. ccvcccssseeses 2 27 Program Navigation Transport Stream Node 000 eee 2 29 Program Navigation Program Nodes 00 cece eee eee teens 2 34 Program Navigation Elementary Stream Node 0006 2 35 Usine the Tests View s 0 0c4000i4 0 tia idani an a tae see ee eke 2 39 TOSO E ous de netede Teddy OR Gow areal dns Sac aeaey ak Px ees Cees 2 41 Tests Navigation All Tests sis ce bee erases ob Ieee eae ween es ce oes 2 43 Test Nayigation Test Nodes t 3 02 62 srawe enn es thee e Aware se es ee oes 2 43 Test Navigation PID Nodes 2 5 4 oes we edo ns 1b ete wae ee ses es Ae oes 2 44 Usine the Tables View ions 624p0tie dete eth etheatig bet heehee 2 45 Table Summary Pane tore dcivg howd eos G dams sd Soe eh ee are ees 2 46 Tables Detail View Section VIEW si sac ikeny dco dvome Ree keen ece hale 2 47 Tables Detail View SI Repetition Graphs 0 0 0 eee eens 2 49 Using the Pip View issn thie heehee hace eeatieeee tes 2 51 PID View A BIDS dclpids ine oie debi ach iaaia ld taints wd bid Reais a did eee eee ees 2 52 PID View Detail View All PID and Group 0 0005 2252 PID View Detal Miew PIDS ss 08 atnarahe 8 ta keh war Re be eta 2 54 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual i Table of Contents Volume 1 Using the Packets View 6 6 6 6 ss dee wisieece ns aha ares i phe wie dias Packet Navigation Bat i occ oon kcnee soe mie teen be eae Mew oae Packet Navig
199. ces are delivered to end users Object and Data Carousels are intended for the periodic transmission of information in a transport stream DVB Data Carousels contain modules of data of unspecified content ARIB Data Carousels and Object Carousels contain identifiable data objects for example JPEG files text files and application software Multimedia Home Platform MHP is also supported because the Application Information Table AIT and Object Carousels as specified in the MHP standard can be viewed The diagram below shows how information carried by data and object carousels is subdivided and ultimately carried by the transport stream sort sore Bos SC Headers are shown shaded BIOP messages contain a message header a message sub header and the message body which contains data The message body may contain complete data objects BIOP messages are broadcast in Modules A Module is formed from one or more concatenated complete BIOP messages Each Module is fragmented into one or more Download Data Blocks which are in turn transmitted in corresponding DSM CC Sections Sections are transmitted in packets in the Transport Stream The Carousel Analyzer enables each layer of the protocol stack to be analyzed and inspected The following sections provide an overview of how the Carousel Analyzer can be used to locate messages and packets of interest MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 3 Carousel Analyzer G
200. ciated options to use 1 lt filename gt A list of the four most recently analyzed files If the program 2 lt filename gt has recently been installed the list may be empty or hold less 3 lt filename gt than four files 4 lt filename gt Selecting a filename opens that file for analysis Exit Closes the program View Menu Options Table 14 2 lists the intial View menu options Table 14 2 File menu options Option Function Toolbar Shows or hides the toolbar Status Bar Shows or hides the status bar Select an option to change its status Script File Appearance Scripts displayed in Script Pad are color coded to aid understanding Script Pad makes no formatting corrections or changes it is recommended that script authors use conventional programming layout Single line comments are prefixed with a double slash in ScriptPad they are colored green Multi line comments of the form are also accepted by the parser MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 14 3 Script Pad Getting Started Opening a File 14 4 Any script file scp or scx can be opened for viewing and editing by this program To open a file select the Open option from the file menu If the required file is in the list of recently analyzed files then it can be opened from the list a Script Parser Files SCP View Help New Ctr N Print Setup 1 Copy of DYB scp 2 Copy of DVB scx 3 DVB sep 44RIB DVB se
201. criptors to be edited See application descriptors note below CRC 32 e Application Descriptors in Every application listed in the AIT will have five descriptors in the app_descrip the AIT _ _tors_loop but two of these depend upon the type of application Java or HTML The three common descriptors are the application_descriptor applica tion name descriptor and transport_protocol_ descriptor and the two app specific descriptors will either be dvb_j_ application_descriptor and dvb_j_ap plication_location_descriptor for Java apps or dvb_html_application_descriptor and dvb_html_application_location_descriptor for HTML apps Common Application Descriptors Table 7 30 Application descriptor Descriptor Syntax CG Value Comment application descriptor Note All of the user editable fields are accessed through File gt Properties gt Application Descriptor page descriptor_tag 0x00 descriptor length application profiles length for i 0 i lt N i application profile user gt Application profiles list version major user MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 99 Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream Table 7 30 Application descriptor Cont Descriptor Syntax version minor version micro service bound flag visibility reserved future use application_priority for i 0 i lt N i transport protocol label I ETSI TS 101 812 section 10 7 3 Table 7 31
202. ct Carousel ID 3 0x3 DSI ID 0 0x0 F 5 i Module Id 65517 Oxtfed PID 150 0496 3 Service Gateway pi Block number 0 moduleld 65517 Oxtfe oo Block number 1 moduleld 65517 Oxtfec gt fg Block number 2 moduleld 65517 Oxffec fi Block number 3 moduleld 65517 Otec lt i On 1 1 a LiB LOTEA p ro ee Arrange Icons Aligns icons of any minimized windows at the bottom of the program s main window 1 lt lt window title gt gt Makes the named window active putting it on top of any 2 lt lt window title gt gt windows that had been hiding all or part of it 3 etc 6 16 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Menus and Controls Help Menu Options Table 6 9 shows the options available in the Help menu Table 6 9 Help menu options Command Function Quick Help Opens the Quick Help browser window About Carousel Analyzer Opens a message box that displays the program version number and license number Toolbars Quick access buttons are divided between several toolbars File Edit View and Help A number of the toolbar functions are context sensitive which window is open and which element is highlighted will dictate which buttons are enabled and disabled File Toolbar f Open a file This button is disabled when a file is open m Save As BIOP file messages can be saved to separate files Structures can also
203. d 10 48 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Reference Using Preset Files You can save the instrument settings that you defined as a preset file so that you can later restore those settings Contents of the Preset File Preset files can be created for the Play screen and for the Record screen m In the Play screen you can save settings for stream output All of the parameter settings available in the Play menu are saved as a preset m Inthe Record screen you can save settings for stream record All of the parameter settings available in the Record menu are saved as a preset Saving a Preset File Use this procedure to save the current instrument settings as a preset file Perform the following steps to save a preset file 1 Make the required instrument settings 2 Select File gt Save Preset The Save As dialog box is displayed In the File name text box the following default file names are created as follows m Play Screen A two digit serial number is added to the selected file name for example if the selected file name is Test_TS the default file name becomes Test_TS00 m Record Screen A two digit serial number is added to the name Preset for example Preset01 You can change the file name as required 3 Select OK to save the instrument settings as a preset file Loading a Preset File Perform the following steps to load an instrument setup from a preset file 1
204. d D and E will come from Version 2 Basically these two views contain a summary of all the resources encountered in that module regardless of version _ New ARIB SI 1 cut mpg ARIB Data Carousels E ARIB Data Carousels Version Size SCT PY fen Carousel ld 2147483723 0x8000004b PID 5888 0x1 700 hea O 16 6 KB 320 fh Carousel ld 2147483677 0x8000001 d PID 6000 01770 Ga lt 1 18 0KB 320 ghh Carousel ld 2147483673 080000019 PID 320 0x140 N E tig Module Id 0 0x0 PID 320 Nw1 Am View Resources X m Base_btn png View Resources Displays resources iom A DATALOGO clt Displays resouces tr m all selected version m Datalogo pna module versions 2 full_screen bml T green_bar png A startup bml ia Module Id 0 0x0 PID 352 0 160 i TA startup bral MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual E fy Carousel ld 2147483711 OxS000003F PID 353 04161 fh Carousel Id 2147483710 0x8000003e PID 576 0 240 fh Carousel Id 2147483654 0x80000006 PID 344 0158 El df Carousel ld 2147483673 0x8000001 9 PID 352 0160 D New ARIB SI 1 cut mpg ARIB Module Resources QOOO00000 43 6F 6E a Oo0000010 EC 74 69 o0000020 75 6E 64 OO000030 63 4D 44 E Ga Resources Joon Content Type multipart mixed boundary PanasonicMDC seen Content Length 16828 oon Content Encoding none qnggggd4o 65 6E 67 ioon Content Location oo000050 6E 74 65 TA startup brl Ooooogdgeo 6E F
205. d by selecting Edit and displaying the Directory Properties dialog box Directory Properties x M Include in arouse M Include in Synchronisation Name in Carousel enake Source Directory Ce Carousel Generator Test Specifications nak E Member of Collection Colection Hew weighting 1 00 Edit Holds Service Gateway Yes Compression U No Compression Cancel Include in Carousel If this box is checked the directory object will be in cluded in the generated carousel If not checked the di rectory object will not be included in the generated carousel Include in Synchronization If this box is checked the source directory will be in cluded in the Synchronization process which aims to match the source directory structure with the carousel structure removing and adding file and directory objects as necessary If this box is cleared this directory will not be compared to the source directory and neither will any subdirecto ries regardless of their individual settings Name in Carousel This is the name of the object as it will appear in the BIOP message in the output stream Range 254 characters maximum specified by the DSMCC specification Additional characters will be truncated ASCII character set excluding lt gt 7 60 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Source Directory This field is set when the directory is added to the
206. d their functions Menus in the Play Screen This subsection describes the menus in the Play screen File Menu The File menu in the Play screen contains commands for selecting a stream file and for loading and saving a preset file Table 10 7 describes the commands in the File menu Table 10 7 File menu commands Play screen Command Open Load Preset Description Opens a stream file stored in the E drive volume E When a file is selected the MPEG Player checks the packet size of the file When it is a transport stream file its data is output in packets Therefore if an incomplete packet is included at the start or end point of the file the portion is not output The function uses a standard Windows Open dialog box Loads the specified preset file set When a preset file is loaded the current instrument settings are changed by the file s content Refer to Preset File page 10 49 for more information about the preset file Save Preset Saves the current instrument settings as a preset file Refer to Preset File page 10 49 for more information about the preset file RECORD Exit MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Switches to the Record screen Quits the MPEG Player application The MPEG Player application settings are saved 10 19 MPEG Player Menus and Controls View Menu Play Menu 10 20 The View menu contains commands that control the display of the Toolbar a
207. dale ge Bice oe tes B28 Gh GS 45 l 03 00 OO 03 99 EO 1a Al Once selected the block of bytes can be edited with the available options from the Edit and the Pop Up menus Clicking the mouse or pressing a cursor key clears the selection MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 17 Transport Stream Editor Hex Editor Editing Commands 9 18 To select a block using the cursor Keys position the cursor on the first byte and then hold down the Shift key and move the cursor with the cursor keys The selection is drawn between the initial and current cursor positions Release the Shift key when the cursor has reached the last byte Clicking the mouse or pressing a cursor key clears the selection The Edit menu pop up menu and toolbar buttons provide a variety of options for editing the packet contents The Pop Up menu is opened by clicking the right mouse button when the pointer is over the Hex Editor for example dPacket 18398 PID 2389 Tektronix 01 21 34 M m m Be Be Ol Gn cs 6 DO BE OC la 05 41 EC 11 FF 12 B4 69 18 C2 S348 Undo la 2E Al B4 42 04 SE BO 20 EO 3E 88 1 67 FF B2 Bi 68 OS 36 2D 2D 38 iD AA 1B 44 33 OF 41 98 7A ED 16 C2 to 1 41 C3 AY OF AG B2 20 07 24 87 10 P 7 62 F 13 3E 83 AF E2 56 94 B oc Copy Packet A 42 2C 2B 89 52 AB 71 00 84 C2 Paste Ctrl 7 BA G4 49 78 29 C5 71 41 BD 21 BC o 96 34 68 10 CS Bl 69 69 El 9A AB Select Packet 5 68 DO A9 DF 04 32 EA 14 4A ED
208. dialog box The dialog box displays a list of the table types that are not already present in the stream Select EJ TS_descniption Cancel 2 Highlight the required table type and then select the OK button Pressing Cancel will abandon the operation without adding a new table Only the table types that are not currently specified for the stream are listed If the required table type is not listed press the Cancel button to close the dialog box without affecting the specification for the stream The Select PID amp Table ID dialog box is displayed only if a PID and or Table ID need to be identified Otherwise the selected Table type is automatically created Select Pid amp Table ID x Cancel TABLE ID 112 Generate subtable Add multiple sections One section per segment TABLE ID EesTENSION VERSION FIRST SECTION L ST SECTION MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Copying a PSI SI Table Deleting a PSI SI Table Exporting a Table Importing a Table A single section is automatically added to the newly created table type Navigator tek_sym1_btest mp SE PSI S1 Tables H BAT e ElT_actual_pi MIT_actual H PAT e PMT Programs Tables Methods available m Drag and drop copy only from the Examine TS window Tables view to the Navigator Tables view m Drag and drop copy
209. ds Command Communication Description Sets the port number that is needed to remotely control the MPEG Player over an Ethernet network and the terminator that is used to communicate with a controller When you select this command the Communication dialog box appears Refer to Communications Dialog Box on page 10 35 for more information About Displays general system information including the software and hardware versions When you select this command the About dialog box appears Refer to About Dialog Box on page 10 36 for more information MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Menus and Controls Communication Dialog Box When you select the Communication command from the Utility menu the Communication dialog box is displayed Communication Port Humber Terminator Tx CALF Aix Cancel Port Number Sets the port number needed to remotely control the MPEG Player over an Ethernet network You can set the value from 1024 to 65535 Terminator m Tx Selects the terminator that is used when the MPEG Player sends information to a controller You can select LF linefeed CR carriage return CRLF carriage return and linefeed or LFCR linefeed and carriage return m Rx Selects the terminator that is used when the MPEG Player receives commands from a controller You can select LF linefeed or CR carriage return Select the OK button to enable all setting
210. e O O Aceh A d O o O o o o o o oOo o Asset B 3 3 0 O O O O Asset C 3 3 o 3 lt gt 2 lt o gt gt lt n Transmission Time Stream Time MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 81 Carousel Analyzer Application Support Cycle Time From the start of a boot class through the last asset to the start of the next boot class Service o O 9 Gateway Boot Class O 9 RTA o O O o oO oO o O O Asset B Q Q Q O Q Asset C z lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt Cycle Time Stream Time Best Boot Time From the start of a service gateway through the next boot class to the end of the last asset Service O 9 Q Q Gateway i i i Boot Class D i Asset A o PpP o b o o D O O Asset C p p q p 3 lt p 1 Boot Time Stream Time 6 32 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Application Support Worst Boot Time From the end of a service gateway through the next service gateway through the next boot class to the end of the last asset Service 9 Gateway BootClass i 9 g e Asset A a o O qdq O O Asset B Q Q Q O O Asset C d d 1 a gt Boot Time Stream Time MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 83 Carousel Analyzer Application Support 6 84 Cold Boot Time Whereas the other timing methods assume
211. e MTS400 documen tation 063 3857 xx CD ROM Refer to the Getting Started Manual 071 1505 xx for information about how to set up the MTS400 Series for remote operation of the MPEG Player MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual ee Ae Tracer Getting Started The Tracer application is used by Tektronix software developers for analyzing message logs It can be used in conjunction with the T STD Buffer Analyzer application to view the message log that is produced by the Buffer Analyzer Impeg racer File Edt Print View Show Video i PicturestartCode 11 Type B Video EB occupancy 175415 bytes Frame size 17554 bytes Video FicturestartCode 12 Type F PicturestartCode 13 Type B EB occupancy 17769 bytes Frame size 17646 bytes For Help press F1 1295 Trace records 1 Selected we Important Information about Tracer NOTE Tracer is not a component of the MPEG Test System Product Family and is supplied free of charge for use on an as is basis It is included for use where an in depth analysis of how Buffer Analyzer processes a stream may be helpful Please send any comments on the use and value of Tracer to Tektronix If the facilities in Tracer are found to be of value they may be incorporated into Buffer Analyzer or another application in a later release MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Tracer Getting Started Setting Up Tracer and Buffer Analyzer When the software comp
212. e _ id value of 0xCB Channel Extended Text Table CETT One or more transport packets with a PID value of Ox1FFB and a table _id value of OxC8 Event Extended Text Table EETT One or more transport packets with a PID value of Ox1FFB and a table _id value of OxC9 Program Identifier Table PIT One or more transport packets with a PID value specified by the elementary PID in the PMT and a table _id value of OxDO when a stream_type value is 0x85 System Time Table STT L One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x1FFB and a table _id value of OxCD 10 14 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Getting Started Icon Text and Dialog Box To the right of each icon the MPEG Player displays text that describes each transport stream component In addition for the PCR icon you can display a dialog box to change the parameters for the component Table 10 5 shows the text that will be displayed with each icon Table 10 5 Icon text Component ISDB T Icon S TMCC Icon M TMCC Icon Non TS Icon Transport Stream TS Icon Program Allocation Table PAT Icon Transport Stream Description Table TSDT Icon Network Information Table NIT Icon MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Text xxx rmx Shows the file name Packets Shows the total number of packets in the broadcast transport stream xxx trp Shows the file name TC8PSK xx BPSK xx or QPSK xx Shows the mod
213. e dialog box Mr George 20017 3721 1E0534 00 24 00 Newe 20017372 15 06 28 00 15 00 8 40 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Wizards Program Complete Dialog The Program Complete dialog box provides you with a summary of the created Box Transport Structure Program Complete EJ Press firish to add the new program Transport Stream fee ED Transport Stream Id O Version 0 Section O Pid 0 00 been of Network IO 0 Yersion 0 Section O Pid 16 0x10 Program ED Program 1 Version 0 Section 0 Pid 32 Oe20 AD Transport Stream ID 0 Yersion O Section O Pid 17 017 cr E Event Information et Active PIDs vee wi Pid 555 Type 2 MPEG 2 Video File O StreameE lernentary Str A Pid BBB Type 2 MPEG 2 Video File D AStreams E lementary Str Cancel 19 To confirm and implement the Transport Structure select the Finish button Note that the proposed structure is created in the Navigator views That completes the procedure of adding a program to a transport stream using the Program Wizard MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 41 Views Multiplexer contains a number of views which are displayed in the working area of the user interface All of the views can be manipulated using conventional Windows techniques The Navigator and Error Log views can be docked against the edges of the UI or floated independently of the Multiplexer window The Section view ca
214. e following Select Update Item dialog box appears Use this dialog box to select which parameters in a stream are updated when looped Select Update Item Update ltem Continuity Counter PCR PTS DTS Update Method ERR TOT TOT STT L NPT Reed Solomon ISDB T only L K Cancel Continuity Counter Sets whether to update continuity counter PCR PTS DTS Sets whether to update PCR Program Clock Reference PTS Presentation Time Stamp and DTS Decoding Time Stamp Update Method Specifies the method to update PCR PTS DTS You can select Software or Hardware m Hardware PCR PTS DTS are updated using the counter values of the 27 MHz clock on the output board Since data output and PCRs are completely locked the continuity of PCRs is maintained at the loop point even if playing long stream loops However timing errors occur in PTS DTS Software PCR PTS DTS are updated by adding the actual looping time defined by the start and stop positions to the stream every time it is looped There are no timing errors in PTS DTS however it is difficult to maintain the continuity of PCRs at the loop point because the updating is not synchronized with the 27 MHz clock on the output board Since this method is used to update NPT if you enable the NPT option Software is selected automatically TDT TOT STT Sets whether to update TDT Time amp Data Table TOT Time Offset Table and STT System Time Table
215. e specified by the elementary PID in 4 the PMT anda stream_type value of OxOF or 0x81 ATSC format Pn A lock symbol appears in the icon when the transport _scrambling_control value is 7 set to 01 tah momol Data stream 10110 One or more transport packets with a PID value specified by the elementary PID in Too the PMT and a stream_type value of other than 0x01 to 0x05 0x08 and OxOF in ATSC format 0x81 A lock symbol appears in the icon when the transport_scrambling_control value is set to 07 Private Section One or more transport packets with a PID value specified by the elementary PID in the PMT and a stream_type value of 0x05 A lock symbol appears in the icon when the transport_scrambling_control value is set to 01 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 9 MPEG Player Getting Started Table 10 1 Icons used for MPEG 2 ARIB DVB and ATSC formats Cont Icon Element type 77 Digital Storage Media Command and Control DSM CC Tl One or more transport packets with a PID value specified by the elementary PID in the PMT and a stream_type value of 0x08 Tid A lock symbol appears in the icon when the transport_scrambling_control value is set to 01 One or more transport packets with a PID value specified by the CA_PID of the CA descriptor in the PMT a payload_start_unit_indicator value of 1 and the payload does not start 000001 section or the payload starts 000001 PES 0 Entitle
216. e the other properties tabs without having to close this dialog box An error message is written to the event log when a table cannot be multiplexed in accordance with the timings set Deleting a Section A section can be deleted from a table by highlighting it in the Navigator Tables view and selecting Delete from the right click menu To delete more than one section select and delete each one in turn When the last section is deleted from a table the table is automatically deleted from the structure MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 89 Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views 8 90 Exporting a Section Section data can be exported in the form of a binary file In the Navigator Tables view highlighting a Table node for example PMT Tables allows all sections of the table to be exported Similarly highlighting a single section entry for example Program 123 allows only that section to be exported Highlight the required section or Table node in the Navigator Tables view From the right click menu select Export Section Data Name the file to be created and choose a location Select Save to confirm the action Individual sections can also be exported using the Navigator Programs view Highlight the required section to be exported From the right click menu select Export Section Data Name the file to be created and choose a location Select Save to confirm the action Note that not all tables are shown in the
217. ect Carousels in a program should have any application IDs set Because only a single data_broadcast_descriptor is allowed per service the component_tag value of the descriptor is set to zero the descriptor does not identify any particular stream as carrying a carousel The data_broadcast_id for the descriptor is set to 262 0x106 and the selec tor_bytes format is as follows CG Value Comment user The first application id defined in a DTT carousel contained in the service Not used m n application _specific_data_byte n a Not used 7 94 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream Table 7 25 DTT object carousel Cont DTT selector_bytes Syntax CG Value Comment I UK DTG D Book section Event Information Table The Carousel Generator only supports the creation of EIT present following EIT information for the actual transport stream The presence of EIT p f sections for a particular service is user controllable but where transmitted information will only be included for the present now event The following next event section will always be empty If an EIT p f is present for a particular service the relevant EIT present following flag in the SDT will be set Table 7 26 Event Information Table EIT Table Syntax CG Value Comment service description section table _id 0x4E EIT actual present following CG does not generate any ot
218. ed application to allow it to be viewed If no association has been made with the file type on the host computer a message is displayed Saves the resource file to a selected location The header information is not saved Data Represents the currently selected tree node Right Click Menu Options iz Save As 2 Go To Next Saves the Module Resource data to a selected location Displays the next occurrence of the Resource node in the transport stream Note the change of Packet number in the Status bar View Transport Packet List MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Displays the Transport Packet Contributions view which lists the transport packets that have contributed to the resources in the module See Structure Views page 6 52 6 51 Carousel Analyzer Views Structure Views Structure views display a hierarchical and raw data interpretation of a structure BIOP Message U N Message Module Section or Transport Packet The hierarchical view is based on a script from the script files that are loaded see Script Selection and Manipulation page 6 6 Raw data is presented in hexadecimal and ASCII format in the lower pane bbcla mpg Section table_id 0 0x0 PID 0 0x0 PAT from packet 80477 E PAT bable_id Ox j sechon_syntax_indicator 1 n c j reserved 3 z sechon length 37 transport stream _id 4103 DOODOO0U0D 00 BO 25 10 07 EY OO OO OO OO EO 10 10 4 FO 4
219. ed via the Program entry allows descriptors to be added to the elementary stream information loop in the PMT 7 78 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Output Stream Generation To start generating the output stream select Player gt Start Playout The parameters used are part of the Stream Generation properties page 7 40 Errors occurring during stream generation are reported in the TS Generation tab of the Log view Carousel Definition File The current state of the carousel generator session can be saved to disk at any time during the creation process using the File gt Save Carousel Session or File gt Save Carousel Session As options This can then be reloaded at any time using the File gt Open Carousel Session option The format of the saved file is standard XML and can be viewed in any XML compatible viewer for example Internet Explorer 5 and up editing the XML file is not recommended Errors in the syntax of the XML file will be reported in the Definition File Syntax tab of the Log view errors are summarized on the Summary tab of the Log view MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 79 ee ee PSI and Sl in the Carousel Generator Output Stream PSI SI Mode Settings The Carousel Generator creates various PSI and SI tables while generating its output stream The exact contents of the PSI and SI depends on many user settings this section describes most
220. efaults in the various dialogs are retained the resulting stream will conform to the DVB standard 1 When you open the Program Wizard either as a continuation of creating a new stream or by attempting to add a new program a dialog box similar to that shown below is displayed Add 4 Program l x Transport Stream PAT c ecion Settings for Program D TOT Section Program number i ED TOT Section wE MIT Section Version number fo Frogram EB FMT Section Program map PID 32 PMT ca Cancel MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 33 Multiplexer Wizards Service Description Dialog 8 34 Box Add Service Description x The values placed automatically in the three displayed fields will be the next in the sequence of programs In the example screenshot the stream contains no prior programs hence this is program number 1 PID 32 is used because that is the first free PID after the reserved PSI SI PIDs PMT Timing see Editing PSI SI Table Properties page 8 85 2 Select Next to move to the Add Service Description dialog box The Service Description dialog box allows you to identify the Service and Provider to be associated with a program Transport Stream l ER i E PAT Seci Add Service Description M EH TOT Section Use Single Section MP TOT Section Service Provider Name wE MIT Section Tektronix Systems Program Service Name Service Type 1 digital te
221. egment TABLE ID EXTENSION VERSION 2 FIRST SECTION LAST SECTION 255 Up to 256 sections can be added Additions to existing subtables using the same Table Id Extensions and Versions will be rejected m When multiple EIT Schedule sections are being added the One section per segment checkbox is enabled When it is checked only the first section in each segment will be created rather than all sections numbered between First section and Last section When dragging and dropping a section the Multiplexer will resolve any numbering conflicts by creating new versions of duplicated tables 8 84 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Editing PSI SI Table Table and Section Properties are edited by selecting and highlighting one of the Properties versions section within the transport structure and selecting the Properties option from the right click menu Navigator tek syml_ test mpg Y PS SI Tables me BAT G EIT_actual_pi NIT actual H PAT m PMT SDT_actual ER Transport Stream ID 1 Wersion 0 Section CIP mE TOT dd H E TOT Hadit Delete Lut Copy Paste Esport Section Data Import Section Data Properties Programs T ables This opens a dialog box with four tabs one for each property Depending on the type of table properties can be applied to a specific version or section of the table Multiplexer only all
222. el PID BS PID Assoc tag 100 on PID 100 0x64 MHP Include in Output Stream Jw Minimum number of repetitions in output 1 Cancel Carousel ID Unique carousel identity The Carousel ID is normal ly generated automatically but can be changed by the user Range 0 to 4294967295 Maximum module size The maximum size of the modules used to carry the carousel objects During output stream generation if a module has one or more objects and does not have enough space for the next object a new module will be created If a module is empty and the object added will exceed the maximum size the object is still add ed but no more objects will be placed in that mod ule Range 0 to 4294967295 Default 65536 Carousel PID DSI PID Select the required Association Tag from the drop down list During carousel creation a default Association is generated to carry the Carousel DSI PID This cannot be removed Include in Output This flag allows the carousel to be included in or ex cluded from the output stream If the checkbox is disabled no reference to this carousel or its contents will appear in the generated output stream MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 43 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Minimum number Enter the minimum number of times that the carousel is to appear in the output stream this can be repeated for each carousel in the session The resulting outpu
223. elementary streams to be included in the new multiplex You must specify the PID Stream Type of the new stream a Component Tag can also be allocated If the Component Tag is enabled it can be referenced by other tables for example the Event Information Table The dialog box comprises three tabbed pages that specify the source of the stream its timing within the multiplex and whether it should be carrying a PCR PID 6 Allocate a PID Number in which the elementary stream is to be carried Pid Number ngg Select a Stream Type from the drop down list iC 1 MPEG 1 video 0 Reserved ae 2 MPE G 2 Video 43 MPEG 1 Audio 4 MPEG 2 Audio 7 This will be the Stream Type allocated to the stream in the new multiplex 7 Enable the Component Tag checkbox if required Enter a Component Tag number 0 255 in the enabled field 8 36 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Wizards Source Tab The Source tab of the Add Program dialog box is used to select and specify elementary streams to be included in the new multiplex File name CASteamsttsa_testl mpg Browse Stream type MFEG 2 video Birate kbs Original TS PID o ae DTE ee poo Steam id 0 Stat each section in a new packet F 8 Enter an elementary stream File Name You can enter it directly or use the Browse button to open a standard Windows file selection dialog box 9 Select the Stream Type of the selected stre
224. en command in the File menu This button is available when the Play screen is displayed SAVE TS file Opens the Save as dialog box Equivalent to the Save command in the File menu This button is available when the Record screen is displayed Load Preset Opens the Open dialog box Equivalent to the Load Preset command in the File menu Save Preset Opens the Save as dialog box Equivalent to the Save Preset command in the File menu Play Outputs the selected stream Equivalent to the PLAY button on the front panel FO amp MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Menus and Controls Table 10 15 Toolbar button descriptions Cont Records the acquired stream Equivalent to the RECORD button on the front panel Stops the stream output or stream record Equivalent to the STOP button on the front panel Opens the Clock dialog box Equivalent to the Clock command in the Play menu This button is available when the Play screen is displayed Record E Stop Clock rs Target MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Opens the Target dialog box Equivalent to the Target command in the Record menu This button is available when the Record screen is displayed 10 43 a Reference This section contains information about the following MPEG Player features Outputting streams m Adding jitter to PCRs Using Preset files m Using the Continuous Recording Fea
225. ending on the type selected some of the subsequent wizard screens will vary in content The content is dictated by the carousel type selected 3 Select Next to display Step 2 Carousel Properties MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 11 Carousel Generator Carousel Wizard Step 2 Carousel Properties Carousel Wizard 2 Carousel Properties In Step 2 the Carousel Properties are selected Defaults are supplied but all properties can be edited Properties can also be edited after the carousel has been created from the main window 4 Make any required adjustments to the Carousel properties 5 Select how many times the carousel should appear in the output stream NOTE When using the wizard only a single carousel is being assembled However more than one carousel may be created within a session The number of repetitions can be specified for each carousel The length of the transport stream will be dictated by the carousel that requires the longest time by virtue of its size or the number of requested repetitions Carousels in the same session requiring less time to fulfill their size repetition criteria will be repeated 6 Select Next to display Step 3 Carousel Contents 7 12 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Wizard Step 3 Carousel Contents Carousel Wizard 3 Carousel Contents HHP Object Carousel ID 1 PID 100 00064 Prog 1 PHT PID 1100 0 Fa Carou
226. ently analyzed files If the program has 2 lt filename gt recently been installed the list may be empty or hold less than 4 3 lt filename gt files 4 lt filename gt Selecting a filename opens that file for analysis Exit Exits the program The user is given the opportunity to save any changed script files MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 14 7 Script Pad Menus and Controls Edit Menu Options Table 14 4 lists the Edit menu options Table 14 4 Edit menu options Option Function Cut Delete the currently highlighted text and move it to the clipboard Copy Copy the currently highlighted text to the clipboard Paste Paste the contents of the clipboard to the current cursor location Find Finds and highlights the text string entered in the Find dialog Replace Finds and replaces the text string entered in the Replace dialog Go To Places the cursor at the specified line number View Menu Options Table 14 5 lists the View menu options Table 14 5 View menu options Option Function Toolbar Shows or hides the Toolbar Status Bar Shows or hides the Status Bar Auto Syntax Highlights When enabled automatically color codes keywords in the active file as they are typed during editing Refresh Syntax Colors Refreshes color coding of keywords in the active file Window Menu Options Table 14 6 lists the Window menu options Table 14 6 Window menu options Option Function New Window Opens a new e
227. erpreted mode can be edited Modify Time X start_time Time Hour ii Minute g Second g Ened Liste Dap e Honth a Wear 2003 A aw Y alue oxcescn HOO T Set to all ones for NVOD reference services Edit the numbers in any of the fields as required All fields are updated as each digit is added changed or deleted Select OK to commit the changes or Cancel to abandon editing and keep the original time The Set to all ones checkbox when enabled sets the 40 bit date field to OxFFFFFFFFF This may be required when setting the start_date for an event in a Near Video on Demand NVOD reference service MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 107 Multiplexer Editing in Section View 8 108 Compressed String The Modify dialog box displays the name of the field which is always a compressed string and the contents of the selected string segment Text can be entered deleted selected copied to and pasted from the windows clipboard Modify Ed compressed string Suitable for All Ages Cancel Edit the text and select OK to continue Select Cancel to abandon the edits and leave the original segment unchanged Multiplexer will check that the new string length will not make the total section length exceed the maximum specified by the standards If it does an error message will be displayed Multiplexer x AN The text exceeds the space available Select OK to return to the
228. erse order Bitrate Progam Dessintion Pid Birate Mevs 1 MPEG 2 Audio 120 0 094025 l MPEG 2 Audio 130 0 407350 2 MPEG 2 Audio 230 0 094015 l 2 MPEG 2 Audio 220 0 156667 l MPEGS AMEE Pragrm Desoipton Pid Birate Mb Birate Null 0191 270650 O 1 MPEG 2 Video 110 2029528 Oo 2 MPEG 2 Video 210 4007894 3 MPEG 2 Video 210 3 034838 4 MPEG 2 Video 410 10 066074 5 MPEG 2 video 510 15 168662 c Similarly the columns can be grouped in Program order by clicking the Program header MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 73 Multiplexer Views Common Menu Options 8 74 The specifications for components of the various views can be manipulated by options from the Edit menu View Menu and Toolbar There is also a right click menu that provides the Add Modify Delete Import Export and Properties options Place the mouse pointer over the component to change and click the right mouse button to open the menu A typical right click menu is shown here Add Modify Delete Properties The menu options are context sensitive and will be enabled or disabled according to the current selection in the view The following options are available from the various right click menus Add Adds a component to the currently selected item Modify Opens the properties dialog box Delete Deletes the currently selected component Properties Opens a properties dialog box for editing the current
229. es of these tables can be accessed through nodes in the Programs tab Network Information Table The Carousel Generator only generates NIT actual sections and the contents of NIT the NIT can be accessed by editing the properties of the Network node and its children Table 7 20 Network information table Table Syntax CG Value Comment network information section table _id 0x40 section syntax_indicator NIT actual CG does not generate NIT other sections reserved future use reserved section length network _id reserved version number current_next_indicator section number last_section number reserved future use network descriptors length for i 0 i lt N i descriptor reserved future use transport stream loop length for i 0 i lt N i transport stream _id 0x3 user Network node gt Properties gt Network ID field O oOo X CG does not support table versioning xF oO A network _name descriptor will always be added with the name auto user Specified in the Network Properties gt Name field The user can add custom descriptors to this loop by editing the descriptor list in the Network Properties dialog box xF oO CG will always add at least one transport stream to this loop the actual transport stream but the user can add additional transport streams by right clicking on the network node user Transport Stream node gt Properties gt Tra
230. es the maximum num ber of packets up to the end of the stream from the Start packet point that may be included in the loop Make remaining programs seamless If enabled the remaining programs are made seamless but are constrained by limits defined by the priority pro gram This may lead to these remaining programs hav ing a gap at the beginning and end of the file Make PSI SI PSIP seamless The service information contained in the transport stream is processed to make it seamless If this checkbox is not enabled the SI is not processed but simply copied to the output transport stream 12 8 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Make Seamless Wizard Tektronix MakeSeamless Wizard Multiplex Input Select next to multiples this program The progress Bar will show the 72 of the tile which is complete Hit Abort at any time te cancel the operation Output File l p Progress amp nhormation 12 53 22 Calculating transport rate A 145922 Transpor rate is 38 014902 Mbits s A 125322 Priority PID is 160 CA 125922 Searching for priority PID loop shart a a 1259 25 Search for pronty PID loop start complete 12 53 25 Searching for other FID s loop start points Digital viden Broadcasting d EERRERREEEE Tektronix r6 Tes 2 Back Herps Select Next Once again the progress bar will indicate progress While the stream is being analyzed selecting the Abort button will stop the
231. escription Save the graph to a user defined location Size the graph window before saving Size the graph window before saving Tab delimited format Copy to clipboard from where it can be pasted into a suitable application Copy image Tab delimited format MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views PID View Menu Bar View gt PIDs Toolbar This static view displays all the active PIDs within the transport stream A PID carrying sections will have nested items which detail the table types on that PID The structure bit rate and repetition of transport packets and sections are available from this view OC_abcd mpg PIDs 4 Active PIDs Fey PID O 0x0 J bo section table_id D 0x0 PAT Hy PID 16 0210 H E PID 17 0211 ey PID 100 0x64 jy PID 150 0496 wef PID 8191 0x1 fff The following diagram indicates the nodes accessible from the PIDs view a OC_abed_mpg PIDs Ely Active PIDs i a ly PID 0 0x0 Active PIDs node g Section table_id 0 0x0 PAT Wy PID 16 0x10 Py PID 17 0x11 5 PID 100 0x64 a ies PID 8191 0x1 fff Table node MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 61 Carousel Analyzer Views ES Active PIDs node This node represents all the PIDs found in the current transport stream the PIDs are listed as child items Right Click Menu Options View Transport Packet Displays a structure view of the p
232. essed Files that need to be transmitted with similar properties or which are logically related can be grouped into a module As the DSMCC module is a limited size the process of adding an object to a module would require calculating whether the object would fit into the module s available space possibly after compression and if no space is available generating a new module and feeding this back to the user This would slow this aspect of the user interface down appreciably Consequently the concept of a collection is used to replace the size limited DSMCC module with a module of unlimited size Any number of objects can be added to a collection during stream generation this may translate to many modules with the same properties 7 4 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Getting Started Programs View In the Program view the root is the Carousel Session as in the other views Immediately below this are nodes giving access to the supported mandatory SI PSI tables and a listing of PCR PIDs There is also an Elementary Streams node which lists all of the imported elementary streams included in the stream and the Program nodes which show the allocation of carousels and elementary Streams to programs a Carousel Session 2 Programs 2 Carousels GG Clock Reference 1 PCR onp PID a PCR FID 8190 01 FFE DE SI BB Time Date Table a ED Melck ID 0 0x07 PE Transport Stream Met
233. est Systems User Manual If this box is checked the file object will be included in the generated carousel If not checked the file object will not be included in the generated carousel This is the name of the object as it will appear in the BIOP message in the output stream Range 254 characters maximum specified by the DSMCC specification Additional characters will be truncated ASCII character set excluding lt gt This field is set when the object is added to the carousel and can be edited to point to another object if required This field does not appear in the output stream and is limited to 260 characters This is a list of all the collections currently included in this carousel Selecting a different collection effectively put this object into a different module possibly with dif ferent cycle times and compression characteristics In the case of a directory object all child objects below it are also moved to the selected collection New Create a new collection see page 7 66 Displays a summary of the properties of the collection that the object is a member of The properties can be edited by using the Edit button to open the collection Properties dialog box see page 7 68 7 59 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Directory Properties When a directory is highlighted the properties of that directory are summarized in the Properties window The properties can be viewed in detail and edite
234. est Systems User Manual Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Select the required PID and Table ID where enabled and press OK Select Pid amp Table ID x pa Cancel TABLE ID 112 I Generate subbable Add multiple sections Une section per segment TABLE ID Es TENSION FIRST SECTION LAST SECTION a VERSION E O00 r m Pressing Cancel will abandon the Add operation without adding a new section The version section of a table is created with a new version or section number The rules used by Multiplexer for numbering are m For tables that the selected standard dictates should always have a section number of 0 the version number is increased by one The new version number is based on the version currently in the table with the most recent number The version_number is a 5 bit field so if the new version would be 32 it is reset back to Q m version_numberNEW version_numberRECENT 1 modulo 32 m For any table type that allows a section_syntax_indicator the Add multiple sections checkbox in the Generate subtable part of the dialog box is enabled Additionally the One section per segment checkbox will only be enabled for the EIT schedule table type MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 83 Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Select Pid amp Table ID x Cancel TABLE ID 50 Generate subbable M Add multiple sections One section per s
235. et in nano seconds Place a minus sign in front of the value for a negative offset Interval Specifies the time taken from the start of the file of the first PCR to which the offset is to be applied MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 39 Transport Stream Editor PCR Recalculation Sine Wave An offset that varies according to a sine function is applied to the ideal PCR value for each PCR Select Jitter Parameters Tou have selected to add the following Jitter function dither Function SineWave Please specify the parameters applicable to this Jitter function Mas Amplitude ns fi O Digital video fio i Broadcasting jel ok Max Amplitude Specifies the amplitude of the sine wave in nanoseconds Period Specifies the period of the sine wave in milliseconds Square Wave An offset which varies according to a square wave function is applied to the ideal PCR value for each PCR The square wave has an equal mark space ratio Select Jitter Parameters Tou have selected to add the following dither Function dither Function Square wave Please specity the parameters applicable to this Jitter function Max Amplitude ns fi Digital videa Period ms f o Broadcasting VE EEE Ss Max Amplitude Specifies the amplitude of the square wave in nanosec onds Period Specifies the period of the square wave in milliseconds 9 40 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Transport Stream Edit
236. etting Started Starting the Program The program can be started by selecting the Carousel Analyzer option from the Start gt Programs gt Tektronix Data Applications V2 0 menu or by double clicking on the Carousel Analyzer shortcut on the desktop Fa Tektronix Carousel Analyser Tektronix Home Page Lg Tektronix Utilities t f Carousel Analyser TE user Guide Carousel 4 Help Analyser Release Notes B3 Script Pad Initial Appearance When the program has started and is ready for use it will open the Main window as shown in Figure 6 1 Jaina Canes Aare Workspace Transport packet bar gt r AO ce lt a r Status bar ____ Ready ARIB di DTV standard Figure 6 1 Main Window Intial Appearance 6 4 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Getting Started Elements of the main window can be hidden during a session but will be restored at start up The Menu Bar contains all options available to the application disabled options are visible but grayed out The Toolbars provide shortcuts to the more important menu options similarly disabled buttons are visible but grayed out The Transport Packet Bar provides controls to locate and jump to transport packets The Status Bar shows stream information and the cursor message field Initial Menu Options The Carousel Analyzer presents different menus and options depending upon whether or not a stream is
237. g Tracer with Buffer Analyzer Displays the program version number MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual QO O O Make Seamless Wizard ee Make Seamless Wizard Starting the Wizard This wizard guides you through the process of creating an MPEG 2 file for use by Stream Player in continuously looped operation The wizard is largely self explanatory The notes in this section of the manual provide a slightly more detailed explanation of the wizard and the necessary user responses To start the wizard select the Make Seamless option from the Start menu Alternatively double click on the Make Seamless shortcut on the desktop The opening window is displayed Tektronix MakeSeamless Wizard Make Seamless Wizard Copyright Tektronix Inc 2007 Version 1 5 3 0 This wizard will guide wou through the process of updating an MPEG file for use by Shear Player in continuously looped operation When combined with Continuous Time Stamping minimal picture disturbances will be observed at the loop point Please refer to the User Guide tor more details Digital Video Broadcasting Skip this page on startup Tektronix FEG Test Pa System Cancel This first page gives a short explanation of the wizard s activities and offers the opportunity to skip the page in the future Select Next to move to the next screen and specify the input file MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 12 1 Make Seamless
238. g a Selection to the Clipboard A selection table type section or PID can be copied to the windows clipboard From the clipboard it can be pasted to a different file or back into the current file Highlight the required selection in the Navigator Tables or PIDs view and then select the Copy option from the Edit menu or use the Ctrl C keyboard shortcut Pasting a selection from the clipboard More than one instance of Multiplexer can run concurrently on a machine A selection table type section or PID may be pasted from the clipboard into any open transport stream file The contents of the clipboard are not affected by the paste operation so the section can be pasted to many files and more than once to the same file Activate the Navigator Tables or PIDs view of the required transport stream file that is in an instance of Multiplexer Then select the Paste option from the Edit menu or use the Ctrl V keyboard shortcut The section version is always appended to the end of the list under the appropri ate table Program version numbers are automatically created If the table is not present in the multiplex configuration it will be created automatically 8 24 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Menus and Controls Dragging and Dropping A concept familiar to windows users is drag and drop in which files can be highlighted by clicking on them with the mouse and then dragged and dropped to a new loca
239. gain thanks BaCk Cancel Help It may be disabled for future recalculations by selecting the check box option at the bottom of the introductory text Selecting the Next button moves on to the Select Program page The wizard has to analyze the file to extract the relevant Program Information which may take a while When analysis is complete the Select Program page shows a list of the programs whose PCR values may be changed see following illustration 9 34 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Transport Stream Editor PCR Recalculation Select Program You may change the PCF rate for all programs in the stream by ticking the bos below N All programe D Alternately select the single program whose PCA rate you wish to edit from the list below Digital widen Broadcasting Hest gt Cancel Help To recalculate the PCR rate for all the programs check the All programs option Otherwise select one of the programs from the list Then select Next to move on to the Select New Rate page The Back button moves back to the Introductory Page Select New Rate Rate Calculation Program Number 2 Current Playout Mbits s 38 01 z Digital widen Broadcasting Back Cancel Help MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 35 Transport Stream Editor PCR Recalculation 9 36 Keeping the rate as New Playout Current Playout and selecting Jitter Function of lt none gt
240. ge DII poeg vo Block number 0 moduleld 65516 Caffe wa Module Id 65517 Oxffed PID 150 0 56 aa Module Id 65515 Oxffee PID 150 056 OO AORE alg Module Id 65519 Orffef PID 150 036 ngge E i Modules f Module 1d 65516 O0xffec PID 150 096 ho ff Block number 0 moduleld 65516 Oxtfec PI Download Block FF fy Module Id 65517 Oxifed PID 150 096 node iy Module ld 65518 Oxffee PID 150 0496 am Module Id 65573 Oxthet FID 150 0536 gt l U N Message DSI node This node represents a Download Server Initiate message Right Click Menu Options View U N Message Displays a structure view of the next appearance of this DSI message that can be formed from the current stream position onwards as indicated by the Transport Packet number displayed in the Transport Packet Bar View Carrier Section Displays a structure view of the next appearance of the section that carries this DSI message View Cycle Time gt Allows either cycle time statistics or graphical view of the object to be selected View Repetition Activates or creates a repetition view of the DSI mes sage View Bitrate Activates or creates a bit rate view of the DSI message 6 42 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views U N Message DII node This node represents a Download Information Indication message A DII message may reference modules If the module reference can be resolved the DII tree node will contain chi
241. guageCode eng WI CRC 22 0fed d d Expanding each of the strings reveals the number of segments number _seg ments that make up each string and a segments container Similarly expanding the segments container reveals segments 8 52 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Views gig CERI 1b 0x0 EI text extended message First segment of text in the first string s loop m A number stings z El stings El i oe B39 Languagelode eng 2 IS0_ 639 LanguageCode eng vee r number segments 3 segments p E segment First segment of test in the frst stings loop mo compression type 0 Mo compression H1 mode 0 A5CI ISO Latin 1 Romar _ A number_bytes 49 o at compressed _ sting First segment of text in the first string s loop E F segment Second segment of text in the first string s loop G4 segment Last segment of test in the first string s loop ce 150_ 639 LanguageCode eng S0_639 LanguageCode eng A Humber segments 1 aei segments segment First segment of text in the second string s loop 41 CRC 32 0sffed dd The contents of each segment loop define what compression and character set are used followed by the actual text The text is held in the compressed string field MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 53 Multiplexer Views Expert and Standard The Multiplexer has two modes of operation for conformance checking when Modes ed
242. h to a user defined location gt Bitmap Size the graph window before saving gt JPEG Size the graph window before saving gt Table Tab delimited format Graph gt Copy Copy to clipboard from where it can be pasted into a suitable application gt Image gt Table Tab delimited format 6 57 Carousel Analyzer Views Repetition View 6 58 Inspecting Repetition Rates Menu Bar View gt Repetition Toolbar This structure view charts the repetition of a set of data broadcast entities This Gantt style graph displays a row for each transport entity for example BIOP message U N message etc selected A colored block on the row indicates the presence of the message at that point in the transport stream NOTE In calculating repetition rates Carousel Analyzer returns to the stream file For large files the calculation may take an appreciable amount of time It is possible to zoom in on an area of the graph in order to inspect the repetition rate in detail To zoom in on the central 50 of the displayed graph use the View gt Zoom gt Zoom In menu option or the Toolbar button This action can be repeated To zoom in on any area of the repetition rate graph drag the mouse while holding the left button to highlight the area required When the mouse button is released the highlighted area will be enlarged to fill the graph area W OC_abcd mpg Repetitions TO F F F in in On On hn ns
243. he power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Observe All Terminal Ratings To avoid fire or shock hazard observe all ratings and markings on the product Consult the product manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product Power Disconnect The power cord disconnects the product from the power source Do not block the power cord it must remain accessible to the user at all times Do Not Operate Without Covers Do not operate this product with covers or panels removed Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel Avoid Exposed Circuitry Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Use Proper Fuse Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product Do Not Operate in Wet Damp Conditions Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry Provide Proper Ventilation Refer to the manual s installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual xi General Safety Summary xii Terms in this Manual Symbols and Terms on the Product These terms may appear in this manual WARNING War
244. he transport stream instead it refers to the original MPEG file by the full path name Deleting or moving the MPEG file will result in a dialog box prompting for the new location of the file Double clicking on a muxml or mux file in Windows Explorer will open the file in a new instance of Multiplexer MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Getting Started Importing a File Importing opens a multiplex configuration file and the MPEG file on which it is based To open a previously exported multiplex configuration file select the Import option from the File menu If the required file is in the list of recent files it can be opened from the list to save using the Import file dialog box Tektrons Multiplexer File View Options Window Help Hew Chrl H Oper Ctrl 0 Examine 5 Ctrl T Hose Epot etre Espai Ae Alternatively use the Ctrl I keyboard shortcut or drag the file from Windows Explorer and drop it into the Multiplexer window NOTE Multiplexer reads the name and location of the MPEG file from the multiplex configuration file and then opens it automatically The previously stored changes in the configuration file are applied to the display Note that the import dialog box offers a choice of file types muxml mux and File name Oper Files of type Multiplexer Files muni Cance Kultindexer Files musmii Multipleser Files rau All Files
245. her form of EIT section _syntax_indicator reserved future use reserved 0x3 section length service _id reserved 0x3 x lt version number CG does not support table versioning current_next_indicator section number section 0 is present event 1 is following event last_section number transport_stream_ id user Matches the transport_stream_id of the actual transport stream original_network_id user Matches the original_network_id of the actual transport stream segment last section number p f table is not segmented last_table_id Ox4E Only table id 0x4E is used for i 0 i lt N i The present event section section 0 will always contain a single event while the following event section section 1 will not contain any events The following fields are therefore only used in section 0 of the EIT event_id Event ID is always set to zero MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 95 Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream Table 7 26 Event Information Table EIT Cont Table Syntax CG Value Comment start_time user The start time will match the start time of the TDT duration 99 59 59 running status gt L Bas Always set to 4 Running free CA_mode Always set to 0 No scrambling descriptors loop length CG always adds a single descriptor for i 0 i lt N i descriptor to the event descriptors loop the short_event_descriptor CRC 32 I ETSI EN 300 468 section
246. hical Display Menus and Controls Menus in the Play Screen Menus in the Record Screen Toolbar Buttons Reference Interface Card SPI ASI 310M Option 0 eee ccc Using Preset Files Using the Continuous Recording Feature 0 cece ees Performing Continuous Recording Remote Commands Getting Started Important Information about Tracer cece cee eens Setting Up Tracer and Buffer Analy Zer 3 2 sca ose cite ds ayedineaeeeeadone Starting Tracer 24 6 iae ddaod avec User Interface Menus and Controls File Menu Options Edit Menu Options Print Menu Options View Menu Options Show Menu Options Help Menu Options Make Seamless Wizard Starting the Wizard Selecting an Input File Selecta Program to Make Seamless 224 2iiceiceciiueetaasimede a EA Selecting a Multiplex Output File 9 21 9 21 9 23 9 26 9 29 9 33 9 38 11 1 11 1 11 2 11 4 11 4 11 11 11 11 11 12 11 13 11 14 11 15 11 16 12 1 12 1 12 2 12 7 12 10 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Table of Contents Volume 2 Transport Stream Cutter Transport Stream Cutter ccc cece cece cece cece ce eeennes 13 1 Starina SING WIZ eerren eek de nie einer gent Bae ew oon hed eae Be 13 1 UUM ANC i soo Scere vara Seis eee pean vere ose eae eed eee 13 2 Script Pad Getting Started s 45 Lacie wees cog hin eee eee ang be eee eee 14 1 SELE UP ic
247. hich are in the input transport stream To open a file holding a transport stream select the Open option from the File menu If the required file is in the list of recent files it can be opened from the list to save using the open file dialog box MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 9 Multiplexer Getting Started Multiplex Configuration Files Tektronik Multiplexer File View Options Window Help _ Hew Chrl h Examine 5 Chrl T l I Gee Alternatively use the CtrltO keyboard shortcut or drag the file from Windows Explorer and drop it into the Multiplexer window There is also a shortcut button available on the Toolbar for opening a file Any file holding a recorded or synthesized sample of a stream which is conformant to the relevant standards can be opened Many non conformant streams can be opened provided that the PAT PMT and MGT tables correctly specify all the other tables and their PIDs Multiplexer is used for generating both conformant and non conformant streams Having generated a non conformant stream it may not be possible to successful ly open it again in Multiplexer The specification for a new transport stream may be saved to a multiplex configuration file This also saves time for opening large MPEG files since the specification contains the results of the analysis from opening the original MPEG file NOTE The multiplex configuration file does not contain a copy of t
248. highlighted node a Carousel Session 1 Program 1 Carousel MHP Object Carousel ID 1 PID 100 0 0064 Fo Carousel Contents 0 items 0 bytes Moving an Object Files and directories are moved within a carousel using standard Windows commands and techniques such as Copy Cut and Paste and Drag and Drop Removing an Object Files and directories are removed from a carousel using standard Windows commands and techniques File Properties When a file is highlighted the properties of that file are summarized in the Properties window The properties can be viewed in detail and edited by selecting Edit and displaying the File Properties dialog box File Properties x I Include in Carousel Name in Carousel Controller class Source File D Carousel Generator Test Specification snakeide r m Member of Collection Colection New weighting 1 00 Edit Holds Service Gateway Yes Compression 0 No Compression The File Properties dialog boxes for files contained in all types of carousel are similar However for the MHP carousel type if a file is designated as an application Java or HTML there are additional properties these are described in the following sections 7 58 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Include in Carousel Name in Carousel Source File Member of Collection Collection Properties MTS400 Series MPEG T
249. hile the same field in an object carousel is a 16 bit value When comparing these two values the MSB of the 16 bit value should be zero Disabling this option allows it to take other values See reference 4 9 3 paragraph 3 and 6 paragraph 4 7 7 3 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 9 Carousel Analyzer Getting Started Strict CRC Checksum checking Object DSM CC Section section_syntax_indicator and private_indicator fields should be the complement of each other to determine whether a CRC or checksum is in use Disabling this option allows them to be the same and allows the application to work out which method should be applied See reference 2 section 9 2 2 paragraphs 3 and 4 Enabling a Syntax Checking Option To open the Analysis Settings dialog box select Settings from the Analysis menu J Analysis Help Set Interpretation k Select the Options tab The dialog shown below is displayed Analysis Settings MPEG 7 Transport 3 Section DSM CC Section 7 User to N ehwork Downoad U U Object Carousel DE Transport 2 Section Script Options Strict CAC 7 Checksum checking Cliek on an option above fora description User to Nehaork Downoad DYB Data Carousel 2 O O Object Carousel DVB Object Carousel ARIB In the Analysis Settings dialog box the left window shows a tree structure of the test protocols available The right window shows the options currently
250. i Object Carousel ID 3 043 DSI 1D 0 040 PID 150 0 96 E J Service Gateway 3 a E OC_abed_ mpg Bitrates iof x Poe 14 H EY Adoc cpp TQ adoc h gt 12 oO Adocdect cpp 40 ee DY Adocdect h 7 ADOCFILE CPP a 4 m ADRICFILE H Z g m AFAM CPP oO l nA FRM 4 H E d 2 0 W 0C_abcd mpg Repetitions ojx T O N t oO ODO ON FTF OOOH FF Oo NAA TY GY rN TY a a aa a a e a Transport Packet Number 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000 30000 35000 40000 45000 50000 55000 60000 65000 7Oo00 75000 s0000 85000 apog 96000 q q q q q JPO 150 cd 0 aibie 6 36 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views MHP Applications See MHP Support page 6 91 Unresolved Objects When an object is found during analysis but its key is not referred to in the Service Gateway it is displayed under an Unresolved Objects node Ei E maa Services ell Fett Sewe 1 E n DSM CC U N messages on FID 100 064 tag 100 06 4 E sem Private sectione on PIC S00 Ue et Fla Object Carousels Fl Object Carousel ID 1 0x1 DSI IO O 0x0 PIB 100 064 F MAP Applications H a Service Gateway eal Unresokred Objects oe A hlode Id O CORO Fid 100 0e64 Rey 0001 00007 e EY Module d O 0x0 Pid 100 0x64 Rey 00010 0x000 a H Module Id O 00 Fid 100 0464 Key 0008 ox0008 P Module ld 1
251. ick Menu Options View U N Message Displays a structure view of the next appearance of this DDB message that can be formed from the current stream position onwards as indicated by the Transport Packet number displayed in the Transport Packet Bar View Carrier Section Displays a structure view of the next appearance of the section that carries this DDB message View Cycle Time gt Allows either cycle time statistics or graphical view of the object to be selected View Repetition Activates or creates a repetition view of the DDB mes sage View Bitrate Activates or creates a bit rate view of the DDB message MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views Data Carousel DVB View rT Menu Bar View gt Data Carousel Toolbar s This static view shows all the data carousels in the DVB transport stream The view is in the explorer style with a hierarchical view in the left pane and a version view in the right DybD ataGen mpqg Services x a Gervices ER Service 1 fee o 4 Gd KE Aye DSM CC U M messages on PID 100 0464 teen DSM CC O H messages on PID 101 0 65 Elite Data Carousels E pimi Groupe gt B d DI 1d 1 041 PID 101 0465 FS Module Id 0 020 PID 101 0465 ta DI Id 3 083 PID 101 0x65 da DI Id 2 0x2 PID 101 065 dh DI Id O 0x0 PID 100 O64 E i Super Groups dah DS 1d 0 0x0 PID 101 0x65 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 45 Carousel A
252. igator Views Elementary stream data can be added via the Navigator Programs view 1 Inthe Navigator Programs view highlight an Elementary Streams node to which the elementary stream is to be added 2 From the right click menu select Add The Add Program Stream dialog box is displayed Add Program Stream x Stream Type 2 MPEG 2 Video lane fo Source Timing PCR File name C Streams carann bbel apidE61 riipi BEN Stream Woe MPEG 2 video Bitrate jo kbs Original TS PID E Estra DTS offset 0 s Stream_id fo Start each section ima new packer Ie Componenti ag fe io Cancel The dialog box tabs allows the input elementary stream to be selected and specified The main dialog box fields Stream Type and Pid Number dictate the PID that will carry the stream and the stream type entry that will be made in the PMT 3 The functionality of the tabbed dialog boxs is described in the following pages Source See Defining the PID Source page 8 93 Timing See Defining the Stream Timing page 8 95 PCR See Defining the PCR Placement page 8 96 4 Enable the Component Tag checkbox if required Enter a Component Tag number 0 255 in the enabled field If the Component Tag is enabled it can be referenced by other tables for example Event Information Table 8 98 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Exporting Elementary The Export Elementary
253. ighting is a floating point value so virtual ly any ratio can be achieved Range 0 to 10000 A value of 0 signifies the objects will not appear in the stream I The modules can be optionally compressed to de crease module size There are 10 levels of compression ranging from 0 no compression to 9 maximum com pression Compression is applied to the complete collection although compression can be applied via any of the property dialog boxes The collection node icon in the Collections view will indicate that compression is to be applied MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Adding a New Collection To add a new collection right click on the collections node in the Collections Session window and select New Collection The properties of the new collection can be modified as required Removing a Collection To delete a collection highlight the collection node and select Edit gt Delete Collection However note that a collection cannot be deleted while it contains objects or while it contains the Service Gateway These objects must be deleted or moved to another collection Moving Objects between Objects can be dragged and dropped or cut and pasted between collections in the Collections same carousel When dragging and dropping directories pressing the Shift key down while the object is moved will move only the directory not the contained items If the Shift key is not used the
254. igital Video Square Wave Random Gaussian Back Cancel Help Broadcasting Select the required Jitter Function from the Select New rate page then select Next to move on to the Select Jitter Parameters page to specify the parameters for the selected Jitter Function The following subsections give details about each function MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Transport Stream Editor PCR Recalculation Impulse The Impulse Jitter function adds a positive or negative value to a single PCR Select Jitter Parameters 2 You have selected to add the hollowing Jitter function ap Jitter Function Impulse Please specify the parameters applicable to this dither function Mas Amplitude ns fi O Interval ms fi O Max Amplitude Specifies the size of the impulse in nano seconds Type a minus sign in front of the value for a negative impulse Interval Specifies the time taken from the start of the file at which the Impulse is to be applied Step The Step Jitter Function adds a positive or negative offset to the ideal PCR values after a specified time The offset will be the same for all PCRs Select Jitter Parameters Tou have selected to add the following Jitter Function dither Function Sees Please specify the parameters applicable to this dither function Mas Amplitude ns fi O Digital Video Ti Broadcasting Interval ms Max Amplitude Specifies the size of the offs
255. ile will be copied E FMa F When dropped the file will be moved cut and pasted When dropped no action will be taken OF Note that as the file is dragged over elements in the Navigator receptive elements elements where the file can be meaningfully dropped will be highlighted MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 75 Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Transport Stream Opening an MPEG File See Opening a Stream page 8 9 Opening a Multiplexer File See Opening a Stream page 8 9 Change Transport Stream To specify a new bit rate or duration for the transport stream select and highlight Bit rate and Duration the Transport Structure component in the Navigator view From the right click menu select Properties The dialog box shown below will be displayed a igator tek_sym1_test mpg nage ransp ort Strea r eae Programs St Add a g 1 Tektro Modify H 2 Tektro peee Ae 3 Tektro Ge m 4 Tektro ett 1 5 Tektro Copy Haste Edit the Bit rate and the Duration as required then click on the OK button Stream Properties Bit rake g PUFF a a EERTE Tn hibits Duration Ce Fined 68 930933 F256 902 2 C Getto greatest component stop time Cancel 8 76 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Programs The introduction of the Navigator Programs view has provided a more program centered means of manipu
256. iled information about Continuous Recording Ignore Dvalid Sets whether the MPEG Player ignores the DVALID signal from the selected interface when a stream data is acquired When it is checked the MPEG Player ignores the DVALID signal and the stream data is acquired according to the internal clock signal This option is not available for the ASI interface option Format Specifies the way to set the record size and trigger position You can select Time or File Size Select the OK button to enable all the settings and to close the dialog box 10 40 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Menus and Controls Others Dialog Box When you select the Other command from the Record menu the Others dialog box is displayed Others Standard DVB Numeric Hew Ext Record Start OFF Cancel Standard Sets the standard used to display the input stream You can select ARIB ATSC DVB or MPEG2 Numeric Sets the base value used to describe the component information in the hierarchy display You can select Decimal Hex or Octal Ext Record Start Sets whether or not to start input stream record using a trigger signal applied to the TRIG IN connector You can select Off Rise or Fall When you select Rise the input stream record is started at the rising edge of the applied trigger signal When you select Fall the input stream record is started at the falling edge of the applied trigger signal When y
257. ime by selecting Options from the Edit menu This opens the Options dialogue box Opening file C Alwaus edit copy C Always edit original dont make copy i Alwaus ask i Only open valid MPEG Transport Streams Note valid means having 5 consecutive sync bytes 0x47 spaced ether 156 or 204 bytes apart Open az ARIB ISDE S Transport Streams General Options ff Show wizard Introduction pages i var about remapping to existing PIDs Cancel Opening File Specifies how the program will interpret the packet size of the stream The options are mutually exclusive and are as follows t Always edit copy When opening a file Editor always makes a copy without asking Always edit original don t make copy Uses the original files without making a copy or asking for confirmation Always ask Before opening a file for editing asks if it should edit the original or make a copy M Only open valid MPEG Transport Stream files Will open files that have five or more consecutive sync bytes M Open as ARIB ISDB S Transport Streams Opens transport streams encoded as ARIB ISDB S format including TMCC information MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 3 Transport Stream Editor Getting Started General Options Opening a File Opening a File from the Menus and Toolbar 9 4 M Show Wizard Introduction pages Causes any wizards invoked by Editor to display their Introduction pages M
258. in the Section View otherwise the Section View window is blank To open a table version section in Section View select the component in the Navigator Tables view The Section View is updated immediately to show the selected section version Navigator tek_sym1_test mpg Y PSI SI Tables lm BAT Gg PMT El 4m SDT_actual S Transport Steam O 1 Version 0 Section O Pid 17 0811 Slee TOT Elm TOT Programs T ables MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual el T ableHeader He ElT_actual pi eat onginal_nebeork_id 435961 Oxabeod fem MIT actual Hl services He PAT AD CRC 32 1221004543 Ox48ic7 Oct u Section SDT_actual Transport Sheam ID ial E 8 103 Multiplexer Editing in Section View Editing Fields To add change or delete a field element or loop in a section version the parent table must be selected in the Navigator Tables view Highlight the appropriate line in the Section view and select the required option from the right click menu Selecting a Field To select a field or container place the mouse pointer over it and click the left button The magnifying glass icon indicates the selected component If Standard Mode is selected the magnifying glass selection cannot be placed on a field that is locked To select and edit locked fields first select the Expert Mode option from the Multiplex menu 8 104 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer
259. ing see Editing PSI SI Table Properties page 8 85 5 Select Next to move to the Optional Tables dialog 6 This dialog box allows you to include and if required configure basic PSI SI information MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 29 Multiplexer Wizards Optional Tables for the Stream b Transport Stream As the checkbox next to each table is enabled the table name is added to the graphical representation on the left The associated buttons are also enabled to allow timing or other aspects of the table to be modified NIT TOT and TDT Timing see Editing PSI SI Table Properties page 8 85 8 30 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Wizards NIT Settings Set up the Nit 1 Astra Satellite Network 19 26 Astra Satellite Network 19 2 E a Tenestial To set up the Network Information Table NIT enter or select the values required and select the OK button Note that if a Delivery System other than Undefined is selected an additional settings dialog box becomes available specific to the Delivery System chosen MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 31 Multiplexer Wizards 8 32 7 Select Next to move to the Transport Wizard Complete dialog box Transport Wizard Complete Aa Transport Stream oof PAT Transport Stream Id O Version O Section O Pid 0 0x0 ED TOT Pid 20 01 4 TOT Pid 20 0x1 4 of MIT_actual Network ID 0 Yersion
260. ing opens a multiplex configuration file and the MPEG file on which it is based See Importing a file page 8 11 Transport Structure Demultiplex As the file is analyzed the Top Levels of the Transport Structure diagram are drawn in the Transport Navigator See Initial Stream Analysis page NO TAG Transport Structure Modifications The file can now be manipulated to act as the specification to synthesize a new transport stream The tables and elementary streams are viewed and selected either with the aid of Wizards or in the Navigator windows Output Export The Multiplex Engine synthesizes a new transport stream and writes it to an MPEG file To ensure that the specification for any synthesized stream can be reused it can be saved to a multiplex configuration file See Multiplexing Transport Streams page 8 111 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 13 Multiplexer Getting Started Closing Files To close the files select the Close option from the File menu This will close both the MPEG file and any multiplex configuration file that is open ektronix Multiplexer C Stre File Edit View Options Multiple a N Examine 5 Ctrl T Export Ctrl E Export As E xit There is also a shortcut button available on the Toolbar for closing a file which has a standard file close symbol If a multiplex configuration file has been edited and the changes not exported the program
261. ingis d a b Summary Definition File Syntax 5 TS Generation Tektronix Carousel Generator Files and directories can be manipulated in a variety of ways All commands are accessible via the Menu Bar or context sensitive right click menus m Files and directories can be dragged and dropped within Carousel Generator m Files and directories can be dragged from Windows Explorer The properties of files and directories can be edited after they have been incorporated into a carousel MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 51 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Adding an Object Individual files or complete directory structures can be added to a carousel New File Directory directories can be created The location that an object is to be added to should be highlighted Adding Directories 1 Highlight the node in the carousel where the directory is to be added i Carousel Session 1 Program Carousel 5 MHP Object Carousel ID 1 PID 100 040064 gt ow pia Carousel Contents 0 items 0 bytes 2 Select Carousel gt Contents gt Add Directory tronix Carousel Generator 1 Session Player Tools Help i Mev Roane r Import Elementary Streams al New Carousel ma 4 Carousel Wizard CErl Wy Be pia Carousel Properties Contents j aa Empty Carousel E meletet pa Synchronise ES Delete Carousel add Filets Eal Delete All Carousels Pai Biren
262. ion 00 00 01 BO 00 7A 00 00 26 1F 14 01 OB 73 74 6l Zk Sta 72 74 75 70 2E 62 6D 6C 1C 00 00 28 SD 00 FE 00 rtup bml OO 04 4D 14 01 OF 66 75 6C 6C SF 73 63 72 65 65 H full_scree 6E 2E 62 6D 60 19 00 00 2D 3C 00 6A 00 00 OB 7B an bnl lt 4 24 01 0C 44 61 74 61 6C OF 67 GF 2E 70 GE 67 19 Datalogo png OO 00 39 35 00 73 00 00 01 83 54 31 OC 44 41 54 95 s T1 DAT 41 4C 4F 47 4F 2E 63 6C 74 19 00 00 3B 3F 00 69 ALOGO clt i 00 00 03 08 24 01 0C 42 61 73 65 SF 62 74 GE 2E 9 Base btn 70 6E 67 14 00 00 3E C4 00 6A O00 02 Fe 24 O1 BN ie Fas cee x OD 6 72 65 65 6E SF 62 61 72 2E 6E 67 OD OA green_bar png 2D 2D 50 61 6E 61 73 6F 6E 69 63 44 43 0D 0A PanasonicHDc 0 0 D 5 34 20 74 65 Content Type te D 60 3B 20 63 wet E arib bnl c D E 6A 70 22 OD harset euc jp 67 74 66 3A Content Length This Resources node displays a header and the resources associated with Right Click Menu Options Go To Next Save Displays the next occurrence of the Resource node in the transport stream note the change of Packet number in the Status bar Saves the resource files to a selected location The head er information is not saved MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views Resource node J Each Resource node displays header information and a resource Right Click Menu Options Open Save Opens the resource in an associat
263. ion Activates or creates a repetition view of the module View Bitrate Activates or creates a bit rate view of the module See also ARIB Module Versions page 6 49 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 47 Carousel Analyzer Views Resource node J Each Resource node is a leaf node containing one resource file Right Click Menu Options Open Opens the resource in an associated application to allow it to be viewed If no association has been made with the file type on the host computer a message is displayed Save Saves the resource file to a selected location The header information is not saved View Displays the Resource view The selected resource is highlighted in the Resource view 6 48 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views ARIB Module Versions Note that there may be multiple versions of a single ARIB module Each version of the same module can potentially contain different resources For example Version 1 may contain resources A B and C and Version 2 may contain resources C D and E When viewing the resources in Data Carousel and Service Program views the resources listed under the Module node will be all resources across all versions for example A B C D and E When opening or saving any of these resources from Data Carousel or Service Program views the operation will work on the first version encountered in the stream A B and C will come from Version 1 an
264. iplexer Editing in Section View sensitive and values may include zeros after the prefix and before any significant digits for example Edit or replace the existing value and then select OK to continue Select Cancel to abandon any changes made in the field Multiplexer will check the new value against the governing standards and for conflicts with other fields It may open a simple context sensitive dialog box offering advice and or asking for more information or confirmation For example when changing a version_number a dialog box is opened to determine the scope of the change 8 110 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual i Ae Multiplexing Transport Streams The Multiplex Engine in the Multiplexer synthesizes a new transport stream and writes it to an MPEG file The contents of the new stream are multiplexed according to the specification currently held in memory which is shown in the Navigator and Section views The tables that are displayed in the Navigator are synthesized from the current specification Elementary streams and other data are acquired from the original MPEG file and other stream files and remultiplexed according to the specifica tion Start To start the Multiplex Engine select the Start option from the Multiplex menu Alternatively select the start button on the Toolbar Adh_10s mpg Multiplex Window Help EI ey of slop b subtitle mpag _ Standard Mode Cc thi Multiplexe
265. is 0 eee eens e tht ee eT W W we N Working with Audio Streams ssssscsssosssssseessoosoo Understanding MPEG Audio Streams 0 cece Audio RIOT edera taa e eres genin teens be a a Understanding Dolby Digital AC 3 Audio Streams Working with Program Streams ccccc ccc ccccsceeees Viewing Pack and System Headers cece cee eee eens Viewing the Program Stream Map 2 cee eee eee eee eens Working with Teletext igs gee ses pce ses gcosas 4G os wag pia he Beare Ge aeons VBI Enhanced Teletext SUppOrt su is04 odd ehh eds Pe merede d Mie eae Advanced Audio Compression ccccccccccscccccccccees ADIF Streatit POTS 45024635 Bbc SAS Bok eel OOS ENE 3 OAS REE ADIS Seim Fons 3 04 30 0 5 car oh kOe SG OER EA RO SODAS DRE RSS Closed Caption Analysis ccc cece cece ccc cnnccccccsceees Enabling Closed Caption Analysis 0 ccc cece cece eee eee nees Selecting Closed Caption Analysis Standard 0 0 eee eee eee CC EIAGOS SUPPO ce 0h idee es ele nea ke Daas eed bes CC EIA7 0S SUPPO t lt nitegoee bade iene ed E AA ees 5 94 Dumping Closed Caption Statistics 2 0 0 0 ccc cece 5 98 DVB Subtitle Stream Analysis ccc ccc cece cc ceccenees 5 101 DVB Subtitle Data TaD esis cies waueoh Seawater e woke eats w ee Geese 5 103 PaCS VIC WA ois Boies ise ok hn belts aaah Gel a rk Ens nS Oe ees 5 106 l Ooo Won aN NAANINADADADYD NU
266. is continuously output If you set it to Off the selected stream is output once Start Stop Sets the start and stop position of the stream and initial start position of the stream for loop output When you select this command the Start Stop Position dialog box appears Refer to Start Stop Position Dialog Box on page NO TAG for more information Auto play Sets whether or not the transport stream is automatically output using the last power down settings when you turn the MPEG Player on You can select On or Off If you set it to On take care of the output level setting used when the MPEG Player was last turned off and the input level of the instrument device currently connected to the MPEG Player Timer Play Sets the date and time used to output a stream automatically When you select this command the Timer Play Record dialog box appears Refer to Timer Play Record Dialog Box on page 10 29 for more information Other MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Sets the standard used to display the selected stream and display radix for the text information When you select this command the Others dialog box appears Refer to Others Dialog Box on page 10 30 for more information 10 21 MPEG Player Menus and Controls Clock Dialog Box When you select the Clock command from the Play menu the Clock dialog box is displayed Figure 10 6 Clock Source Data Rate 41 470998 Mbps
267. isk cannot overtake the data output rate the error message Error Output Buffer Empty appears Use the Source command in the Play menu to select the output source see Table 10 20 You can see the currently selected output source in the status bar The MPEG Player provides the capability to add jitter to PCRs Program Clock References Adding jitter to PCRs allows you to simulate transmission delay variations and to test the robustness of decoders under various conditions The jitter function adds jitter to the program_clock_reference_base value and the program clock_reference_extension value in the adaptation field of transport stream packets You can use this function to modulate the data values of the PCRs away from their correct values Perform the following procedure to add jitter to PCRs 1 Highlight a PCR element in the hierarchy display and select PCR Accuracy VariationO from the right click menu PCR Inaccuracy PCR Inaccuracy Pattern SNE vl Feriod 100 Packets Amplitude 0 2rMHz O 00re Figure 10 12 PCR Inaccuracy dialog box MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Reference 2 The PCR Accuracy Variation dialog box lets you set how the parameters for how jitter will be added to the PCR Pattern Selects the waveform type of the waveform used to add jitter You can select Sine Square Triangle Pulse Sawtooth Random or Offset Period Sets the period of the
268. it is a good idea to look at the Options before opening a file To edit the original useful when making edits to a file that is already a copy select the No I want to edit the original option and then select the OK button To make a copy select the Yes option specify the copy file and then select OK While the copy is being made the pointer changes to the busy pointer usually an hour glass When the Edit a copy option is selected the dialog box suggests a suitable filename whihc you can edit To look for a different directory or filename select the Browse button This will open a standard file browser window like this Save Copy As Save in J Samples t File name Save as type MPEG Files mpg Cancel MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual ee Menus and Controls The following pages contain descriptions of the different menu options toolbar controls status bar and slider bar Toolbar ca a S Fea BB 2 cm ake The Toolbar provides a set of convenient shortcuts for the more frequently used menu options The available commands are Opens a file If a file is currently open it will be closed when a new file is selected Closes the current file There is no save option because all changes are written to file immediately Prints the current packet Opens a print preview of the current packet Copies the bytes that are currently selected in the Hexadecimal Editor
269. iting table contents These are selected from the Multiplex menu The checks that affect the Navigator are Standard Mode Prevents changing the PID of a table whose PID number is specified in the standard for example PID 0x0 carries the PAT Expert Mode A warning is displayed and confirmation requested be fore changing the PID of a table whose PID number is specified in the standard Multiples Window Help Start Stop w Standard Mode Expert Mode co Report Seamless Seamless Settings An adjacent check mark indicates the mode selected The mode is also indicated on the Status Bar 8 54 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Views In the Section View a padlock symbol i is displayed adjacent to all of the fields that cannot be edited in the current mode For example the screenshots below show the same tables in Standard and Expert mode Section MGT Yersion 0 Section 0 bi 8187 0x1 u Section MGT Version 0 Section 0 Pid 8167 0x15 Version D Section D Pid 8187 0 w1FFE EY ae tele Header gt table id 199 0xC7 MGT gt sechon_ syntax indicator 1 sechon length 37 s table_id_estension 0 gt Yersion number 0x0 current next indicator 1 gt sechon number 0 gis last sechon_number U ot protocol version 0 Ost ta tables_defined 1 0x1 r 4 tables A3 256 E1T 0 to EIT 127 El of ce Headey owe ff table id 1
270. ition file If the file has not been saved an opportunity is offered to name it Save Carousel Session As Allows the current carousel session to be named and saved in the form of a carousel definition file Most Recently Used List Lists the most recently used carousel session files Click on a file name to reopen it The number of files displayed is set in the Carousel Generator Options dialog box Tools gt Options Exit Closes the application An opportunity is offered to save the session if it has not been saved MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 23 Carousel Generator Menus and Controls 7 24 Edit Menu Options View Menu Options Table 7 2 Edit menu options Option Cut Copy Paste Empty Carousel Delete Collections Delete Program Function Cuts the currently highlighted item The item is stored on the Windows clipboard Copies the currently highlighted item The item is stored on the Windows clipboard Paste the item currently on the Windows clipboard Carousel contents node highlighted Deletes the carousel contents Collection node highlighted Deletes the selected collection The Collection must be empty the contents must be moved to another collection first Program node highlighted Deletes the selected program and the carousel s it contains Table 7 3 View menu options Option MHP Applications Carousels Log Generator Toolbar Player Toolbar Sta
271. ivate_data_bytes Formatld 0 indicates no FormatSpecifier present FormatSpecifier gt FormatSpecifier_byte a Not used by Carousel Generator for n 0 n lt N1 n gt private _data_byte a Not used by Carousel Generator I TR 101 202 Implementation Guidelines for Data Broadcasting section 4 7 7 1 An association tag descriptor is added to the ES_info loop in exactly the same way as for DSM CC object carousels Two more descriptors are also added to the ES_info loop for streams carrying DVB object carousels the data_broadcast_id_descriptor and the stream_identi fier_descriptor Both are defined in EN300 468 Specification for Service Information in DVB systems Table 7 16 DVB object carousels Descriptors Descriptor Syntax CG Value Comment stream_identifier_descriptor descriptor tag 0x52 descriptor length component _tag user LSB of the association tag for this stream data_broadcast_id descriptor descriptor tag 0x66 descriptor length 7 86 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream Table 7 16 DVB object carousels Descriptors Cont Descriptor Syntax CG Value Comment data_broadcast_id DVB Object Carousel code for i 0 i lt N i id selector byte n a DVB Object Carousels do not use these selector bytes DTT Object Carousels DTG D Book DTT Requirements for Interoperability Most of the PMT sign
272. k symbol appears in the icon when the transport scrambling control value is set to 01 Broadcaster Information Table BIT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x24 and a table _id value of 0xC4 Network Board Information Table NBIT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x25 and a table_id value of OxC5 or OxC6 Linked Description Table LDT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x25 and a table_id value of OxC7 Time and Data Table TDT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x0014 and a table _ id value of 0x72 Time Offset Table TOT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x0014 and a table _id value of 0x73 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 13 MPEG Player Getting Started Table 10 4 Icons specific to ATSC format Icon Element type Master Guide Table MGT One or more transport packets with a PID value of Ox1FFB and a table _id value of OxC7 Terrestrial Virtual Channel Table TVCT One or more transport packets with a PID value of Ox1FFB and a table _id value of OxC8 Cable Virtual Channel Table CVCT One or more transport packets with a PID value of Ox1FFB and a table _id value of OxC9 Rating Region Table RRT One or more transport packets with a PID value of Ox1FFB and a table _id value of OxCA Event Information Table EIT One or more transport packets with a PID value specified by the table type PID in the MGT and a tabl
273. lass field Comment This descriptor specifies the HTML application parameters and is accessed via HTML app file gt Properties gt HTML Properties page gt Application IDs list box gt Parameter String edit box MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream Table 7 35 HTML application descriptor Cont Descriptor Syntax I ETSI TS 101 812 section 10 10 1 CG Value Comment NOTE The dvb_html_application_descriptor format shown above is that defined in TS 101 812 v1 1 2 MHP v1 0 1 previous versions of the standard did not have the application_id loop Carousel Generator can be made to revert to the older version of the descriptor v1 0 0 for a particular carousel by checking the MHP Object Carousel node gt Properties gt MHP page Use old style MHP v1 0 0 HTML application descriptor checkbox Table 7 36 HTML application location descriptor Descriptor Syntax dvb html application location descriptor descriptor tag descriptor length physical_root_length for i 0 i lt physical_root_length i physical root bytes I for i 0 i lt N i initial path bytes I ETSI TS 101 812 section 10 10 2 Summary CG Value Comment This descriptor specifies the HTML application path and is accessed on the HTML app file gt Properties gt HTML Properties page 0x04 user gt Physical Root Directory field user gt Initial
274. lating SI PSI Whole programs can be added to the multiplex and the application will update the associated tables including the PAT and PMT Note that the nodes of the tree structure in the Navigator Programs view are context sensitive When dragging and dropping files from either the Examine TS window or from another instance of Multiplexer a node will only be highlighted as the cursor passes over it when the operation proposed is legal Note that there may be a very short delay before the node is highlighted while the legality of the operation is checked Adding a New Program With the Transport Stream ID field highlighted in the Navigator Programs view selecting the Add option either from the right click menu PAT highlighted in Navigator Programs view or the Menu Bar Edit gt Add will open the Program Wizard see page 8 33 avigator tek_sym1_test mpqg E1 Ja Transport Stream BREE Frograme Stream Id 1 Version Uy Se a 1 Tektroniz Tektrori Carn Se a 2 Tektronis I T ektronis Sys Madiip Se m 3 Tektronis lll Tektronis Sy Delete H 4 Tektronix Iv Tektronix Sy Se a 5 Tektronis Y Tektronis Sys ect Eopy Paste Export Section Data port Sector Mata Properties Prograrns Tables Pids In the Navigator Programs view the PAT is represented by the Transport Stream ID field MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 77 Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Copy Move a Pr
275. ld Module nodes Right Click Menu Options View U N Message Displays a structure view of the next appearance of this DII message that can be formed from the current stream position onwards as indicated by the Transport Packet number displayed in the Transport Packet Bar View Carrier Section Displays a structure view of the next appearance of the section that carries this DII message View Cycle Time gt Allows either cycle time statistics or graphical view of the object to be selected View Repetition Activates or creates a repetition view of the DII mes sage View Bitrate Activates or creates a bit rate view of the DII message Download Module node l This node represents a U N Download Module The download blocks that constitute the module are listed as child nodes Right Click Menu Options View Hex Dump Displays a data view of the next appearance of this mod ule that can be formed from the current stream position onwards as indicated by the Transport Packet number displayed in the Transport Packet Bar View Cycle Time gt Allows either cycle time statistics or graphical view of the object to be selected View Repetition Activates or creates a repetition view of the module View Bitrate Activates or creates a bit rate view of the module MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 43 Carousel Analyzer Views 6 44 Block node id This node represents a U N Download Data Block DDB Right Cl
276. le 5 27 96 33 PM 41 6178 MPEG File 5 22 96 1027 Al PEGe File 3 2396 675 PM nE 3 Floppy A H a Diski_vol C Eh ig Video E gt 43 10smp Analyse PEG File 5 8 96 217 PM AL Samples om al Control Panel conf gal Printers Send To j TS Editor writes all edits to the file immediately To avoid accidental changes to prime data the application can make a copy of the file and edit that copy By default once a file has been selected for opening you are prompted to decide whether to edit the original or make a copy If you do not want to be presented with this dialog box each time a file is opened set the copy or edit original option as the default IMPORTANT All changes to the loaded file will be immediately written to disk overnanting the file contents Itis therefore recommended that a copy of the file i used for editing in Case recover if HeGessary Do you want to edit a copy of this file No want to edit the original fe Yes EAS amples Copy of Ad 10s mpq Browse Always use the above setting when opening a file Mote If the above bos ts ticked this dialog will not appear again until the Always Ask setting z selected in the Edit Options dialog OF Cancel MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 5 Transport Stream Editor Getting Started 9 6 It is recommended that this dialog box be left as the default option If someone else has used the MPEG Test System
277. le 8 Print View Show eur Bt ES Reine etn le Delete Meet Excent Delete All Table 11 2 Edit menu options Command Function Cut Moves the currently selected records from the main window to the clipboard Copy Copies the contents of the currently selected records to the clipboard They are not removed from the main window Delete Deletes the selected records from the main window Deletes all records except those selected from the main window Delete Except Delete All Deletes all records MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Tracer Menus and Controls Print Menu Options dit Baie View Show Printer Setup Bane aren Fort oolour tint FEENS Print Chrl P Table 11 3 Print menu options Command Function Printer Setup Selects printer and configuration Page Setup Not available with Buffer Analyzer Font Selects which font is used for printing text Colors Not available with Buffer Analyzer Print Preview Not available with Buffer Analyzer Print Prints all or just the current selection of records MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 11 13 Tracer Menus and Controls View Menu Options dit Print Show Options Ioaba w Status Bar Font Colours Newest End Table 11 4 View menu options Command Function Options Opens the options dialog for selecting what columns of information to display
278. lection can be viewed Three icons are used at the Collection node G orange Collection containing the Service Gateway At least one collection must exist during any session The collection containing the Service Gateway cannot be deleted red Ordinary collection a Compressed collection To open the Collection properties dialog box select Edit in the Collection Properties bar MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 67 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation wOnectlonisopercs Name Using DII Weighting Collection 1 DI 1 using assoc tag 100 PID 100 Usb 4 Compression Hone Max Cancel Name Using DII Weighting Compression 7 68 Enter the required name This is the list of all the DIIs in the carousel The Collections in the carousel and therefore the generated DSMCC modules can be distributed among several DIls or all be referenced by a single DII This enables for example a minimal collection contain ing just the objects needed for booting to be referenced in a DII with a short cycle time This is the relative priority of the collections in a single carousel For example the objects in a collection with a weighting of 1 5 will be repeated half as often as those in a collection with a weighting of three This enables for example boot classes in a collection to be given a higher weighting than the other files in a car ousel The we
279. levision service oo Cancel 3 By default the Add Service Description checkbox is clear When it is enabled a Service Provider Name and a Service Name must be entered and a Service Type selected from the drop down list If no details are provided the section will still be created but the relevant descriptors will be empty Enabling the Use Single Section checkbox will cause the SDT descriptors to be added to the existing SDT section If the stream contains no SDT section the checkbox is disabled SDT timing see Editing PSI SI Table Properties page 8 85 4 Select Next to move to the Program Content dialog MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Wizards Program Content Dialog This dialog box allows you to compile a list of elementary streams to be Box associated with the program in the final multiplex Add the Program Content AP Transport Stream of PAT Section E TOT Section E TOT Section EB NIT Section Program E PMT Section EB SOT Section 5 Select Add to display the Add Program Stream dialog box AE Transport Stream ED FAT Section O Add A ea iE NIT Section Pid Type Filename __ Frogram ED SDT Section 555 2 MPEG 2 Wideo C Streams Elemen B66 4 MPEG 2 Audio C Streams Elemen BD PMT Section am Pid 666 Ty Add Program Stream MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 35 Multiplexer Wizards This dialog allows you to identify
280. lows Object Carousels DSMCC DVB DTT MHP Object carousels Reference specification DSM CC Digital Storage Media Command and Control MPEG only DVB Digital Video Broadcast DTT Digital Terrestrial Television MHP Multimedia Home Platform The type of carousel being edited dictates the available options and user interface elements MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 3 Carousel Generator Getting Started Collections View Objects associated with a carousel can be grouped together in collections The properties of each collection can be adjusted to give the most efficient delivery in the transport stream x R Collections List 2 Programs 2 Carousels E Collections for MHP Object Carousel ID 1 PID 100 Pro G Collection c lt lt Service Gateway gt gt 5 snake de da tes E Collection2 ad Service Gateway gt gt lt caried in Collection gt LJ snake lt cartied in Collection gt E P res lt carfied in Collection gt d enake E down png B edge png horizontal png B lelt png E point png B right prg E upprg B vertikal png E Collections for DTT Object Carousel ID 1 PID 200 Proc gt Ey Carousels B Collections E Programs The way that individual objects in a carousel are to be transmitted often varies Each object in the carousel has properties including its minimum repetition rate maximum cycle time and whether it is compr
281. lt lt Service Gateway gt de a d snake HH snake i de The files added in the previous step are automatically placed in a single default Collection as shown above Collections allow objects to share transmission properties including minimum repetition rate maximum cycle time and compression This step allows the user to change the properties of the default Collection create new Collections and move files between the various collections 9 Select uw to create a new collection header MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 15 Carousel Generator Carousel Wizard Carousel Wizard 4 Collection Contents E fe Collections for MHP Object Carousel ID 1 PID 100_ Prog 1 PHT a a E Colection 7 i d g4 Service Gateway gt gt Egy de a shake i d snake mE de H reg ome Bollectone 10 Highlight a collection node and select Tj to modify the collection s properties NOTE If the previous wizard step is reselected Back and more files added or removed the Collection assignment is maintained for existing files and new files are placed in the parent directory s collection by default 7 16 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Wizard Carousel Wizard 4 Collection Contents EF lt lt Serice Gateway gt gt a d de mise HE shake Bi snake H de S W Colestion2 ei lt Service Gateway gt gt ocamed in Collechont gt SCL snake lt
282. ly selected item Export Payload Extracts and exports the payload of the source transport stream in the form of a simple data file Export Elementary Stream Removes the transport stream and PES headers and ex ports the remaining information in the form of a simple data file Export Section Data Extracts and exports section data The created file can be imported as ES using Multiplexer s Add function or as SI using the Import Section Data option Import Section Data Imports SI data form a file and analyzes it The section is added to the Navigator view MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual r Editing in the Navigator Views Drag and Drop Multiplexer provides a variety of ways of building and modifying transport streams for multiplexing In addition to the Menu Bar options and Toolbar shortcuts built into the Multiplexer many of the operations can be carried out using familiar drag and drop Windows techniques In the following descriptions the alternative methods for carrying out a task are given at the head of the section but only one method is described for each action Other methods for the same action often invoke the same dialog boxes and sequence of follow on actions To drag a file click on its name and hold down the left button of the mouse while dragging the file to the required location The cursor will change according to the background that it is dragged over With Ctrl key held when dropped the f
283. m A Wa Em D C Ta oo D 1 1 1 _ t a C md Le vw Transport Packet Nurber State unknown L Service Present ere Autostart L App Reacdy Pretetch Bape Destroy Kil App Remote Service Absent A key to the color codes is displayed at the bottom of the view Each application is labeled Placing the cursor over a color block displays details of the block including the block start time MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 93 a Reference Script Files The following scripts Table 6 11 are shared between the Carousel Analyzer They exist in the Tektronix Scripts directory Table 6 11 Script Files General Script file name Purpose MPEG scp Scripts for MPEG sections and descriptors DVB scp Scripts for DVB sections and descriptors ISDB T scp Script for ISDB T sections and descriptors ISDB S scp Script for ISDB S sections and descriptors MHP scp Script for AIT table MPE scp Scripts for DVB datagrams DSMCCv2 scp General purpose DSMCC structures DSMCC scp Scripts for DVB DSM CC sections ISDB_DSMCC scp ISDB version of the DSM CC script MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 95 Carousel Analyzer Reference The following scripts Table 6 12 are used only by the Carousel Analyzer They exist in the Tektronix DataTestSystem Scripts directory Table 6 12 Script Files Carousel Analyzer Script file name Purpose Transport scp Script for transport packets Pat_Cat sc
284. me Offset Table DVB Transport Stream Transport Streams Description Table Transport Stream System Target Decoder Terrestrial Virtual Channel Table ATSC Universal Coordinated Time Virtual Channel Table ATSC Extensible Markup Language MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual EEE EE Transport Stream Editor a Getting Started The Transport Stream Editor can be used to edit the contents of transport stream packets contained in a file It displays the complete contents of each packet in hexadecimal and provides an interpreted view of the packet header information 4a Tektronix MPEG 2 TS Editor Copy of Ad_103 mpq File Edit View Tools Help ca wa Sja Ee ec ee Header Information l Adaptation Field Adaptation Field Estension PID Value i Bt Flags Adaptation Field Control Continuity C t oe Transport Error Indicator cee a Note amp setting of 00 or O71 will disable all the fielde onthe other tabbed pages Payload Unit Start Indicator Trangport Scrambling Control Transport Priory 00 Mot Scrambled 11 Adaptation Payload Displayed Packet 77636 FID 160 Tektronix Ready File Size 55 4MB Packets SO0001 Packet Size 204 Packet headers can be edited from both the header interpretation and hexadeci mal displays These are referred to as the Header Editor and the Hex Editor respectively All changes made in one view are immediately shown in the other The Header Editor is contex
285. ment Control Message ECM B Entitlement Management Message EMM L One or more transport packets with a PID value specified by the CA_PID of the 11 CA descriptor in the CAT a payload_start_unit_indicator value of 1 and the payload does not start 000001 section or the payload starts 000001 PES GHOST One or more transport packets with a PID value not specified in the PSI or Private Section PID file when the transport stream is downloaded NULL One or more transport packets with a PID value of Ox1FFF GARBAGE One or more transport packets in the section data structure at the beginning of the section are not complete Adaptation Field Error ADFERR One or more transport packets with an adaptation field control value of 0x00 10 10 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Getting Started Table 10 2 Icons specific to DVB format Icon Element type Service Description Table SDT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x0011 and a table _id value of 0x42 Bouquet Association Table BAT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x0011 and a table _id value of Ox4A Event Information Table EIT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x0012 and a table _ id value of 0x4E 0x6F Running Status Table RST One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x0013 and a table_id value of Ox4E 0x71 Stuffing Table ST One or more transport packets with a PID
286. mmands Makes Removes and Edits Java applications These HTML and Java Application commands are only applicable to file objects when a file is selected synchronizes the carousel contents with the source files Deletes the selected carousel Deletes all carousels in the current session 7 25 Carousel Generator Menus and Controls Player Menu Options Tools Menu Options Help Menu Options 7 26 Table 7 5 Player menu options Option Stream Generation Properties Start Playout Stop Playout View Packets Time Function Opens the Stream Generation Properties dialog box Initiates output stream generation using information in the Current session Stops output generation Switches between packet count and time display during playout Table 7 6 Tools menu options Option Launch Multiplexer Launch Carousel Analyzer Launch TS Analyzer Options Function Opens the Multiplexer application Opens the Carousel Analyzer application Opens the Transport Stream Analyzer application Opens the Carousel Generator options dialog box This is used to set the basic Carousel Generator and session defaults Table 7 7 Help menu options Option Quick Help User Guide About Carousel Generator Function Opens an HTML help page containing summarized help information Opens the Carousel Generator User Guide in Adobe Acrobat PDF format Displays information about Carousel Generator
287. moved m If the Carry PCR checkbox is enabled PCRs will be sent as follows If Preserve PCR Inaccuracy is set the PCRs from the original transport stream will be used otherwise the initial PCR value can be specified m Ifthe Preserve PCR Intervals checkbox is enabled PCRs will be sent in those packets that originally contained them otherwise PCRs are inserted into packets at the specified intervals 8 96 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Specifying the PID Enter the PID number A new value can be entered using either decimal or Number hexadecimal notation Values are assumed to be decimal unless preceded with Ox The dialog box is not case sensitive and values may include zeros after the prefix and before any significant digits Add Stream FID Source Timing PLR m Cancel Apply When all details in all tabs are satisfactory select OK to accept all changes and close the dialog box Adding Elementary Methods available Streams to the Program Structure Highlight an Elementary Stream node in the Navigator Programs view and select Add from the right click menu m Drag and drop copy only from the Examine TS window Programs view to the Navigator Programs view m Drag and drop copy move from another instance of Multiplexer to the Navigator Programs view MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 97 Multiplexer Editing in the Nav
288. mpty window Cascade Cascades all open windows in the application Tile Tiles all open windows in the application Arrange Icons Aligns icons of any minimized windows at the bottom of the program s main window 1 lt window title gt List the currently open windows The active visible window is indicated by the checkmark 14 8 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Script Pad Menus and Controls Script Menu Options Help Menu Options Toolbar Table 14 7 lists the Script menu options Table 14 7 Script menu options Option Function Parse Parses the script file to check for syntax errors Script Message Log Opens the parser message window Table 14 8 lists the Help menu options Table 14 8 Help menu options Option Function About ScriptPad Opens the About dialog which displays the program version number elele alr Fa BA The Toolbar provides a set of convenient shortcuts for the more frequently used menu options The available commands are Open a new file Allows an existing script file to be selected and opened Saves the active script file Finds specified text Allows the currently selected text to be cut It can then be pasted to another location Allows the currently selected text to be copied It can then be posted to another location Allows text currently held on the clipboard having been previously cut or copied from elsewhere to be pasted to the cursor location
289. n brl H A Datalogo png H A DATALOGO ch sow A startup bral Carousel ld 2147483711 08000003 PID 353 0161 00000090 65 bE 74 OOOOO0A0 61 74 OOUOOOUBO 6F 75 New ARIB SI 1 cut mpg ARIB Module Resources E Resources teen Content Type multipart mixed boundary PanasonicMDC ween Content Length 16828 wen Content Encoding none fone BOOM Content Location startup bral B M DATALOGO clt E m OO000040 65 6E 6 00000050 GE 74 65 QOOO00060 GE 6F 6E Base_btn png green_bar png o00000D0 In this example object B is identified as the starting point for both carousel and entity cycle timing The cycle time of a carousel is the time taken to receive all of the objects within the carousel given a specified starting point in the carousel The cycle time of any given entity in the transport stream including Section BIOP Object PID and U N Message is the time taken from the start of an instance to the start of the next instance The cycle times calculated give the maximum minimum and mean times for the occurrences of an object in a transport stream in seconds standard deviation and number of cycles found will also be displayed The statistics can also displayed in graphical format MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 67 Carousel Analyzer Views Carousel Cycle Times Statistics 6 68 The cycle time of an object carousel is the time taken for all components of
290. n be manipulated within the Multiplexer window including tiling and cascading where multiple Section views are displayed Each view available displays a different aspect or level of detail of stream analysis and manipulation MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 43 Multiplexer Views Navigator Views The Navigator view contains three subviews or tabs Programs Tables and PIDs Program Views The Navigator Programs view extracts and displays system information that is relevant to programs Information that is not directly related to programs for example NIT or that has not been incorporated into a program for example elementary streams not listed in a PMT will be omitted from the Program view the information is still available for viewing in the Navigator Tables and PIDs views x Navigator BECTAUG27 mpg ansport Stream Ee DA 3 Programs Stream Id 4103 Version 12 I 4167 BBC ONE BBC TE Service Sections ED Transport Stream ID 4103 Yersion 3 Section O Pid 17 E Event Sections E Table ID Oste Service ID H67 Version 22 Section 0 ff Table ID Oxde Service ID 4167 Version 22 Section 1 ee D Elementary Streams PMT Version 12 wi Pid 600 Stream type 2 MPEG 2 Video Pid 601 Stream type 3 MPEG 1 Audio Pid 602 Missing Stream type 3 MPEG 1 Audio Pid 603 Stream type 6 PES private data Pid 1005 Stream type 17 O5M CC U H messages Pid 1006 Missing Stream type 17 DO SM CC U N me Pid 1007
291. n be reopened using the Import option see page 8 11 Select the Export option from the File menu to save any changes to the current multiplex configuration file Alternatively use the Ctrl E keyboard shortcut Tektronix Multiplexer C Stre II ail Edi Wise ae bute Close N Examine T Ctrl T Esport As E xi If a multiplex configuration file has not been opened Export opens a standard file browser dialog box to specify the file This is the same as selecting the Export As option MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Multiplexing Transport Streams ExportAs The Export As option from the File menu exports a file with a user specified name Tektronm Multiplexer C Stre II aol Gal Mees Osa ae Examine T Ctrl T Esport Ctrl E E xi Multiplexer opens a standard file browser dialog box to select an existing file or specify a new file If creating a new file specify the name of the exported file and select where it will be saved By default files are be created with muxml as the file extension MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 115 Make Seamless When you loop a transport stream to simulate continuous playout errors can be generated at the loop point caused by discontinuities in timing information The Seamless option provides the opportunity of creating seamless MPEG 2 files The option can be set up and enabled so that all multiplex operati
292. n depends on carousel type See carousel descriptors note below User can add additional descriptors via Program node gt Properties gt Program Descriptors page Carousel Generator will add elementary streams as required Streams include carousel data AlTs and imported PIDs Stream type 11 for carousel data stream type 5 for AIT data and the source stream type of any imported PIDs 0x7 user User editable edit method depends on the type of stream OxF auto user Auto generation depends on stream type and carousel type MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 83 Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream Table 7 12 Program Map Table PMT Cont Table Syntax CG Value Comment a i La ISO IEC 13818 1 section 2 4 4 8 Carousel Descriptors in The various standards supported by the Carousel Generator have differing the PMT signaling requirements so the type and content of descriptors added to the PMT depend on the carousel types contained in a program DSM CC Object Carousels ISO IEC 13818 6 defined The basic 13818 6 standard only supports a single carousel per program and requires that a carousel_identi fier_descriptor be inserted in the program_info loop first descriptor loop of the PMT section for a program carrying a DSM CC carousel Table 7 13 DSM CC object carousels Carousel identifier descriptor Descriptor Syntax CG Value Comment carousel identifier descrip
293. n the selections and status The icons and their meanings are as follows The hard disk is being used for the output source or re cord target The RAM is being used for the output source or record target Shows the current operation status of the instrument In the Play screen the icons and meanings are as follows gt ay Ge The selected stream is being output The selected stream is being read from the hard disk to the RAM In the Record screen the icons and meanings are as follows Red Red Yellow Elapsed Time 10 4 The captured stream is being recorded The stream record is stopped The Player is waiting for a trigger event A trigger event has occured The captured stream is being processed on the hard disk The captured stream is being saved from the RAM to the hard disk In the Play screen this box displays the elapsed time of the current stream data output In the Record screen this box displays the elapsed time since the input stream started recording MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Getting Started Status Bar The Status bar see Figure 10 3 contains several indicators that display general information about the transport stream output or record status INTERNAL 41 470998Mbps Figure 10 3 Status bar From left to right the Status bar shows the following information Standard In the Play screen this indicator shows the standard used to dis
294. nable The PID navigation feature can be enabled by selecting the checkbox as shown To navigate to a specific packet with the PID Filter disabled enter the packet number and select either the Previous or Next Packet button If a PID structure view is now requested from a View the search for the PID will commence with the transport packet number displayed Similarly with the PID Filter enabled each press of either the Previous Next button will display the previous next transport packet containing the PID number displayed in the PID Number field If a PID structure view is now requested from a View the search for the PID will commence with the transport packet number displayed NOTE When a Transport Packet is viewed the number in the Packet field will increment by one The Transport Packet bar can be hidden from view by using the View menu Toolbars option MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 19 Carousel Analyzer Menus and Controls Status Bar The Status bar provides information about the stream that is currently being displayed A message field gives a description of the button menu or option that the cursor is resting on other non critical messages may also be shown DTV analysis Transport packet standard total View any log messages for the transport stream DVB 4 000000 Mbit s duration 40 000 106383 pkts 4 Message field Stream bit Stream rate length 6 20 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Ma
295. nabled they cannot be disabled The remaining messages in the Carousel Definition File and Stream Generation categories can be enabled and disabled as required by clicking on the message icon A brief description of a message can be displayed by clicking on the message name See also Log Window page 7 30 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Creating a Session A session in Carousel Generator is the activity during which objects are assembled in one or more carousels with a transport stream being the end result The initial activity when starting a session is to note the defaults that are already displayed in the Stream Generation Properties screen these are derived from the Carousel Generator Options If required the values can be modified for the current session r w Tektronix Carousel Generator Untitled loj xi File Edit wiew Session Player Tools Help 2 G e p BBS Be er D gt EE e a x ede C 1S ion 0 P OLC l 7 Ei So see man Transport Stream Bitrate 8 000 Mbits s PSI SI Type DVB SI Base for relative paths lt not using relative paths gt The destination of the generated stream is set to the file c tempicarousel mpg Minimum Duration lt None gt There are 0 Carousels included in this Session Aas i Carousels B Collections q Error type Event time Description i gt la 4 DIA Summary Definition File S
296. nalyzer Views Data Carousel ARIB View hr Menu Bar View gt Data Carousel Toolbar i This static view shows all the data carousels in the ARIB transport stream The view is in the explorer style with a hierarchical view in the left pane and a version view in the right _ New ARIB SI 1 cut mpg ARIE Data Carousels Hep ARIB Data Carousels fih Carousel ld 2147483723 08000004 PIO 5888 01700 Hl Carousel id 214740267 0200000 d PID BOO 0x1 770 i Carousel id 2147483673 Ux6s000001 3 PIC S20 0x1 40 H Module d 0 080 PID 320 08140 Base Gtr prng DATALOGO cl Datalogeo png full screen brn green bar prg startup bml Ac Carousel ld 2147483654 050000006 PID 344 01585 h Carousel ld 2147403673 080000019 PID 352 0x160 E h Carousel Id 2147483711 08000003A PIG 353 0 161 Carousel d 2147483710 080000032 PID 576 0x40 The diagram below indicates the nodes that are accessible from the Data Carousel ARIB view q Mew ARIB SI 1 cut mpg ARIB Data Carousels Min x He ARIE Data Carousels Ee Carousel ld 2147453723 0 00 0004b FIO 5888 081700 e im Carousel ld 2147403677 Os8000001d PID 6000 0 1 770 B ph Carousel ld 214746367 3 080000015 PID 320 01 40 gt L S Module Id O 080 PID 320 0140 HE Base_btn png A DATALOGO elt cof Datalogo png ER fullscreen bral FA green_banpng i EA startup brl vn d Carousel ld 2147493654 00000000E PID 344 0 1 58
297. nced by a program or not Where possible elementary streams will be carried on the same PID used in the source stream where a conflict within the session occurs a new PID will be automatically allocated or can be allocated manually 14 Having identified the source stream and the individual elementary streams to be included in the session select Next to display Step 6 Program Entry MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 19 Carousel Generator Carousel Wizard Step 6 Program Entry At this step a new entry will be created in the PMT referencing this carousel Also the elementary streams identified in the previous steps can be associated with a new program Carousel Wizard 6 Program Entry Pid 600 00259 Carried by ev mie MPEG 2 Video Src Pid 600 Dest Pid 600 J7 MPEG 1 Audio Src Pid 601 Dest Pid 601 Tektronix Enn Pa 15 Select the elementary streams to be included in the new program 16 Select Next to display Step 7 Output Stream Properties 7 20 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Wizard Step 7 Output Stream Properties arousel Wizard T Gutput Stream Properties fell ee c temp carousel mpg Use this screen to specify the name and properties of the transport stream that is to be created 17 Enter the TS Bitrate 18 Ente
298. ncluded in Synchronization Directory object Included in Carousel Not included in Synchronization iy Directory object Not included in Carousel Included in Synchronization D Directory object shared File object Included in Carousel File object Not included in Carousel PCR node DVB SI MPEG PSI Table node Transport Stream node Program node Carousel object fn a Elementary Stream Audio MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 29 Carousel Generator Menus and Controls Table 7 10 Session icons Cont Icon Function Se Tg Elementary Stream Video ny fy Elementary Stream Private data Log Window The Log Window contains three tabbed views The Summary log records information on the general activities in the Carousel Generator The Definition File Syntax log records information on activities concerning the definition file m The TS Generation log records information during stream generation activities Error type Event time Description T Error 14 05 51 File C CarGeniMHPOBJ 1 5ML successfully loaded 1 errorfsi 0 warningis x Fatal 14 07 54 Transport stream generation aborted 2 erroris 0 warning s HLEH Summary Definition File Syntax TS Generation G Error type Event time Description i Event 14 05 50 Started loading file C 1CarGem MHPOBJ 1 8ML P Error 14 05 51 Invalid Format For element Profiles Pevent 14 05
299. nd Status bar Table 10 8 describes the commands available in the View menu Table 10 8 View menu commands Play screen Command Description Toolbar Shows or hides the toolbar in the Play screen Status Bar Shows or hides the status bar in the Play screen The Play menu contains commands for defining output parameters such as packet size output clock rate and output source Table 10 9 describes the commands available in the Play menu Table 10 9 Play menu commands Play screen Command Description Packet Size Sets the packet size in bytes for the stream You can set the packet size to 188 188 0 204 188 16 208 188 20 bytes or Non TS These packet sizes can only be set for an MPEG2 transport stream For an S TMCC or M TMCC transport stream the packet size is fixed to 204 For a Non TS stream the packet size is fixed to Non TS In addition if you select 8VSB the packet size is fixed to 188 When you select Non TS the MPEG Player deals with stream data in a byte unit not a packet unit and outputs all of the data in a file If a transport stream contains any error you can output it by selecting Non TS Clock Sets the clock rate of the stream output When you select this command the Clock dialog box appears Refer to Clock Dialog Box on page 10 22 for more information Update Sets whether to update parameters in the stream when looped You can select On or Off You cannot set to On for a Non TS s
300. nents will be selected 6 24 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Menus and Controls Saving Components Selected or highlighted components can be saved through the right click menu However the manner in which the components were selected see previous paragraphs will affect the file structure of the saved components If a Node Selection has been made the directory structure is recreated at the specified location and the subcomponents are saved to their equivalent directo ries If a Range or Multiple selection has been made all files will be duplicated in the root directory at the specified location in addition to recreating the directory structure and saving the sub components to their equivalent directories Hex Displays Hex displays follow a common format The eight digit number in the left column is the address of the first that is left byte in the row The addresses themselves are shown in hexadecimal format The center column displays the contents of the structure in hex format The right column displays the contents of the structure in ASCII format MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 25 Views The Carousel Analyzer provides three types of view as a means of inspecting and analyzing information carried in a transport stream Static Views Programs Services Object Carousel U N Download Data Carousel PID Log Static views display information derived from the tra
301. nerated A warning may be issued noting that SI settings may be lost see New Session Defaults Screen page 7 35 Output File Enter the name and path of the output file Select to specify a location on local or network drives Relative Paths in Session The paths of source components associated with a carou sel file can be stored in relative or absolute format 7 40 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Allow relative paths based on When enabled Carousel Generator will interpret all in complete paths as being relative to the base path speci fied in the adjacent text box The specified base path can be an absolute path such as c data or it can be relative to the current location of the carousel definition file Note that if is entered in the box all relative paths are referenced to the current loca tion of the carousel definition file Any automatically created paths will also be made rela tive to the base path if possible If the checkbox is cleared disabled only absolute paths will be used Update all existing When enabled Carousel Generator will attempt to con vert all paths used in the session to be relative to the specified base path where possible If the checkbox is cleared disabled existing absolute paths will be left unchanged Selecting the Carousel Type There are a number of carousel types available from the various standards au
302. new transport stream the multiplex engine tries to insert the subtable at the frequency specified by the Cycle Time An error message is written to the event log whenever a subtable cannot be multiplexed into the stream within the period specified by the maximum cycle time 8 88 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Section Timing Where a table can contain only a single section for example TOT and TDT a section timing tab is displayed in the Properties dialog box Section properties Pid 20 0x1 4 PID Section Timing Start T ime a Stop Time f 999908 M Tranenit until end of tansport stream Cycle Time a000 m Max cycle time recommended by standard 30000 m Cancel Apply Start Time Specifies the time at which the first appearance of this section will occur Stop Time When enabled specifies the time at which the last ap pearance of this section will occur Transmit until end When enabled specifies that the section should be trans mitted until the end of the stream Cycle Time Specifies the interval at which the section should be transmitted Max cycle time Gives the cycle time recommended by the current stan dard Edit the values and select OK to change the timings Select Apply to make the changes and updat
303. ng is similar to creating a new application MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 77 Carousel Analyzer Application Support Application Timing 6 78 The Application Timing feature allows the user to observe the effect in terms of download time of one or more applications being timed with an object carousel In practice an object carousel is identified and one or more applications are selected from the current application list to be timed with it As each application is selected the software will check the availability of the Boot Class and Assets If the Boot Class cannot be found the timing operation will fail If Assets cannot be found the timing tests can still be performed but they will not represent the true effect of the application on a particular carousel Progress bars are displayed while the tests are being performed The results of the application timing tests are presented in tabular form i dal T ll Foll T est 1 Best Transmission Pall Test 1 Worst Transmision P Poll Test1 Cycle P Poll Test 1 Best Boot F PolTes1 Worst Boot MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Application Support Data displayed in tabular form can be displayed in graphical form or exported to a tab separated file E bbcla mpg Application Timing Poll Test 1 Best Trans Poll Test 1 Worst Trar Poll Test 1 Cycle Poll Test 1 Best Boot Poll Test 1 Wo
304. ning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking m WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking m CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product The following symbols may appear on the product A CAUTION Protective Ground Refer to Manual Earth Terminal MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual EE a eee Service Safety Summary Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures Read this Service Safety Summary and the General Safety Summary before performing any service procedures Do Not Service Alone Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present Disconnect Power To avoid electric shock switch off the instrument power then disconnect the power cord from the mains power Use Care When Servicing With Power On Dangerous voltages or currents may exist in this product Disconnect power remove battery if applicable and disconnect test leads before removing protective panels soldering or replacing components To avoid electric shock do not touch exposed connectio
305. ns MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual xiii OO A O Preface This manual describes the functions and use of the MTS400 Series MPEG Test System After the introduction each section of the manual describes one of the software applications or tools that make up the MTS400 Series system m MTS400 Series MPEG Test System Getting Started Manual 071 1505 xx MTS400 Series MPEG Test System Programmer Manual 071 1725 xx This manual specifies the remote control and status monitoring interfaces available to a management application Related Material Additional documentation such as Read Me files may be included on the installation disks The following URLs access the Web sites for the standards organizations listed the URLs listed were valid at the time of writing m MPEG 2 standards International Organization for Standards http www iso ch DVB standards European Technical Standards Institute http www etsi org m AISC standards Advanced Television Systems Committee http www atsc org m ISDB ARIB standards Association of Radio Industries and Businesses http www arib or jp english m SCTE Society of Cable Television Engineers http www scte org MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual XV Preface Manual Conventions Naming conventions for the interface elements are based on standard Microsoft Windows naming conventions Naming conventions for MPEG 2 ATSC and DVB structures follo
306. ns a On On On On ns Oe a Oa Si Oi Ce Cs AAAA Gl GC Cs Ga Ge Gs GC a ts Go Gl Gy ae ia io Oa O O OUA 0U OA O O 0U 0U O O O obo oo O O Oo to A mom A A A AO GO A A A em A Ai AAi Ai aG Ai aAA A N Mmm OT F NONNA OOGO NnMKMNaeEeEeEAOAAOODODNAO OA Transport Packet Number Pio 15010 0 1 J PD 150 Id Oraiicadoc cpp PID 150 Id O albicF Rehd H MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views W OC_abcd mpg Repetitions AdoC Cpe E m im Transport Packet Number io 150 ia on Pb 150 id oaea doc cpp PID 150 Id 0 vavouc FR fA W OC_abcd_ mpg Repetitions AAC CEE ry i oa Transport Packet Number ip 150 ia on Pb 150 id aiea doc cpp PID 150 Id 0 aA F RH MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 59 Carousel Analyzer Views 6 60 Saving Copying The View gt Zoom gt Zoom Out menu option Toolbar Q or shift tab key will zoom out one step at a time a step being the previous zoom in actions The View gt Zoom gt Show All menu option Toolbar q will redisplay the graph with no zoom factor applied Tooltips When the cursor is placed over a block a tooltip provides the PID time and packet number The graph can be saved or copied in text format or as a picture file JPEG or bitmap Menu Option Graph gt Save gt Bitmap gt JPEG gt Table Graph gt Copy gt Image gt Table D
307. nsport Stream page Transport Stream ID field MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 89 Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream Table 7 20 Network information table Cont Table Syntax CG Value Comment original network_id As above gt Original Network ID field reserved future use OxF transport descriptors length for j 0 j lt N j One of the three delivery system descriptors will always be present see Delivery System Descriptors below descriptor auto user The user can also add custom descriptors via Transport Stream node gt Properties gt Transport Stream page Descriptors list CRC 32 I ETS EN 300 468 Specification for Service Information in DVB systems section 5 2 1 Delivery System Every transport stream listed in the NIT will contain at least one descriptor one Descriptors of either the cable delivery system descriptor ETSI EN 300 468 sec tion 6 2 12 1 the satellite delivery system descriptor ETSI EN 300 468 section 6 2 12 2 or the terrestrial delivery system descriptor ETSI EN 300 468 section 6 2 12 3 The type of descriptor used and the contents of all its fields are edited through the Transport Stream node gt Properties gt Delivery System page All of the delivery system descriptor fields defined in EN 300 468 can be modified Untitled x Delivery System Actual Deliver System Type i Cable Satellite Terrestrial Descriptor Tag Ox43 Fre
308. nsport stream when it is opened Structure Views Transport Packet U N Messages Module Section BIOP Messages Structure views use Tektronix scripting technology to analyze structures that appear in the transport stream for example tp and BIOP messages For repeated Structures this view allows all occurrences to be visited Chart Views Bitrate Repetition Rate Chart views present timing information in graphical form about one or more structure in the stream View Page View Page Programs Services View 6 52 Object Carousel View 6 55 U N Download View 6 58 Data Carousel DVB View 6 61 Data Carousel ARIB View 6 46 logView 6 64 Resource View 6 50 6 67 In the following sections each view is described together with the information accessible from that view MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 27 Carousel Analyzer Views Object Carousel E BIOF Messages Download Data Carousel Modules and Blocks Transport Packets p 6 28 Module 1 Th o Table 6 10 Key to Tree Nodes af B a so amp g toot Service Program Download Block U N Message Download Module Compressed Download Module Data Carousel Object Carousel Stream Object Stream Event Object Java Application J Bos Bona feens amp Secions___ Section4 Sections TS S11 The nodes displayed in the views relate to the protocol layers as shown in the diagram below
309. ntrol is established The right icon shows the status of the TCP IP connection this icon is always displayed when the TCP IP connection is established and the left icon shows the lock status of the front panel buttons and mouse input There are two display states This shows that the TCP IP connection for remote con trol is established z This shows that the TCP IP connection for remote con trol is established and the front panel buttons and mouse input are locked by the SYSTem KLOCk STATe ON command To reset the lock status select the ESC key or send the SYSTem KLOCk STATe OFF command When the TCP IP connection is closed the remote status icons disappear MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Getting Started Hierarchical Display MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual The MPEG Player displays the selected transport stream using a hierarchical structure This section describes the hierarchical display and defines each icon you may encounter in the display The MPEG Player uses icons displayed in a hierarchical structure to show the interrelationship of transport stream components Figure 10 4 Additional information about each stream component such as PID and Table ID numbers is displayed next to each icon m Symi mpe MPEG Player Fie View Play Op 07 Utility eo H E iS TS Symi mpg Packets 1650000 26 PAT PID Ox0 TbID Ox0 TSID Ox1 Prg 5 GO PMT Pio 0x64 Tb
310. nual Carousel Analyzer Menus and Controls Workspace Window Management In addition to the generic Cascade and Tile options available from the window menu management of individual windows is provided through a submenu available by right clicking the title bar of the individual window Right click window title bar Docked Floating w MDI Child Docked to j MDI Child as Each window within the workspace can be designated as Docked Floating or as an MDI Child Docked When docked a window will be automatically placed against one of the four sides of the workspace For example selecting Docked gt Top will dock the selected window at the top of the workspace 4 Docked Floating MEI Child TEET MEI Child as w Lett Bottom 10 1056 Flight 1516 Osffec Pl MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 21 Carousel Analyzer Menus and Controls Floating Designating a window as floating allows it to be moved around on the monitor desktop independently of the Carousel Analyzer interface For example selecting Floating will allow the window to be moved anywhere on the desktop Docked MOI Child h Dockedto MDI Child as MDI Child Designating a window as an MDI Child allows it to be moved anywhere within the workspace The MDI Child submenu allows the window to be designated as Restored Minimized or Maximized Docked Floating w MOI Child 138 bytes
311. o beers el edhe ann Dave Wha gh oe Pat ake sa et ed 14 1 Starina Ne PROCLAIM asrah Ait aia in eed 2a le dk ia tr al haan ae 14 1 Minal ANPPCALANCe arin weet dh Meee WAN deh Hate a a wh ae des 14 2 Initig Ment OplOns 4 i345 ooh Le e wheat k Ree Wheel ae aeh 14 3 SCADE Mile Appearance i625 4 ahh deena Phe eheaeh APNE PLease tet 14 3 Opemne a Pile correria heehee Eh a ee saa het 14 4 Meno and Controls ereire en a EE eee E suas 14 7 MOBAT myrer ae r ee aa a e a A 14 7 OOMD AU seerste feces etn Soe e eer a ee A 14 9 DIAS BAL apna dnd ee owls eee ood eee ew d shape Daw See ie aA 14 10 Script File Editing and Encryption cccecccccccvees 14 11 Keyword Color Coding asiria koiak ari ion ed es ien eter ioe thee ead 14 11 PPAR EUS cea Ai hace eae Awe a nie A iy oa oe eR Re hae ut Ae ets Mae ate eet ed 14 11 ENC PION aingtAcdorenie se i N A a N A hats eee eee ee aa 14 12 Glossary MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual IX i eee General Safety Summary Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it To avoid potential hazards use this product only as specified Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures To Avoid Fire or Use Proper Power Cord Use only the power cord specified for this product and Personal Injury certified for the country of use Ground the Product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of t
312. o the new specification by the multiplex engine The engine is started from the Multiplex menu or via a toolbar button The source file is used as reference data by Multiplexer and the output written to a different file The illustration overleaf gives an overview of the Multiplex process 8 12 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Getting Started El FSI Tables CVET Tales CIT Tables ETT Table sei arsicn A Secticn O Fid 91 E7 0 1FFE FAT Tables Ad_Gs mpg Section View iols NGT Varsien 3 Section O Fid 916 O31 F FB Tahle_IN 199 A Sectior_lzngth 37 Table_ID_exbonston C ooo Yarin nimhe gt Curett_rest_ID True Sectio number 0 6 Last_section_no 0 Frotozel version U Et Tables_d fried 1 Tables Leseiptors_lengta b f Cee plus Structure 4 Data p changes gt u FSI Tables DYCT Tales CIT Tables ETT Table kae 4 Secticn 0 Fid 915 41FFB FAT Tables Ad_Ge mpg Section Viow _ oy x MGT Varsion 3 ection O Fid 1 7 Gs1FFE Tahle_In 199 Sectior_lenath 37 Table_ID_extension C oo Varin nimhe Curett_rext_ID True Sectior_number 0 Last_seclion_no Fretozel versio U e a Tables_Us f ried 1 B Tables G Lesciptaslenzti 6 E Cesvipluys Open Import Any file holding a recorded or synthesized sample of a stream that is conformant to the relevant standards can be opened See Opening an MPEG file Import
313. of all the TDTs TOTs or STTs in the selected stream are locked to the clock calendar of the operating system User Define Uses the user defined value to set the initial value When you select this option the list boxes for setting the initial date and time of the TDT TOT or STT are available MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 31 MPEG Player Menus and Controls 10 32 m ISDB P TS When you select this button the following ISDB P TS dialog box appears ISDB P TS ISDB Tsb Data Fate Auto Convert Play Mode ISDB T Loop by ISDB T Frame Play Mode 192 Format Treat as Partial TS Play Mode Data Rate Auto Convert Play Mode Sets whether to set the clock rate automatically when the ISDB Tss file isloaded When this option is enabled the clock rate is automatically set to 2048 1701 x 27 MHz and the elementary stream rate becomes constant regardless of the Fixed ES Rate setting Loop by ISDB T Frame Play Mode Sets whether to output the ISDB T transport stream in OFDM frames when looped When this option is not enabled the ISDB T transport stream is looped in packets Treat as Partial TS Play Mode Sets whether to output a stream file consisting of a 192 byte packet as a partial transport stream When this option is not enabled the stream is output in Non TS format MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Menus and Controls Update When you select this button th
314. ogram Methods available m Drag and drop copy only from the Examine TS window Programs view to the Navigator Programs view m Drag and drop copy move from another instance of Multiplexer to the Navigator Programs view In the Navigator Programs view programs can only be dropped onto the PAT node 8 78 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Tables Adding a New PSI SI Table Methods available m Highlight the PSI SI Tables level in the Navigator Tables view and select Add from the right click menu m Drag and drop copy only from the Examine TS window Tables view to the Navigator Tables view m Drag and drop copy move from another instance of Multiplexer to the Navigator Tables view Any Table that is defined in the selected standards and not already present can be added the transport stream To add a table to the transport stream click on PSI SI Tables in the Navigator Tables view 1 Highlight the PSI SI Tables level and select Add from the right click menu Navigator tek _sym1_test mpg ceea C 3 ElT_actu Modi H E NIT actu Delete H E PAT PMT Eut SDT_act gepn m TOT Paste H E TOT yuo section Data Import Section Data Properties Programs Tables Pids _ MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 79 Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views 8 80 This will open the Select
315. olumn Options The Options option under the View menu opens the dialog to select which columns of information are displayed in the table To modify the color schemes select the Colors option from the View Menu This opens the View Options dialog box View Options _ E i A column is shown for each option that is enabled These are indicated by a check mark Clicking on an option toggles it between being shown or hidden MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 11 9 Tracer Getting Started Split Window Operation 11 10 The main window may be split into two views each of which can be scrolled independently For example here is a split view showing the start of processing of an Audio stream in the upper view and the start of processing for a Video stream in the lower view File Edit Print ten Shov Help Fd Po Mean transport rate 3634149 Lbtts s E Fd Po Mean tansport rate 3034149 Lbtts s Fized Pid 65539 Audio TE eldtbeyrtes Bel000byter Rx F ape liste Sent aade If tt amd at tt h 0 len iQ J j Les rele Benene 43000 KHz Bitrate 132 kbit s eee eas peenees Cms rate of size 655 bytes Video 20 EB examination interval 1 0 frame period For Help press F1 1893 Trace records 1 Selected To split the window move the mouse pointer over the small horizontal bar at the top of the scroll bar This is the split window control As the mouse pointer moves over
316. om the stream itself When synthesizing a new transport stream any errors or warnings about the new stream are written to the Event Log between the start and completed messages The Category column indicates the type of event The subject or time of the event is shown in the Reference column and the details are given in the Comment column The complete text can be copied onto the windows clipboard using the Copy option from the right click menu The text can also be cleared with the Clear command Both commands are also available from the Edit menu MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 57 Multiplexer Views Examine Transport Stream Window 8 58 The Examine Transport Stream Examine TS window File gt Examine TS performs two main functions within the Multiplexer m It allows you to take an overview of a transport stream before subjecting it to full analysis m It allows tables and programs to be dragged and dropped from the examined stream to the file that is currently open in Multiplexer Examine Transport Stream M File Edit Menu Bar Filename D Streams BBCIAUG2 mpg File Interpretation ove T5 Rate 24 1 20 bibit Duration g ordra 3 Summary DEEE EIT _other_pf HE NIT_actual aE PAT cage EBD Transport Stream Id 4106 Version 12 Section D Pid 0 O40 ees fel PMT Views BEEE SDT_actual HE SOT_other He TOT Tables Programs Status Ready Aon MTS400 Series MPEG Test
317. on OK Selecting Cancel will abandon the change MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Version Timing The Version timing tab shows the time when the version will become current and the start and end times New values may be specified for any of these times Section properties Transport Stream ID 1 Version 0 Se Eg PID Version Timing Subtable Timing Start Time fonon 45065 4 Signalled As Current Time 0000145065 Stop Time 59 8394 M Transmit until end of transport stream Start Time Specifies the time at which sections of this version will start to appear in the transport stream Signaled As Current Time Controls the time when the sections with this version will have the current_next_field set to 1 By default when these sections start to appear in the transport stream the current_next_field of the section set to 0 To specify a version that is always current set the Start Time and Signaled As Current Time fields to the same value Transmit until end of transport stream Enables the section to be repeated until the end of the transport stream If the checkbox is disabled the Stop Time becomes active Stop Time Specifies the time after which no sections of this version will appear in the transport stream All of the times are in seconds taken from the start of the transport stream file Edit the values and select OK to change the timings
318. onents of a MPEG Test System product that includes the Buffer Analyzer are installed m Buffer Analyzer is configured with the detail message log output disabled m Tracer is set up ready for use A menu option is created under the Tektronix Start menu By default there is no desktop shortcut set up for Tracer The command line of Buffer Analyzer must be configured to output the detail message log in the format for the Tracer utility Processing will be slower when Buffer Analyzer is operating in the detail message configuration Enabling Detail Message To enable detail message logging the properties of an existing shortcut for Log Buffer Analyzer must be changed or a new shortcut must be created A shortcut is any program option in the start menu or program icon on the desktop To enable logging follow these steps 1 Create a new shortcut or select an existing shortcut Open the properties dialog for that shortcut Refer to your Windows user manual or online help for detailed instructions if required 2 By default the dialog box opens with the General tab on top Select the Shortcut Tab 11 2 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Tracer Getting Started The dialog box should now look something like this Tektronix Buffer Analyser Properties Ei ES General Shortcut Tektronix Buffer Analyser Target type Application Target location MPEG TestSystem Target ii mpeg mts400 apps buffer_analyser g
319. onix 77 74 0 o e DA 21 k p m pm a t 4 byte Packet Header colour coded magenta adaptation field colour coded blue If transport private data is present it is shown in green Displayed Packet 17297 PID 179 0000 47 UU Ba se Uy Lou BD Or bo oO oe Oo Ul UD oe Seeds coe ee x 0010 4 jFa 0020 F en 0030 EA eT Gigs ab i co Ro G 16 H 1 FC 14 ie ETa A byte Packet Header calour Adaptation Field Transport Private colour coded blue Data colour coded coded magenta green NOTE It is possible to define a transport private data area that is not contained within the adaptation field area specified by the adaptation field length MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Transport Stream Editor Hex Editor Selecting amp Editing One or more bytes can be selected using either the hexadecimal or ASCII view Changes are made using options from the menus and by typing new values in the hexadecimal view When the mouse pointer is moved over either of the views in the Hex Editor the pointer changes to the Text Select pointer Individual Bytes To edit a byte or character position the mouse pointer over the desired character in either the ASCII or hexadecimal view Then click the left mouse button A flashing inverse video cursor appears to the left of the character Alternatively double click either view of the byte to select it for use
320. ons result in seamless output or none Enabling the Seamless option Toggle the Seamless option by selecting Multiplex gt Seamless or the toolbar button oS Multiples irony Help Start Stop Standard Mode Expert Mode i E P a eo Report le T oe Seamless Settirugs Er MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 117 Multiplexer Make Seamless Seamless Settings Open the Seamless Settings dialog box by selecting Multiplex gt Seamless Settings The dialog box shown below is displayed Seamless Settings Ea Priority program FSI settings Make PSI seamless J First program in PAT has priority Make remaining programs seamless Priority Program f Cancel Defaults Priority Program First program in PAT has priority If this setting is enabled the first program specified in the PAT will be given priority in the make seamless pro cess If the setting is disabled the priority program can be specified in the Priority Program The number can be deduced by inspecting the results of the transport stream analysis PSI Settings Make PSI seamless If enabled the service information contained in the transport stream is processed to make it seamless If the setting is disabled the PSI SI is not processed but simply copied to the output transport stream Make remaining programs seamless If enabled the remaining programs are made seamle
321. open for analysis The menu options available when no stream is open are as follows File Menu Options Table 6 1 lists the options in the initial File menu Table 6 1 File menu options Option Function Open Opens an MPEG transport stream for analysis The program opens the file selection dialogue allowing the user to choose the required file Print Setup Opens a dialog for selecting which printer and associated options to use 1 lt lt filename gt gt A list of the four most recently analyzed files If the program 2 lt lt filename gt gt has recently been installed the list may be empty or hold less 3 lt lt filename gt gt than four files 4 lt lt filename gt gt Selecting a filename opens that file for analysis Exit Finishes running the program View Menu Options Table 6 2 lists the options in the initial View menu Table 6 2 View menu options Option Function Toolbars gt Submenu shows or hides the toolbar Transport Packet Bar Shows or hides the Transport Packet Bar Status Bar Shows or hides the status bar MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 5 Carousel Analyzer Getting Started Stream Interpretation Script Selection And Manipulation 6 6 Analysis Menu Options Table 6 3 lists the options in the initial Analysis menu Table 6 3 Analysis menu options Option Function Set Interpretation gt Select the Digital TV standard to be used for stream analysis Settings
322. open the PID Entry dialog When all the mappings are specified select the Remap button The Remap button is not enabled unless one or more mappings has been specified MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Transport Stream Editor PID Remapping Remap PIDs E4 To remap a FID value first select a PID entry and ether double click or press the Edit button Then press the Remap button to perform the remapping The hourglass mouse pointer is displayed while the program performs the remapping On completion the dialog box closes and control is returned to the main window MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 31 ee PCR Recalculation The Program Clock References to one or all Programs can be changed The rate can be changed and or any one of six types of jitter added Uses of PCR Recalculation include m Recalculating the rate at the correct value without adding jitter on a recording of a faulty stream can be used to remove suspected PCR problems If the recalculated stream works correctly the problem is in the PCR m Creating test data with known deviations in rate for exercising other equipment NOTE Do not perform PCR Recalculation on an original recording This operation is not reversible so it is strongly recommended that a copy of the original file is used To modify the PCR select the PCR Recalculation option from the Tools menu t MPEG 2 TS Editor No File TEM Tools Remap PIDs
323. or PCR Recalculation Random The PCR jitter applies offsets of a uniform random distribution to the ideal values of the PCRs Each offset will be within the range of the specified amplitude Select Jitter Parameters You have selected to add the hollowing Jitter Function dither Functor Random 7 Please specify the parameters applicable oho this dither function Mas Amplitude nz fi O Digital video Broadcasting Max Amplitude Specifies the maximum amplitude of the jitter relative to the ideal value that can be added to any PCR Only a positive value can be entered The amplitude is always from Max Amplitude to Max Amplitude centered on the ideal PCR value Gaussian The offsets are applied to the ideal PCR values following a Gaussian distribution according to the specified standard deviation Select Jitter Parameters You have selected to add the hollowing Jitter Function dither Function Gaussian SW Please specify the parameters applicable to this Jither function Standard Deviation ns fi Digital video Broadcasting Standard Deviation Specifies the standard deviation to be used by the jitter function in deriving the offset for each PCR relative to the ideal PCR value Only a positive value can be entered for standard deviation MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 41 MPEG Player Getting Started The MPEG Recorder amp Player generates and captures MPEG 2 transpor
324. or the root nodes Boot Class and Assets MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 73 Carousel Analyzer Application Support The elements of the New Application Definition dialog box are as follows Object Carousels tab This displays all of the object carousels in the current transport stream Note that if the current transport stream carries no object carousels then none will be displayed here The example screenshot below shows the Object Carou sels displayed in the New Application Definition dialog box overlaid onto the standard Object Carousel views ae Feteone Carrie aAncaieer bbclampg Eie Edt View Window Help l ree 1 l ath 1Y Ie New Application Definition 7 ane Service 4167 BBC ONE EE In computer Hi Service 4231 BBC TWO Sea Object Carousels a Serice 4351 BBC CHOICE BEM 1D 0 0x0 PID 650 x28 Bl Service 4415 BBC NEWS 24 Pi ID 0 0x0 PID 652 028c BM Senice 4479 BBC TEXT Gm 1D 0 0x0 PID 661 0x295 wen OO Sh COU N messages on PID 650 O26 tag 101 0 65 Hoon DSM CC O N messages on PID 651 0x28 tag 102 0x66 save wen DSM COU N messages on PID 652 0s28e tag 103 0 67 ome Object Carousels Object Carousel ID O 020 05110 0 020 PID 650 0x28 a z Object Carousel ID O ORO DSI ID 32767 O57 FF PID 652 0428 Bie Service 45435 BBC PARLMNT oe Fal MPEG 1 Audio on PID EGD 06294 tag 1 0871 room DSM CC U N messages on PID
325. ou use the external trigger signal to record the input stream if the pretrigger portion is defined the MPEG Player acquires pretrigger data when a valid trigger signal occurs and then waits for a trigger When a valid trigger signal occurs again the MPEG Player acquires posttrigger data and then creates a stream file SPI Output Enable This item cannot be accessed from the Record screen Select the OK button to enable all setting changes MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 41 MPEG Player Menus and Controls SPI ASI 310M Interface Menu SPI ASI 310M Option Record Utility Menu Toolbar Buttons 10 42 Table 10 14 SPI ASI 310M menu command Record screen Command Description Input Port Selects either DVB SPI In SPI or ASI SMPTE In BNC connector for recording input BNC Port Selects either ASI or 310M SMPTE 310 as BNC input The Utility menu contains commands for displaying the system information such as software and hardware versions The Utility menu in the Record screen is the same as that of the Play screen Refer to Table 10 11 for detailed information The toolbar provides shortcut buttons for many of the most often used menu commands Click a toolbar button to select the corresponding command Toolbar button Table 10 15 shows the toolbar buttons and their functions Table 10 15 Toolbar button descriptions la LOAD TS file Opens the Select File dialog box Equivalent to the Op
326. ous section 1 With the Object Carousel view active select View gt Timing gt Application Timing labia face Anese bbcla mpg Eile Edit View Window Help my ae i Toolbars COA Transport Packet Bar bbe a mpg E Status Bar eela aN El O bject Carousels H Object Carousel ID 0 00 D E Object Carousel ID O 0x0 D Object Carousel ID 0 0x0 D kn Programs Services fei UN Downoad EF Object Carousels gii Data Carousels i PIDs B Log E HOE Message UA Hesse Section bed anepo Packet Tranenort Packet ret Hes Mimp Eil Application Timing Carrier BY Entit epele time Resources BT Entity cucle time aranh Alternatively highlight an object carousel and select View Application Timing from the right click menu not shown MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 85 Carousel Analyzer Application Support 2 The Timing Application dialog is displayed The dialog displays the selected object carousel identity and the applications that are already defined Time Application Carousel ID O 0x0 PID BET 0295 Test application Sans BL Treat intermediate ae E directories as assets Applications Description lnwitet audience reaction Boot class found O out of 5 assets found T Calculate cold boot time Cancel Applications to be associated with the object carousel are selected by enabling the adjacent checkbox Highlighting an
327. out File Menu Options Table 9 1 list the File menu options Table 9 1 File menu options Command Open Close 1 lt filename gt 2 lt filename gt 3 lt filename gt 4 lt filename gt Print Print Preview Print Setup Exit Function Opens a file for editing If a file is currently open it is closed when a new file is selected Closes the current file There is no need for a save option because all changes are written to file immediately A list of the four most recently edited files If the program has recently been installed the list may be empty or hold less than four files Prints the current packet Opens a print preview of the current packet Selects printer and configuration Closes any file that is open and terminates execution of the program Edit Menu Options Table 9 2 list the Edit menu options Table 9 2 Edit menu options Command Undo Redo Copy Copy Packet Paste MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Function Undoes the last edit restoring the previous value Selecting undo again undoes the previous change Reinstates the previously undone change Copies the bytes that are currently selected in the Hexadecimal Editor from the packet to the clipboard The bytes are copied using the hex representation Copies the entire contents of the current packet to the clipboard Pastes hexadecimal from the clipboard into the packet starting at the currently selected byte
328. ows The values displayed are those of the currently selected node Log Window The Log window displays errors and warnings as the carousel building and stream generation progresses A full description of the Carousel Generator screen components can be found in the Menus and Controls page 7 23 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual OO A Carousel Wizard The Carousel Wizard makes the process of creating a single carousel easier The carousel is added to the current session The final step of the wizard allows a transport stream to be created using the information in the current session Default parameters are provided at all stages of the wizard but the user can change them either in the wizard screens or subsequently in the various property dialog boxes The description in this section provides an overview of the wizard and carousel creation Individual properties and activities are described in more detail in the Reference section Extensive tooltips are provided with the wizard screens Place the cursor over any element of a screen to reveal the tooltip If a carousel session is in progress the user must decide whether a new session is required or a new carousel is to be added to an existing session To start a new carousel session select File gt New Carousel Session Ele Edit View Session Player Tools Jew Carousel Session Ctrl N en Carousel Session Ctrl O ave Carousel Session Ctrl S Save Carousel Session As
329. ows operations that make sense in the context of the selected table type The properties that can be edited from the Navigator Tables view are MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 85 Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views 8 86 PID Number The PID tab is displayed by default when the Section Properties dialog box is opened Section properties Transport Stream ID 1 Version 0 Se Eg PID Version Timing Subtable Timing Edit the value and select OK to change the PID number Edit the value and select Apply to make the changes and update the other properties tabs without having to close this dialog box Multiplexer checks the new PID number against the selected standards and warns of any non conformance issues If a conflict is found a warning message is displayed with the option to continue Multiplexer also checks for conflicts with other PIDs If the new PID number conflicts with an existing PID an error message is displayed and the change is rejected in this case either choose a different PID number for the table or edit the number of the PID that is currently the owner If no conflict is found another dialog box is opened to define the scope of the changes Apply Section Properties Apply the PID change te Cancel All sections of this version All sections with the same table id and extension All sections with the same table id Select the required scope and click
330. ows the number of unresolved links at each pass MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 11 Carousel Analyzer Getting Started 6 12 Carousel Analyser Resolving links E Streame Map 4pole ation Lifetime Vievw 4bel mpg Pass 3 Stream position G4 7o Mew Unresabyved links hs 4 links Analysis can be halted at any time by selecting the Stop button in the dialog box the stream is still opened but only the elements that have been analyzed so far will be displayed By default the Services window and the Log window open as soon as a stream file opens Further windows can be opened by using the View Menu or the Toolbar Note that although the options on the View menu remain the same they are enabled or disabled according to which protocol element is highlighted at the time ae Tekiona Carousel Anokeser 0OC_abcd mpg Ele Edit View Graph Window Help Services Wersion Size PID WE Service 1 c_source E reon DSM CC U N messages on PID 150 0496 Ep Object Carousels Seer Object Carousel ID 3 0x3 DSI ID 0 0 J Service Gateway is OC _abed mpg Log Summary Log Entries oA Analysis Started 10 06 07 PID Filter PID fo lt gt P Facket 0 Goto eady ites uration 40 z pils Read DWB 4 000000 Mbit duration 40 000 106363 k 2 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Menus and Controls The following pages contain descriptions of the menu options toolbar controls status
331. p E wit Alternatively use the Ctrl O keyboard shortcut There is also a shortcut button available on the Toolbar for opening a file which has the standard file open symbol MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Script Pad Getting Started 2 Script Parser Files File View Help On opening the script file is displayed in the working area oi Script Parser Files SCP Copy of DYE scp K File Edit View Window Script Help oleja JWA a AAA AEN File DYB scp Description SCP Script for DYB Tables see EN 300 468 v1 3 1 IMPORTANT NOTE This script file contains the standard definition of the DVB tables Change COPIES of this script and not the original Copies should have this note removed Revision 17 SModtime 12 04 00 5 27 p Change History 15 3 99 K Skilling CREATED 2 6 00 hd Norman Updated to al3 rl 2 9 00 hd Yhite Updated validation and formatting if AREA TEE RT TT TT TTT eT ee et ee ee eee eee ee tT eT Te Tee ee eee eee TT eT TT TTT TTT HEE include D BEnums scp include D BDescriptors scp if Override default to allow MPEG and DYB to be used together H Built in default is DYB only validation descriptor tag descriptor_tag gt Ox40 descriptor_tag OxFE descriptor tag gt 0x02 8 descriptor tag lt Ox15 Viewing and editing can start immediately Note that multiple script files can be open simultaneously MTS400 Series MPE
332. p Script for PAT and CAT sections Biop scp Scripts for BIOP messages DSMCC_DataCarouselObject scp Script for DSM CC objects which relate a Data Carousel DSMCC_DataCarouselSection scp Script for DSM CC sections which relate a Data Carousel DSMCC_ObjectCarouselObject scp Script for DSM CC objects which relate an Object Carousel DSMCC_ObjectCarouselSection scp Script for DSM CC sections which relate an Object Carousel DSMCC_ Object Script for DSM CC objects whose content is not assumed to be either data or objects Error Checking DSM CC sections have two bit fields called section_syntax_indicator and private_indicator Ref 13818 6 section 9 2 2 If the section_syntax_indicator field is 1 there is a CRC32 at the end of the section if set to 0 there is a checksum at the end of the section The private_data field should always be the complement of the section_syntax_indicator field If both these fields are set to the same value the application cannot be absolutely sure whether a CRC or a checksum is being used It therefore attempts to use the CRC method first and then the checksum If neither method works the section is rejected Currently nothing will be reported in the error logs if these bits are set incorrect ly This issue will be addressed in a future release of Carousel Analyzer 6 96 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Reference Acronyms and Abbreviations AIT ARIB BIO
333. pdated throughout the stream to reflect the passing of time The default setting of the initial value will be the time the generation is started but this can be changed to any user defined value To edit the Time Date Table parameters highlight the Time Date Table node and select Properties form the right click menu The Time Date Table Properties dialog box is displayed ool PCR PID 87190 UXT FFE jj 18 DVB SI EPET ime Date Table B Network 10 0 0 7 GSE E Transport Sti Y cut 3 Program 1 Prog 1 P 5 Co MHP Object Care ie Baste is Elementary Strea mE Time Date Table Cycle Time 1000 m Start Time Cancel f Use stream generation start time Use this time Date far January 2000 Time 00 00 00 Cycle Time gives the frequency at which the time and date information should be repeated in the generated stream MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 75 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Elementary Streams and Audio and video elementary can be imported and incorporated into the generated Programs stream Subsequently the imported streams can be associated with one or more programs Importing Elementary Streams 1 Inthe Programs view highlight the Elementary Streams node and select Import Elementary Stream s from the right click menu ol ee ee Ler EEE Transport Stream NetID 0 TS ID 0 Elementary Steams A gt Impo
334. perties from the right click menu The dialog box thus displayed Program Stream Properties is similar to the Add Program Stream dialog box shown on page 8 97 Deleting a PES PID An elementary stream can be removed from the multiplex by deleting the PID To delete a PID highlight the required PID and select Delete from the right click menu Then select the Delete option from the Edit or Pop Up menus Alterna tively click the delete button from the toolbar Multiplexer asks for confirmation before removing the PID from the multiplex Select Yes to delete the stream or No to abandon the operation and leave the stream unchanged MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 99 Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views DSM CC Adding an Unreferenced Methods available DSM CC Section Highlight the ES PIDs node in the Navigator Tables view and select Add from the right click menu m Drag and drop copy only from the Examine TS window Tables view to the Navigator Tables view m Drag and drop copy move from another instance of Multiplexer to the Navigator Tables view Adding an unreferenced DSM CC section is similar to adding an unreferenced elementary stream see page 8 92 with the following modifications In the Source tab of the Add Stream dialog box select Transport Packets Sections as the File type and set the bit rate Add Stream x PID Source Timing PCR File name C Steams caranm bbcl spid661 d
335. pid and sectors Time aa Demultiples compet Dernultiple bitrate 323 LM bits A Mut Filer OFF DWE TS te 58 O147MLiL s Dural S908 Salad Realy a Transport streams TS elementary streams ES packetized elementary streams PES Packet Identifiers PID all can be selected manipulated and recom bined to form customized synthesized transport streams The functionality provided includes m Wizards that facilitate the completion of common tasks such as populating streams with Program Specific Information Service Information Program and System Information Protocol PSI SI PSIP and programs Table contents are displayed in and edited from structure diagrams tree diagrams MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 1 Multiplexer Getting Started 8 2 Transport Streams that either conform strictly to the standards selected for interpretation or have precisely engineered known non conformances Two or more instances of Multiplexer can run concurrently This allows table information to be copied from one file to another m The source data for non conformant streams can be saved in a raw format which can be quickly reloaded as the basis for generating more stream data Conformance of edits to the standards is checked interactively and enforced by default Checking and enforcement may be turned off when specifying non conformances to be introduced into the new transport stream On opening
336. play the selected stream MPEG2 ARIB DVB ATSC S TMCC M TMCC or Non TS In the Record screen this indicator shows the standard used to display the input stream Packet Size In the Play screen this indicator displays the packet size in bytes 188 204 208 or Non TS of the stream output In the Record screen this indicator displays the packet size in bytes of the input stream Clock Source This indicator displays the source of the reference clock internal or external used for the stream output Bit Rate In the Play screen this indicator displays the bit rate Mbps of the stream output In the Record screen this indicator displays the bit rate Mbps of the input stream RAM free space In the Play screen this indicator shows the RAM free space that can be used to output the selected stream In the Record screen this indicator shows the RAM free space that can be used to record the input stream Output Source Record Target In the Play screen this indicator shows the output source used to output the selected stream In the Record screen this indicator shows the record target used to record the input stream This indicator is the same as the output source record target indicator of the Play Record Status indicator MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 5 MPEG Player Getting Started 10 6 Remote Connection Status Icons The remote connection status icons appear when a TCP IP connection for remote co
337. positive number or smaller negative num ber Changing this value may cause the resultant stream to be non conformant with respect to the T STD of the MPEG 2 standard Enter the DTS offset in seconds required Only enabled for elementary stream types This number specifies the value of the stream_id field in the PES packet header Only needs to be set for DVB stream Stream identity in the PES header Start each field in a new pes packet Only enabled when File Type MPEG 2 Video is se lected When disabled both field pictures making up a coded frame are put in a single PES packet Otherwise each field picture is put into a separate PES packet This set ting has no effect upon frame pictures MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Start each section in a new packet Only enabled when File Type Section is selected When disabled SI data is placed in the packet payloads in the most efficient manner The start of a section will immediately follow the end of the previous section no stuffing bytes will be used When enabled each section will begin in a new packet and stuffing bytes will be used to pad out any payloads that are not full Defining the Stream Timing In the Add Stream dialog box select the Timing tab this will allow timing parameters for the selected source stream to be defined PID Source Timing PCR Start bine fo z Stop kime 11 86507045
338. pplication Descriptor Name TS 101 812 identity Initial Path DVB HTML Application Location Descriptor Physical Root Drive DVB HTML Application Location Descriptor Parameter String DVB HTML Application Descriptor 7 64 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Synchronicity Directory objects included in carousels are simply references to directories that exist elsewhere for example a PC hard drive If the Include in Synchronization checkbox is enabled for a directory the directory will be included in the Synchronization process When Session gt Synchronise is selected the source directory structure is matched with the carousel directory structure Any objects missing from either the source directory structure or the carousel directory structure are listed in the Synchronizing MHP Object Carousel dialog box as shown in the following screenshot Synchronising MHP Object Carousel ID 1 PID 100 Prog 1 While building a carousel it is possible that the source directories and the carousel contents can become out of step Firstly a directory on the source drive may gain new files or directories not present when the directory was originally added Secondly links to files or directories on the source drive s may become invalid due to file deletion or disk removal These inconsistencies can be automatically resolved using this dialog Select the options required and uncheck any item
339. process and allow the program to be reselected Note that the Abort button which replaces the Cancel button is only displayed during processing When the file has been analyzed a number of messages will have been posted in the Progress amp Information log MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 12 9 Make Seamless Wizard Selecting a Multiplex Output File 12 10 When a file has been analyzed and found suitable for making seamless an output file must be named Tektronix MakeSeamless Wizard Multiplex 12 53 51 Searching far other PIDs loop start points 13 00 09 Unable to find a loop start point for every PID 13 00 09 Searching for priority PID loop finish point 13 00 09 Search tor priority PID loop finish point complete 13 00 09 Searching for other PIDs loop Finish points Digital video 13 00 11 Search for other PIDs loop finish points complete Broadcasting A new filename can be typed or an existing file selected using the Browse button in which case confirmation of the replacement will be required Select Next to create the multiplexed output file MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Make Seamless Wizard The screen shown below is displayed upon completion of the process Tektronix MakeS eames Wizard Summary SLT Ant 13 00 03 Unable totind a loop start pont for svam PID 13 00 09 Searching har pianly PID lace trish pert 130003 Sesrth lot prot PID loop inih panl
340. pulated 12 4 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Make Seamless Wizard Add Remove Scripts Script Files OVE sco W Tektronixscp Delete Move Up Move Down View Script There is in effect one Script File list associated with each mode script files can be listed in one or more Script file lists Script files are designated as MPEG DVB or ATSC when they are added to the Script File list Each mode will display only those script files associated with that mode Further script files can be added as required using the Add New button Note that a script file will not be used for analysis until m Itis added to the Script File list in the appropriate mode m tis enabled displays a check mark in the Script File list Adding a Script File 1 Inthe Script dialog box select the Mode to which the script is to be added for example DVB 2 Select the Add New button A standard Windows file selection dialog box is opened The default file extension is scp Select the required file Note that the selected script file is now listed in the script file list and is enabled it will be used for any analysis Enabling a Script File Select the check mark adjacent to the required script file to enable the file for analysis MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 12 5 Make Seamless Wizard Moving a Script File Script files are applied to analysis in the order that they are listed in some circumst
341. quency i 23700 GHz Orbital Position 19 e degrees aj Transport Stream l Deliver System West east lag westem C Eastern Polarisation 0 00 linear horizontal Modulation 0x01 BPSK Symbol Rate 27 sooo Mdsymbols Inner FEC scheme 0 03 3 4 conv code rate OK Cancel 7 90 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream Service Description Table SDT Table 7 21 Service Description Table SDT Table Syntax CG Value Comment service description section table _id section syntax_indicator reserved future use reserved section length transport_stream_ id reserved version number current_next_indicator section number last_section number original_ network _id reserved future use for i 0 i lt N i service _id reserved future use EIT schedule flag EIT present following flag running status free_ca_mode descriptors loop length for j 0 j lt N j descriptor CRC 32 0x42 SDT actual CG does not generate SDT other sections 0x3 user Matches the transport_stream_id of the actual transport stream 0x3 CG does not support table versioning user Matches the original network _id of the actual transport stream OxFF CG auto generates an ent
342. r BBCIAUG 7_mpg of ORs eee lol Tables H EIT_actual_pf m e EIT_other_pt He NIT_actual H E PANT I PHT oo SBD Program 416 version 12 Secton 0 Fid 4167 021047 AD Program 4237 Version 6 Section O Pid 4231 011027 AD Program 4357 Version 24 Section 0 Pid 4357 0x1 0FF mo Fragram 44175 Version 11 Section 0 Fid 4415 0811 SF SE Program 447 9 Version 4 Section O Pid 4479 0117 F m 5 Frogram 4543 Version 4 Section O Pid 4543 0118F 4 28 SOT actual m e SDT_other e TOT In the Filter SI Display dialog box table identities are listed in the Table Id drop down menu Table ID O02 2 PHAT 0x03 3 TS_descniption Os40 64 NIT actual All sections of a table can be excluded by enabling the Exclude all table sections checkbox Table ID 002 PMT Clear All Apply Exclude all table sections ie Exclude ali table sections N ees To preview the result of filtering select the Apply button 8 62 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Views Note that all reference to the PMT tables is removed as shown below Navigator BECIAUG 7_mpg oj ORs a PSI SI Tables H EIT_actual_pt E e ElT_other_pi fg NIT_actual m e PAT a e SDT_actual E e SDT_other m e TOT To exclude a range of sections enable the section by selecting from the Table ID drop down list and entering the required range Note that section names shown in the dialog box
343. r Transport Analyzer or Multiplexer causes the output stream to be regenerated using the current session properties This ensures that the properties that have been entered in the Carousel Generator are the same as those shown in the Carousel Analyzer Transport Analyzer or Multiplexer When enabled a message will be displayed during stream generation if an error occurs which causes the stream generation to terminate The error will always be reported in the TS Generation tab of the Log window New Session Defaults This screen provides default values to be used for all new sessions and conse screen quently in the carousel definition files and generated transport streams The default values can originate from a template or be set individually The values can be overridden in individual carousel sessions Carousel Generator Options m General gew session Defaults Event Eror messages New Session Defaults Automatically set the default values when the output stream properties of an empty carousel definition file are edited Use this file as startup template Use the following settings at startup TS Bitrate 3 00 Mbitses Duration Use minimum duration of 20 seconds PSI SI Type DVB SI W Wam before changing SI type Output File c temp carousel mpg baal Ask i Startup Template MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Select this option and identify a file to be used as
344. r a change can be made at any time before generation of the stream Switching SI types may involve some loss of data or some creation of default values When switching from MPEG PSI to DVB SI default values are applied to the TDT and Network information the Transport Stream ID will be copied Switching from DVB SI to MPEG PSI requires only the Transport Stream ID to be copied In this phase any user changes to the default values in the DVB SI properties will be lost and will need to be reentered if the SI type is changed back to DVB or a new session is created The EIT and SDT information is maintained between switching SI type as it is stored in the Program Properties The tables will simply not be generated if the type is MPEG To switch between SI types during a session highlight the SI node in the Programs view and select the required SI Type from the right click menu MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 73 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation 7 74 Li Demo xml Tektronix Carousel Generator File Edit View Session Player Tools Help es Hi Rest a ATIS Carousels Carousel Session 1 Program 1 Carousel pl RD Clock Reference 1 PCA only PID E Program 1 Prbo 1 PMT PID 1100 0044C Aa Elementary Streams My Elementary Streams Carousels B Collections Programs Figure 7 1 MPEG PSI a 2 Demo xml Tektronix Carousel Generator 7 MHP Object Caro
345. r the posttrigger area keeps the specified size In this case the size of the File A is smaller than the specified size Trigger event File 400 MB S00 ME Trigger event File B 500 MB 500 MB SS Pretrigger area Posttrigger area m If the second trigger event occurs while the posttrigger area is filled with data the second trigger event is ignored Trigger events File A 500 MB 500 MB Trigger event File B 500 MB 500 MB Pretrigger area __ Posttrigger area NOTE If the trigger position is set to 0 each file is created whenever a trigger event Occurs MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 51 MPEG Player Reference Performing Continuous Recording Use the following procedure to perform Continuous Recording 1 2 3 4 10 52 Select File gt Save to open the Save dialog box In the dialog box select the folder where stream files are to be saved Select Record gt Target to open the Target dialog box In the dialog box select the Continuous Recording check box 33 1 GB Free Record Size Limit record size to 00 00 ems 50 MB Trigger Position J 00 o0 00 thms NB Continyous Fecording Pi a To the right of the check box set the number of files to be continously recorded After the specified number of files are created stream capture stops automatically In the Record Size field set the file size to be recorded In the Trigger
346. r minimum duration for the output transport stream if required 19 Enter or select a an Output File name 20 Select Next to display Step 8 Congratulations MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 21 Carousel Generator Carousel Wizard Step 8 Congratulations Carousel Wizard 8 Congratulations The carousel is now prepared If the option to create the transport stream is enabled then all carousels in the current session will be included The carousel created with the wizard will be added to the session screen 21 Select Finish to exit the wizard 7 22 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual ee Menus and Controls The following pages contain descriptions of different menu options toolbar controls status bar log window and properties window Menus Options The following pages describe all of the menu options Since many of the options are context sensitive they will be available only when their function is appropri ate for the selected window or display element When a menu option is not available the option is grayed out File Menu Options Table 7 1 File menu options Option Function New Carousel Session Opens a new carousel session An opportunity to save the current session is offered if relevant Open Carousel Session Opens an existing carousel session using a saved carousel definition file Save Carousel Session Saves the current carousel session in the form of a carousel defin
347. r not enabled 042008 Loading template 27 4 g wfarnings E Errors H Definition File eros Cancel The Log view which can be displayed as part of the main application displays a series of status and error messages which advise the user of the progress of carousel and stream generation MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 37 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation 7 38 This screen allows the user to indicate which messages should be displayed The Log view contains three tabbed screens Summary Definition File Syntax and TS Generation These correspond to the message categories Summary messages Definition File errors and TS Generation errors in this screen Each message category contains four levels of severity Events Warnings Errors and Fatal Errors Individual messages that can be displayed in the Log view are listed at each level Message Selection The checkmarks associated with each message icon indicate the reporting status of the message i amp Enabled permanent this message type will always be reported in the log view GG Enabled disabled toggle this message type is enabled disabled by the user It will only be reported in the log view when enabled If one or more of the subsidiary message types in a category Events Warnings Errors is disabled this icon is displayed All messages in the Summary category and Fatal Error messages in all categories are all permanently e
348. r opens a standard file browser dialog box to specify the file name and path for the synthesized transport stream A new file can be created or an existing file can be selected to be overwritten The program will seek confirmation before writing over an existing file NOTE The Multiplexer automatically creates 188 byte packets in the transport stream output file regardless of the source material size MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 111 Multiplexer Multiplexing Transport Streams Errors and Reporting 8 112 The right pane of the status bar indicates progress as the Multiplex Engine synthesizes the new transport stream ATSC TS Rate 19 393 Mbit s Duration 6 00626 s Standard GG GGG Z Any errors are recorded in the Event Log which can be opened at any time before after and during processing Here is an example where a table cannot be multiplexed into the new stream at the specified rate Event Log 0 5treams MuxTest temp mpg Comment Time 13 44 40 Demultiples started Information Found PAT Information Stream bitrate is 24 1 283M bits Information Stream length is 31 8748s Information Found 34 pids and 113 sections Time 13 44 46 Demultiplex complete Derultiples bitrate 134 738M bits Warning Program 4479 Version 4 Section O Pid 4479 011 F Elementary PID 651 08286 in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 4479 Version 4 Section 0 Pid 4479 0211 7F Elementary PID 652 0828
349. r to Adding Jitter to PCRs on page 10 46 for more information Table 10 6 describes the PCR Inaccuracy dialog box parameters PCR Inaccuracy PCR Inaccuracy Patten period Packets Amplitude 27MHz 0 00ne Cancel Figure 10 5 PCR Inaccuracy dialog box Table 10 6 PCR Inaccuracy dialog box parameters Parameter Description Pattern Selects the waveform type of the waveform used to add jitter You can select Sine Square Triangle Pulse Sawtooth Random or Offset Period Sets the period of the waveform used to add jitter You can set the value from 5 to 3000 packets in 1 packet steps Amplitude Sets the amplitude of the waveform used to add jitter You can set the value from 0 27 MHz to 135000000 27 MHz 0 s to 5 s Pulse Width Sets the pulse width of the waveform used to add jitter You can set the value from 1 to period 1 packet s in 1 packet steps This Pulse Width parameter is available only when the Pattern parameter is set to Pulse 10 18 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Menus and Controls This section describes the function of each selection available in the menus This section is divided into the following subsections Menus in the Play Screen describes all of the menu commands and their features available in the Play screen Menus in the Record Screen describes all of the menu commands and their features available in the Record screen Toolbar Buttons describes the toolbar buttons an
350. ra Gane ates wane eset acne eke eieatemrnee as INAVICALOE VIEWS 2 2 02 rie eriaren re eked oes eee ios SCCHOM EEE tet a Bang tive pach ne EE have etek eee ae Structure Diagram Manipulation cc ccc eee eee VC E E Oe a esr se Ar tena E E E E E aun Ges E EE E Examine Transport Stream Window 0c cece cece srren neo SETU MA eese othe E E EE R epee N COMPOREMU VICWS sirri rna a Rad Steer E bed Bp ee es Common Ment Opuons 4 2 2 25 2 2ii 2cbndhsrticedtin sited daototes be4 Editing in the Navigator ViewS cccccccccccccccccccees Dia andro p s2tiasan su uehes poets Ghee cee asenenecaoseces Transport Sed 2200 6 20ascnoeeacnsas Oo aaeane eee Osea oes PIOSTAIMN Gus 3 45 cence Osea ane eens Osea ae A osseous TADICS Ae nc eed neon ota eater EINES ESTEE ESETET ETETETT SECHONS VAsceccecses oceans eesti ota E A ost noasane Rea alb EREET EEIN ES ona ELTETE E EEEL ASETE oud DSNVECG 2 pape rine e ae E ENET E E E E A EN EA Editing in Section View sssssssssccsoooooosseessooooo Fditine Piclds yaek ni erer On e eee heel el a Aa E Renee Multiplexing Transport Streams cccccccccccccccccens E AE EAE EEE E A E ES NOES avs EANA EEN EA T OE ET EN S Emors And REPOMING seein ebaentes ead eee aa Eea aea aa SLOP assess EEE T IEA EOE A ESANS EA EEEE E Ewe AE S T A AE Exporting the Multiplex Configuration File Make Seamless essrri beste he aE oa ee Enabling the Seamless OplOn 4 2 xici ci ct ne bev e r in E eak ahead DEAMICSS
351. rd ETSI EN 301 192 Specification for the transmission of data services in DVB bitstreams the DVB implementation guidelines for data broadcasting allow support for multiple Object Carousels per program by allowing the carousel_identifier_descriptor to be transmitted in the second descriptor loop of the PMT DVB Guideline The carousel_identifier_descriptor shall be inserted in the second descriptor loop of the PMT ES_info corresponding to the elementary stream carrying the DSI of the object carousel This allows more than one object carousel per MPEG program and implicitly identifies the PID on which each carousel should be booted from TR 101 202 Implementation Guidelines for Data Broadcasting section 4 7 7 1 Carousel Generator therefore transmits a carousel_identifier_descriptor for every DVB Object Carousel in a program as specified by this implementation guideline MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 85 Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream DVB also extends the carousel _identifier_descriptor slightly by defining the contents of the private_data_byte section further with what it calls a FormatSpe cifier However CarouselGenerator only uses the required parts of this extension it sets the Formatld to zero which indicates that no format specifier is provided Table 7 15 DVB object carousels Private_data_byte syntax Private_data_byte syntax CG Value Comment carousel _identifier pr
352. re The default view of a section of an ETT in the Section View looks like this Section ETT Yersion 0 Section O ETM Id 16 Pid 71 0x15 isl ES El 3 Table Header amp table_id 204 OCC ETT A sechon_ syntax indicator 1 section length 380 0x1 7c table_td_extension 16 version number 0 OU current next indicator 1 section number 0 0x0 last gechon number 0 0x0 AY protocol_version 0 00 oof ETM_id 16 0x10 4 bextlesxtended_message First segment of text in the First string s loop wo AMT CRC 32 Onfbed1 41d Section view displays a node for the extended_text_message with as much as possible of the first segment from the first string MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 51 Multiplexer Views Expanding the node reveals a number_strings field which specifies the number of strings and a container which holds them strings agg CLM d 16 UXT E text_extended_message First segment of text in the first string s loop b pumberstings 2 E strings DI ppr aoe netted aqd The number_strings field shows that there are two strings in this example Expanding the strings container shows the loop for each string From this it can be seen that both strings are in English gia ET Mid 16 0x10 ee text extended message First segment of test in the first sting s loop m number stings 2 El strings m i ISO 639 LanguageCode eng i Hi 1 0_ 639 Lan
353. ream or other streams To save the current filter settings select the Save button and enter a name and location in the Save As dialog box To retrieve or load filter settings select the Load button and identify the filter file in the Open dialog box The file extension fil is used MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Views Component Views Component Bitrate The Component views provide a graphical view of the bit rate and duration of the components of a stream The management of the views has a number of common features these are described in the Common Features page 8 71 The Component Bit rate view provides a graphical comparison of the stream components Open the Component Bit rate view either by selecting View gt Component Bitrate from the Menu Bar or the toolbar button E ew Component Bitrate Each component includes the following information Program name PID Description and the Bit rate in numerical and graphical form Where appropriate the Service ID and the Service Name is displayed extracted from the SDT Component Bitrate tek_sym1_testmpg Program Pid Desciption Bitrate Mbs 1 Tektronix I 120 MPEG 2 Audio 0 094025 130 MPEG 2 Audio 0 407350 110 MPEG 2 video 2 029526 O 2 Tektronix Il 230 MPEG Audio 0 054015 220 MPEG 2 Audio 0 156667 210 MPEG 2 video 4 007094 L__ 3 Tektronix Ill 330 MPEG 2 Audio 0 156687 320 MPEG 2 Audio 0 219350 310 MP
354. repositioned as required Click and drag the column to the required position TRosen Fa Desainion Bias tbr Bua 1 Tektronix 120 MPEG 2 Audio 0 094025 l 130 MPEG 2 4 udio 0 407350 Program Pidl Pt Description Bitrate Mb s Bitrate 1 Tektronix I 120 MPEG 2 Audio 0 094025 l 130 MPEG 2 Audo 0 407350 Program i Pid 0 2 Ddaciiption gt Bitrate Mb s Bitrate 1 Tektronix 120 MPEG 2 Audio 0 094025 l 130 MPEG 2 Audio 0 407350 Bitrate Mbs Birate Tektroni 120 3 MPEG 2 Audio 0 094025 130 MPEG 2 Audio 40 F350 Progam Desction Pid Bia b s Brat 1 Tektronix MPEG 2 Audio 120 0 094025 MPEG 2 Audio 130 0 407350 l MPEG 2 Video qi0 2029528 E Column Width Columns can be resized as required Place the cursor over the dividing line between two columns it will change to the resizing cursor Click and drag the column to the required width The change will be made to the column to the left of the cursor Programm Description h Pid Bitrate MB s 5 MPEG 2 Video BIO 16 E9662 Double clicking the column divider will automatically resize the column to the left to the optimum size required to view the content 8 72 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Views Column Sort Columns can be sorted in ascending or descending order Click the cursor on the heading to sort the column Clicking again will sort the column in rev
355. rivate Data Flag Data Length E L 0 or false Mo or true When the flag is true the Data Length is shown in bytes and can be edited in decimal MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 25 Transport Stream Editor Header Editor The Adaptation Field Extension Flag indicates the state of the binary Adaptation Field Extension flag W Adaptation Field Extension Flag L 0 no Adaptation Field Extension The Adaptation Field Extension Tab can be viewed but all of the fields will be grayed out M 1 Adaptation Field Extension present The Adaptation Field Extension Tab will show and enable editing of the information contained in the Adaptation Field Extension Adaptation Field Extension Tab Header Information Adaptation Field Adaptation Field Extension Extension Length 213 Iw LTW Flag M Seamless Splice Flag Solice Type 1100 DTS Mest AD 2329264024 Piecewise Rate 395701 LTW valid LTW Offset 12525 The Adaptation Field Extension Tab interprets the contents of the Adaptation Field Extension if one is present in the packet To be able to edit an Adaptation Field Extension the Adaptation Field Extension flag must be set to 1 the box must be checked in the Adaptation Field Tab Shows the length of the Adaptation Field Extension in bytes and allows it to be edited in decimal Extension Length 21 5 9 26 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Transport
356. rsion 24 Section O Pid 4351 01 0FF Elementary PID 1013 0 3F5 in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 4231 Version 6 Section 0 Pid 4231 01087 Elementary PID 651 02286 in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 4231 Version 6 Section O Pid 4231 0 1087 Elementary PID 652 0x28 in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 4231 Version 6 Section 0 Pid 4231 0 1087 Elementary PID 1009 O 3F1 in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 4231 Version 6 Section 0 Pid 4231 0 1087 Elementary PID 1010 0 3F 2 in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 4543 Version 4 Section 0 Pid 4543 0s11BF Elementary PID 651 04286 in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 4543 Version 4 Section 0 Pid 4543 0 11BF Elementary PID 652 0828C in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 4543 Version 4 Section 0 Pid 4543 0 11BF Elementary PID 662 0 296 in PMT not found in multiples Warning Program 4543 Version 4 Section 0 Pid 4543 0 11BF Elementary PID 663 0297 in PMT not found in multiples Time 13 45 10 Multiples started Warning Fid 8191 The multiples occupancy is above 99 9 please check the available bitrate Time 13 45 18 Multiples complete Multiplex bitrate 77 3477 Mbit s E Each table has a specification for nominal and maximum interval in millisec onds between instances of the table These can be edited using the Navigator The multiplex engine will try to multiplex the table into the synthesized transport
357. rst Boo Transport Stream Time s MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 79 Carousel Analyzer Application Support Explanation of Timing This section gives a graphical explanation of each of the application timing tests Tests The calculations assume that control information DSI DII that is SI PSI information for example PAT PMT has been cached The boot class must be received before any of the assets can be received This simulates the STB not knowing which carousel objects the boot class depends on until it has completely received and processed it Best Transmission Time From the start of a boot class to the end of the last asset The true application load time is the transmission time plus the time taken by the set top box STB to load the application The time taken by the STB to load the application is not included in these tests Service Gateway bad Boot Class Asset A O Asset B Asset C Transmission Time Stream Time 6 30 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Application Support Worst Transmission Time From the end of a boot class through the next boot class to the end of the last asset The true application load time is the transmission time plus the time taken by the set top box STB to load the application The time taken by the STB to load the application is not included in these tests Service Gateway O Boot Class
358. rt Elementary Streams The Add New Elementary Stream dialog box is displayed Add New Elementary Stream EJ Select Elements Transport Rate 0 000 Duration seconds 0 000 Selected Program Original Elementar Pid IK Properties in Carousel Elementary PID Continuous loaning durma generation fo Cancel 7 76 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation 2 Use the browse button to select the source file mpg from which the elementary streams are to be imported Select Elements S ounce Filename D Skreams carannibbe La mpg _ I 2a Program Contents in File bbcia mpg All programs in the source file are displayed but only one program or the elementary streams from one program can be imported into a session 3 Highlight the program or elementary stream s to be imported Select OK to import the program stream s Add New Elementary Stream Select Elements Select Elements Source Filename D Streams carann bbc1a mpg E AA Program Contents in File bbcla mpg cb BEC ONE Prog 41 67 PMT PID 1100 0x044C os MPE G 2 Video Src Pid 600 01401258 Dest Pid 600 Ox0258 D MFE G 1 Audio Sre Pid 601 00259 Dest Pid 601 00259 g FES private data Sre Fid 603 00258 Dest Pid 603 040256 El o BEC Twill Prog 4231 PMT Plb 1100 0044C a MPEG 2 Video Sre Pid 610 Ox0262 Dest Pid 610 Oe0262 woe SJ MPEG 1 Audio Sre Pid
359. ry for every program in the session Matches the program number 0x3F EIT schedule tables not supported user Transmission of an EIT_pf is user controllable per service See the EIT section below 0x A Always set to 4 Running Always set to 0 No scrambling A service_descriptor is always added and depending on the carousel content of the program data_broadcast_ descriptor s may be added I ETSI EN 300 468 section 5 2 3 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 91 Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream Service_descriptor Table 7 22 Service descriptor Descriptor Syntax service_descriptor descriptor_tag descriptor length service type service_provider name length for i 0 i lt N i char I service _name_length for i 0 i lt N i char I ETSI EN 300 468 section 6 2 30 Data_broadcast_ descriptor CG Value Comment All of the properties in this descriptor are accessed via the Program node that is associated with the service Program node gt Properties gt Additional SI page 0x48 user gt Service Type dropdown user gt Service Provider field user gt Service Name field The data_broadcast_descriptor is a DVB defined descriptor that can be used in either the SDT or EIT to indicate that a carousel is associated with a service or event Carousel Generator only supports associating a carousel with a service so will only add the data_broadcast
360. s it is possible to copy sections to the main multiplex using the standard Windows techniques copy and paste or by dragging and dropping them with the aid of the mouse For example to import a section that is visible in the Examine TS window into the new multiplex configuration 1 Select the Navigator Tables view 2 Highlight the section to be copied in the Examine TS window and do one of the following m Select Edit gt Copy With the Navigator Tables view active select Edit gt Paste m Using the mouse place the cursor over the highlighted section press and hold the left button on the mouse and drag the section onto the Navigator Tables view Release the mouse button 3 Note that the copied section is placed in the PSI SI structure at the correct location If any conflict arises concerning similar PID numbers a new version is created MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Views SI Filtering Table elements can be excluded from the Navigator Tables view using the Display Filter available through Options gt Display Filter viedemer Adh_10s mpg Display Filter Gaevle a anepatia The following dialog box is displayed Filter ST Display O00 PAT O PAT TOOPAT j e Aes B Mam MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 61 Multiplexer Views Selecting a Table for Example Before filtering the stream tree may be as shown below Filtering Navigato
361. s a starting point for the test In both Carousel and Entity statistics windows further cycle time statistics will be added to the bottom of the list while the window remains active Similarly with one or more entries in a Cycle Times window selected the right click menu allows the user to display a graph of the cycle times or export cycle time statistics to a text file MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 69 eee Application Support Carousel Analyzer provides a means of testing the effects of associating applications with Object Carousels An application consists of a boot class and assets Typically a boot class will comprise a Java or HTML class assets may be images or text required by the boot class A comprehensive range of tests and measurements is provided in addition to application management tools A single Object Carousel may be timed with several applications in the Carousel Analyzer Application Management The Application management dialog shows the applications currently defined and allows the user to manage them The user can also create new applications When defining an application it may be done by adding application tree nodes manually using context menus or by moving parts of currently available object carousels over to the application It is also possible to move over sub trees from the hard disk to the application definition If an asset is specified as a wildcard the timing will w
362. s in Standard mode will also be restricted in the relevant wizard Similarly elements that are enabled in Expert mode will be enabled in the associated Wizard NOTE The section view may need to be closed and reopened in order to update the padlock icons MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 55 Multiplexer Views Structure Diagram Manipulation 8 56 A tree diagram with the root node or highest level component at the top represents the Transport Structure A square box indicates components that contain more information beneath them in the structure Havigator BECIAUG _ mpg lt Navigator BECIAUG2 mpg Click on the box PSS Tables to show or hide fa PAT the details Be PMT under the node ED Program 4167 Version 12 Section O Pid 4167 041 0477 ED Program 4227 Wersion 6 Section U Pid 4231 01087 Programs Te Programs T ables Clicking on the box does not select that node It only shows or hides the next level of detail under that node If the node has a minus sign in the box the level of detail below it is currently displayed The lower level s may be hidden by clicking the mouse pointer on the box If the box contains a plus sign there is another level in the node that is currently hidden Click the mouse pointer on the box to display the next level of informa tion under the node Components that are connected to a branch of the tree without a square box are
363. s in the lists which you do not want to be resolved then press the Synchronize button Note Only objects which are included in the carousel are checked In addition for directories only those that are Aagged for inclusion in the synchronisation process will be checked Use the Directory Properties dialog to set this flag IY Select this option if you wish to add any missing files or directories to the carousel The following objects are not present in the selected carousel sore S SOS HO E Carousel Generator Tesk Specification snakeide ms2 snakei Controller class V Select this option if you wish to delete invalid links from the carousel The following objects in the selected carousel are no longer available on the source drive s a Path In Carousel Name In Carousel Path In Carousel He DSM JisnakeJres mhcomp exe E Carousel Generator Test Specification snakelresimhcomp exe cancsl_ o Only show this dialog when the shift key is pressed Files or directories available at source but not currently included in the carousel can be automatically added to the carousel by enabling the checkbox Select this option if you wish to add any missing files or directories to the carousel Individual files and directories listed in the panel can be included or excluded from the activity by enabling or disabling the adjacent checkbox Files or directories listed in the carousel but not available at the source can
364. s installed automatically when the system is set up There is no additional specific set up procedure Simple user interface management is performed from within the utility ScriptPad is most often started by double clicking an existing script file The necessary file associations scp and scx are made automatically during the installation process Alternatively you can start ScriptPad by clicking a shortcut placed on the desktop or by selecting ScriptPad in the Start menu in the taskbar MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 14 1 Script Pad Getting Started Initial Appearance When the program has started and is ready for use the main window is displayed as shown below B Script Parser Files SCP SEE File View Help Ready ln NUM P The Toolbar row of buttons above the dark gray area of the empty window may be hidden from view moved to a separate window either side or the bottom of the main window The Status Line at the very bottom of the window may be hidden from view The dark gray area constitutes the Working Area 14 2 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Script Pad Getting Started Initial Menu Options File Menu Options Table 14 1 lists the intial File menu options Table 14 1 File menu options Option Function New Opens a new file Open Opens a script file scp for analysis Choose the required file Print Setup Select which printer and asso
365. s tool tips when the mouse pointer is over active elements of the window for example toolbar buttons and menu options Properties Window List Control In properties windows that display lists for example contents lists one column can be selected to sort the list into ascending or descending order Include Path In Carousel lt Name In Carousel Size bytes Source w lt lt Service Gateway gt gt DSM de E Carous DSM fide rise E iCarous DSM fidelmse snake E iCarous DSM fidelms2 snake ScoreDisplay class 163 E iCarous DSM fidelms2isnakel Controller class 2453 E iCarous DSM fdejmsz Include Path In Carousel Name In Carousel Size bytes Source DSM tdelmse snake ScoreDisplay class 163 E iCarousel Genera E DSM fdelmse snake Controller class 2453 EC arousel Genera OSM ideimsal snake Snakevlet class 3098 E Carousel Genera DSM fdelmse snake GamePane class 4351 EC arousel Genera DSM fdelms2 snake Model class 5929 EC arousel Genera DSM de EC arousel Genera DSM idej msz EC Carousel Genera DSM idelmsz snake EC Carousel Genera lt _ lt Service Gateway gt gt To sort a list click the key column header If the same column needs to be sorted in reverse order click the header again note that the arrow icon in the header bar indications the sort direction MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 31 SS aaa ae Carousel Generation This sec
366. scripts Other directory locations can be specified in Expert Mode All selections will be retained between sessions Syntax Checking Scripts are syntactically analyzed when the OK button is selected They are also checked when the application is opened A fault in the syntax of a script will not necessarily prevent a stream from being analyzed but it may result in incomplete analysis of the stream Scripts listed in the Scripts text box will not be used for stream analysis until they have been successfully checked the application has been opened or the Stream Interpretation dialog box has been closed with no script related error messages issued An intermediate check of scripts listed in the Scripts text box can be made by selecting the Reload Scripts button This performs the same action as the OK button but leaves the dialog box open Syntactic errors will be indicated and reported in the Event Log see page 8 57 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 7 Multiplexer Getting Started Export Mode al Expert Mode allows you to select and customize the scripts to be used in stream analysis and multiplexing Note that when the expert mode is selected the Custom extension option is automatically selected and that the management buttons are enabled In Expert mode all scripts become available to be added to the script list The scripts will be checked and loaded ready to be used for analysis when the OK button is selected
367. sel Contents 1 tems 0 bytes dE lt lt Service Gateway gt gt Files and directories containing applications and resources are added to the carousel during this step The buttons on the right side of the window allow individual files or complete directory structures to be added to highlighted nodes of the carousel Files and directories can also be dragged and dropped from Windows Explorer Add files Add directories Files and directories can be dragged and dropped within the wizard window to allow final adjustments to be made Highlighted files and directories can be also be deleted 7 Build the carousel structure as required MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 13 Carousel Generator Carousel Wizard Carousel Wizard 3 Carousel Contents El sis MHP Object Carousel ID 1 PID 100 020064 Prog 1 PHT PII ce a Carousel Contents 25 tems 32 51 kbytes i g4 Service Gateway gt gt E M de 3 SNE mez Ej Controller class x F GamePane clat HdA snake m de Highlighting an object and selecting Properties from the right click menu allows access to the object properties 8 Select Next to display Step 4 Collection Contents 7 14 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Wizard Step 4 Collection Contents Carousel Wizard 4 Collection Contents Collections for MHP Object Carousel ID 1 PID 100 Prog 1 PMT PID al Collection S d
368. specified in the Save command whenever you save a stream data In the New File mode a new file is created whenever you save a stream file The file name is the following the name specified by the Save commands 1 2 3 4 Load Preset Loads the specified preset file set When a preset file is loaded the current instrument settings are changed by the file s content Refer to Preset File page 10 49 for more information about the preset file Save Preset Saves the current instrument settings as a preset file Refer to Preset File page 10 49 for more information about the preset file PLAY Switches to the Play screen Exit Quits the MPEG Player application The MPEG Player application settings are saved View Menu The View menu contains commands that control the display of the Toolbar and Status bar The View menu in the Record screen is the same as that in the Play screen Refer to Table 10 8 for the commands available in the View menu MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 37 MPEG Player Menus and Controls 10 38 Record Menu The Record menu contains commands for setting the input interface record size trigger position and target source Table 10 13 describes the commands in the Record menu Table 10 13 Record menu commands Command Source Description Sets the interface used to input a stream data You can select SPI DVB SPI connector or SPI ASI 310M ASI SMP
369. ss but are constrained by limits defined by the priority pro gram This may lead to these remaining programs hav ing a gap at the beginning and end of the file 8 118 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Reference Abbreviations AIT ASCII ATSC CAT CDT CVCT DSM CC EIT ES ETT MGT MMT NIT PAT PES PID PIT PMT PSI PSIP RAID RRT RST SDT SI SIT STT TDT MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Application Information Table American Standard Code for Information Inter change Advanced Television Systems Committee Conditional Access Table MPEG Carrier Definition Table Cable Virtual Channel Table ATSC Digital Storage Media Command and Control Event Information Table DVB ATSC Elementary Stream Extended Text Table ATSC Master Guide Table ATSC Modulation Mode Table Network Information Table DVB Program Association Table MPEG Packetized Elementary Stream Packet Dentifier Program Information Table ATSC Program Map Table MPEG Program Specitic Information MPEG Program and System Information Protocol ATSC Redundant Array of Independent Disks Regional Ratings Table ATSC Running Status Table DVB Service Description Table DVB Service Information DVB Satellite Information Table System Time Table ATSC Transponder Data Table ATSC 8 119 Multiplexer Reference 8 120 TNT TOT TS TSTD T STD TVCT UTC VCT XML Transponder Name Table Ti
370. sted in the Application Codes panel A Language Code can be selected from the drop down list The object can be given a name in the Carousel Object field If objects have already been associated with the carousel the adjacent button will display the contents of the carousel from which an object can be selected Remove Removes the highlighted Initial Object 7 50 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Carousel Contents Each carousel initially contains two subnodes Carousel Contents and Service Gateway The carousel will eventually contain all of the objects associated with a particular function or feature These objects can be arranged in a hierarchy of directories and files all displayed beneath the Service Gateway node F temp xml Tektronix Carousel Generator File Edit wiew Session Player Tools Help ESEI Saws o gt iS arouses CS amp Carousel Session 1 Program 1 Carousel El ses DYB Object PID 100 00064 Prog 1 PMT C 25 87 kbytes 2 Path In Carousel Name In Carousel Size tbytes Source Ma lt lt Service Gateway gt gt 26487 alee OSM snake de 15994 D Carousel Generator Test Speg Mia DSM fisnakefde ms2 15994 D i Carousel Generator Test Speg wi DSM snake res 10493 D i Carousel Generator Test Speg wi DSM snake 26487 D i Carausel Generator Test Sped Mia DSM f snakesde ms2 snake 15994 D Carousel
371. sym _ Properties dio tek sym ementa stream Woe 2 Audio tek_syml a e 300 System Information a a a a a p _D D a pr aR ma lf Programs Tables Pide This opens the Add Stream dialog box the Source tab is displayed by default MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Editing in the Navigator Views Defining the PID Source In the Add Stream dialog box select the Source tab this allows the PID source to be selected and defined Add Stream EJ PID Source Timing PCR File name Browse File type MPEG 2 video Binat kbs Original TS PID Extra DTS offset fo 5 Gtream_id po Start each field in a new pes packet File name Stream type Transport Packets Section MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Enter the file name of the stream to be multiplexed If the filename is unknown select Browse to open a stan dard file browser dialog and locate the file required The names of files being copied to the multiplex will be automatically filled in Select the type of stream to be multiplexed from the drop down list box The following Stream Types are available MPEG 1 video ES or PES MPEG 2 video ES or PES MPEG 2 audio ES or PES MPEG 1 or MPEG 2 MPEG 2 AAC audio ES or PES ADTS format only AC 3 audio ES or PES ES Elementary Stream PES Packetized Elementary Stream A single PID stream The Bit rate value will require set ting
372. t i Jolie Larousse Anaso OC_abed eror mpg Oe xi Ale Est ee Ese Ee GE jos lon aaeaae eeaaealet EE p lee e gt OC_abed errors mpg Transport packet number 532 Op x El transport_packet i sync_byte 71 transport_error_indicator 1 payload_unit_start_indicator 1 transport_priority 0 PID O transport_scrambling_contral 0 adaptation_field_control 1 i continuity counter 1 rawbyptes 184 bytes ooodgoo00 ooo0do010 go0ddo020 go0do030 ooo000040 ooodg0050 OOOOO08O ooodoo 70 oo000080 ooo00090 OOOO00A0 oo00d0050 YYYYYYYYYYYY t OC_abed errors mpq Log Elf There are Transport Log Entries Elf transport_error_indicator bit set 1 times Zee Transport packet number 532 El View Transport Packet Ale View Repetition 00G Transport Sectic view Bitrate PID Filter PID 0 ETR Packet 532 View transport packet structure DVB 20 000000 Mbit s duration 5 3333 106383 pkis 4 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 65 Carousel Analyzer Views Section Log view This view displays the errors that have been logged in sections during analysis of the stream Right Click Menu Options View Section Displays a view of the highlighted section DSM CC Section Log view This view displays the errors that have been logged in DSM CC sections during analysis of the stream Right Click Menu Options View Section Displays a
373. t application information section table id 0x74 section syntax_indicator reserved future use reserved 0x3 section length application type reserved 0x3 version number CG does not support table versioning current_next_indicator section number last_section number reserved future use 0xF common descriptors length for i 0 i lt c_d_length i descriptor n a I DVB reserved future use OxF application loop length for i 0 i lt app loop length i Carousel Generator will add applications as defined in the carousel To create an application right click on the file and select Make HTML Application or Make Java Application application identifier organisation id user File node gt Properties gt Application Descriptor page Organisation ID field 7 98 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream Table 7 29 Application information table Cont Table Syntax CG Value Comment application id user File node gt Properties gt Application Descriptor page Application ID field I application control code user File node gt Properties gt Application Descriptor page Control Code dropdown app descriptors loop length for j 0 j lt a_d_ length j descriptor auto user Carousel Generator creates the appropriate descriptors for each application type automatically However fields in the properties pages allow the contents of these des
374. t stream will be long enough to accommodate at least the minimum number of repetitions requested for each carousel PID settings screen The tree structure in the PID Settings screen shows the PID usage for the selected carousel s program The DSI and DII messages carried in the carousel use an Association tag which allows the BIOP messages in the carousel to be linked to a PID in the stream see BS ISO IEC 13818 6 1998 Information Technology Generic coding of moving pictures and associated audio informa tion Part 6 Extensions for DSM CC To place the DII and DSI messages on different Association Tags use the DSI DII settings screen see page 7 46 During stream generation each Association Tag specified will result in the following An elementary stream ES with a stream type of 11 DSMCC U N messages and the entered PID being added to the PMT ES loop m The Association Tag value will be inserted into an association_tag_descrip tor inside this ES s descriptor loop Carousel Properties Ea PID settings a Associations for MHP Object Carousel ID 1 FID 100 0 0064 New Assoc 5 ar Assoc tag 100 on PID 100 064 Fa DSI Carousel PID HEMIOVE ze DII General SID settings DSI DI settings MHP l Selected ED associator miD 101 Mariman otrate MEWE essooehon Tag 101 Cancel Highlighting any of the association nodes will displ
375. t streams that are compliant with ATSC DVB and ARIB standards The MPEG Player provides the following features Display Elements Data rate 213 Mbps maximum 250 Kbps minimum Hierarchical display of the stored or captured transport stream 188 204 208 bytes packet size Continuous recording of captured streams PCR jitter insertion Triggered stream capture Full remote control using Ethernet interface ASI SMPTE 310M and DVB SPI DVB Parallel interfaces available There are two types of display screens to operate the MPEG Player the Play screen and the Record screen The Play screen is used to output the selected stream When you open the application this screen will display the last screen that was shown before closing The Record screen is used to record the input stream When you select File gt Record the screen switches to the Record screen This subsection explains the name and functions of the display elements in the Play or Record screen Figure 10 1 shows the location of display elements of the Play screen The Record screen display elements are the same MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 1 MPEG Player Getting Started m Symi mpe Menu bar File View Play MPEG Player Op 0 Utility Toolbar Las 2 A O m E PAT PID 0x0 ToID O 0 TSID O 1 Prgi5 GES PMT Piteox 4 ToD 0x2 Protoss SH VIDEO FID 0x6 StrmTyp dx2 A AUDIO PID 0x76 Strmotyp tet A AUDIO PID 0x82 Strmotyp
376. t by resting the cursor over the filename the full path is shown for a short time in a tooltip _ name of a tile or hit the browse button to find a file ai Click the Nest button to get the program info from this file Lo Streame E lementan Streams ideo ses 10s mpa File p fo TMB ATSC MPEG SI Scripts Customized SI scripts are available to the Make Seamless Wizard to enable custom SI table and descriptor data to be processed successfully Basic process ing of the Standards does not require additional scripts If a suitably configured script is selected and enabled before a stream is analyzed custom data will be analyzed when the stream is opened If the script is not selected or enabled the stream will not fail to be analyzed but any custom data will either be ignored or reported as an error in the stream configuration The underlying principles of scripting are described in the Custom SI Scripting section of this user manual MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 12 3 Make Seamless Wizard Handling Script Files To handle SI Scripts select the general Standard required by enabling the appropriate radio button and select the Scripts button Tektronix MakeSeamless Wizard Program Info DVB sep W Tektronix se Digital iden Broadcasting lektronr The Script dialog box displays the scripts currently associated with each standard and allows them to be added removed viewed and mani
377. t packet fi 50000 Enter number of packets to cut pss00 Number of packets in selected file 204800 Digital Video Broadcasting Tektronix j Cancel You can specify the source file manually OF Drag and drop a file from an Explorer window OR Search for the file by clicking Browse EAumpitest mpg Browse Digital Video Broadcasting TS Cutter Wizard Step 3 x You can specify the destination file manually OR Drag and drop a file from an Explorer window OR Search for the file by clicking Browse ai Jestmp test_cut mp Browse MA Ask before writing if file exists Press the Finish button to begin cutting or press the Back button to review your options j Cancel The wizard may be started by selecting the TS Cutter option from the Utilities submenu of the Start gt Programs menu fa Tektronix Utilities To Adobe Acrobat To Startup wep VITUS NI Capiolel fo Administrative Tools Common 77 Tektronix TS Cutter ae Tektronix TS Maker ad Tracer Alternatively double click on the TS Cutter shortcut on the desktop MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Transport Stream Cutter Cutting a File By default the wizard will display this Introduction first MPEG 2 TS Cutter Wizard Stream Cut Wizard Copyright T ekhonm Inc 1995 2002 Version AL 00 This wizard will guide you through the process of cutting a section from
378. t sensitive only allowing edits that make sense with the other fields in the header It gives full syntax checking of all changes that are made The payload and any Reed Solomon data are edited from the Hexadecimal Editor On the right of the Hex Editor pane the ASCII character is displayed Unprint able characters are shown as a period dot or full stop It is normal to edit a copy of a transport stream Transport Stream Analyzer can be used to view the original while editing the copy MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 1 Transport Stream Editor Getting Started Starting the Program 9 2 The program may be started by selecting the TS Editor option from the Start gt Programs menu or by double clicking on the TS Editor shortcut on the desktop Tektronix TS Editor H Toren T 5 T x Initial Appearance Once the program has started and is ready for use it will open a Main Window that looks like this A Gaptevon eld Worrall Ter ARURUI Loot E 3 E E T anepoternanindicatan Hotes A setta r r see M Pasion Unit Ster Indicator all Ce TES omine otientannen panes Pali TEINE ELE Sion NoData MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Transport Stream Editor Getting Started Options The Transport Stream Editor has a set of options relating to general use and opening files It is a good idea to review the options before opening a file The settings can be changed at any t
379. tCarausel sml Open with Carousel Generator ca inzZip Send To Cut MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Getting Started Initial Appearance Tektronix Carousel Generator Untitled ioj x Menu bar gt Fie Edit View Session Player Tools Help Toolbar gt s Hn bB gt ENA ax DE m Session 0 P OC I peaasi iea innse Transport Stream Bitrate 8 000 Mbits s S d PSI SI Type DVB SI y P ession window Base for relative paths lt not using relative paths gt The destination of the generated stream is set to the file c temp carousel mog Minimum Duration lt None gt There are O Carousels included in this Session cal ae gt Properties window gt Error type Event time Description Log window _ gt Programs a Carousels a SS RR _ _ a a af bi Summary g Definition File Syntax T5 Generation Status bar a tektronix Carousel Generator A The full range of options available to the Carousel Generator can be accessed by using the Menu Bar However the selection of options varies during the stages of carousel creation unavailable options are normally grayed out The Toolbar provides shortcuts to the more common options The working area of the Carousel Generator screen contains three windows the Session window the Properties window and the Log window The
380. that control information PAT PMT DSM CC section etc has been cached this method does not The user defines a sampling frequency which is timed to start the download and observe how long it takes to signal the carousel and download the service gateway the boot class and all of the assets For example in a 60 second stream a Start Point on the Cold Boot Time Settings dialog of five seconds will sample the download time twelve times The result is added to the Application Timing results table and graph The boot class must be received before any of the assets can be received This simulates the STB not knowing which carousel objects the boot class depends on until it has completely received and processed it Directories must be received before any child objects can be received in this case This is because this timing method assumes no signaling caching The end of each cycle will be the end of the module containing the last asset This is an important distinction because an asset may not be the only one in that module Service E ateway i Boot Class d q e Asset dq o ada o o o o O Asset B i Q 6 O Asset C i O o i 5 R i a gt lt gt Cold Boot Time Stream Time MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Application Support Setting up a Timing Test It is assumed that applications have been created as described in the previ
381. that were detected during processing NOTE Carousels that span multiple PIDs will be only partially analyzed The PID must contain a Service Gateway for any Object Carousel view to be displayed The Log view is refreshed by describing the most recent action for example Added Manually Signalled PID150 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 39 Carousel Analyzer Views Any feedback from the Manual Signaling will be displayed in the Summary log Summary Log Entries oir Added Manually Sigrialled Pid 150 056 to analysis E59 D Transport Errors O wWamingls E 0 Section Eroja 0 wamningje ben dh OOSM CC Section E mols O Warmings s oa 0 U U Object Carousel E mofe Ov amin s df 1 OS Message sl a 1 Ol bessage s 3A DDE Messagels Er 1 Object Carouseljs pD Analysis Complete 1253 37 6 40 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views U N Download View Menu Bar View gt U N Download Toolbar i This static view shows all the U N download DSM CC data carousel scenario messages in the transport stream The view is in the style of Windows Explorer The left pane contains a hierarchi cal pane on the left and a version pane on the right The version pane will list the versions of the U N download message selected in the left pane ai OC_abed_ mpg U N Download Fea UNH Download Messages Gize PID aa DSI Messages ati O 120 bytes 150 oo
382. the Window menu Table 8 8 Window menu options Cascade Tile Arrange Icons 1 lt window title gt 2 lt window title gt 3 etc Cascades the open windows when Options gt Single Section View is disabled Tiles the windows horizontally when Options gt Single Section View is disabled Aligns icons of any minimized windows at the bottom of the program s main window Makes the named window active putting it on top of any windows that had been hiding all or part of it MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Menus and Controls Help menu options Toolbar e Fe Table 8 9 list the options available in the Help menu Table 8 9 Help menu options Command Function About Multiplexer Opens a dialog box that displays the program version number and license number Sr se AOR E aS Ss I Toolbars provide a set of convenient shortcuts for the more frequently used menu options The buttons are context sensitive and are enabled or disabled dependent upon the currently highlighted view or the action being performed The Toolbar may be hidden from view View gt Toolbar MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 19 Multiplexer Menus and Controls Status Bar The Status Bar may be hidden from view but when displayed it is always at the bottom of the main window For example MeS a Filter User Mode Processing Filter ON DVB TS Rate 38 015 Mbit s Duration 11 8
383. the control it will change shape to show that it is in position to move the control Hold down the left mouse button and drag the control down to split the window Release the mouse button when the views are a suitable size To revert to a single view drag the split window control back to the top of the scroll bar MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual ee Menus and Controls The following pages describe all of the menu options Since many of the options are context sensitive they will be available only when their function is appropri ate for the selected window or display element When a menu option is not available the menu option is grayed out File Menu Options Wc Impeg Tracer JES Edt Frnt View Show Mew Input Ctrl h Open File Ctrl 0 save As Chl S 1 mpeg TAC Exit Table 11 1 File menu options Command Function New Input Not applicable with Buffer Analyzer Open File Opens a previously saved file of detail message log records Buffer Analyzer does not need to be running to use this facility Save As Saves the records currently held in Tracer to a file 1 lt filename gt Lists most recently used files of detail message log records up to a maximum of four files Exit Discards any unsaved records and terminates execution of the program MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 11 11 Tracer Menus and Controls Edit Menu Options 11 12 Fae Impeg Tracer Fi
384. their initial values More streams can be added using the Add button Listed streams can be deleted using the Delete button Details of listed streams can be modified using the Update button That completes the addition of one or more program streams 14 Select Next to move to the Event Information dialog box For more details of the fields on these tabs refer to Adding an Unreferenced Elementary Stream page 8 92 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Wizards Event Information Dialog Box event information Event Information Transport Stream 3 Program 29 PMT Section Ep SDT Section He Event Information Eet Active PIDs owt Pid 555 Type 2 M n Pid B66 Type 2 M The Event Information dialog box allows you to add Present and Following Add event information Event Information T ables EITE e Fresen MW ca Settings Following If Cal Settings lt Back Cancel 15 If the Event Information Table EIT is to be included in the multiplex enable the Event Information Table checkbox 16 Enable the Present and following checkboxes as required Ed Present Following timing see Editing PSI SI Table Properties page 8 85 17 Use the Settings buttons to open the Present Following Events dialog box and add and specify events as required MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 39 Multiplexer Wizards 18 Select Next to move to the Program Complet
385. thorities Carousel Generator makes available the types listed in the following table Carousel Type Guiding Standard DSMCC Object ISO IEC 13818 6 1998 MPEG DVB Object DVB EN301 192 V1 2 1 DTT Object DTG DTT Requirements for Interoperability V3 1 MHP Object ETSI TS101 812 V1 1 2 amp V1 1 1 Select Session gt New Carousel and click on the required carousel type A new empty carousel of the required type will be added to the session The carousel will be assigned an identity number ID and allocated to a PID automatically Additional carousels can be added successive IDs and PIDs will be allocated MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 41 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Modifying the Carousel Properties The properties of individual carousel can be modified as required A summary of the carousel properties is displayed in the Properties window EM Untitled Tektronix Carousel Generator lolx Eile Edit wiew Session Player Tools Help 8 SE Daas OS 2 ero gt 00000000000 e Carousels ax E Carousel Session 1 Program 1 Carousel Ser cf MHP Object Carousel ID 1 PID 100 020064 Prog 1 PMT PID 1100 0 Carousel Type MHP Object Carousel ca a Carousel Contents 1 items 0 bytes A pui aai H Minimum number of repetitions in output 1 Program Number 1 Maximum Module Size 65536 bytes Available DIIs DII 1 using assoc tag 100 PID 100 0x6 PID
386. timedia Home Platform MHP builds on object carousels by defining parameters such as the boot class and application life cycle in the Application Information Table AIT The diagram below shows how information carried by data and object carousels is subdivided and ultimately carried by the transport stream Object Carousel BIOP 1 BIOP2 BIOP3 BIOP4 BIOP Messages ee me mm Download Data Module 1 i Modus an E Modules and i Blocks Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 _ Block 5 DSM CC Sections Section __ Section 2 Sections Sectiona Section5 FEREN SEREN NE N Transport Packets Headers are shown shaded BIOP messages contain a message header a message sub header and the message body which contains data The message body may contain complete data objects MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 1 Carousel Generator Getting Started BIOP messages are broadcast in modules A module is formed from one or more concatenated complete BIOP messages Each Module is fragmented into one or more Download Data Blocks that are in turn transmitted in corresponding DSM CC Sections Sections are transmitted in packets in the Transport Stream Carousel Generator Overview 7 2 Activity in the Carousel Generator is referred to as a session During a session data objects are assembled into one or more carousels Video and audio content can also be
387. tion Part 6 Extension for Digital Storage Media Command and Control MPEG Reference 2 m EN 301 192 Specification for data broadcasting DVB Reference 4 m ARIB STD B24 Data Coding and Transmission Specification for Digital Broadcasting Reference 11 Multimedia Home Platform DVB Reference 12 A bibliography of DTV standards documentation is given in the Reference section The Carousel Analyzer has been developed to meet the specific need to analyze and display the content and structure of data broadcasts The tool provides a variety of ways of looking at a transport stream and its contents including displaying the bit rate repetition rates structure syntax and semantics of data items MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 1 Carousel Analyzer Getting Started wl Tekiona Canese Aeaeer OC_abcd mpg ey late en leew Guns Mae CEEA Bale 2 E E lm Pelre A Version Hee DSM CC U N messages on PID 150 0296 Ela Object Carousels Fla Object Carousel ID 3 0x3 DSI ID O 0 Eo Service Gateway OC_abed mpg Log E Summary Log Entries A Analysis Started 10 06 07 ve EA O Transport Error s cy N Serhan Frio DSM CC Section UU Object Carousel Ready DVB 4 000000 Mbit s duration 40 0003 106383 pkts 4 The program view shows the various services in the transport stream and their associated PIDs and data streams Object or data one or two layer carousels and U
388. tion either in the same application or across applications In Multiplexer probably the main use of the drag and drop feature will be when building new multiplexes or modifying existing ones Elements can be dragged within Multiplexer or from the Multiplexer Browser Windows Explorer or other instances of Multiplexer Program references and numbering will be automatically added and or updated when a new program is dropped onto the navigator Programs view NOTE Only the MPEG aspects of the transport structure are updated Tables specific to DVB and ATSC are not updated Manipulation in Program view m When using Navigator Program view a program can be copied or dragged The program can be dropped only on the transport stream node of the Program view m Only the standard MPEG elements are copied namely the PAT entry the PMT section and the elementary streams Standard dependent information is not copied for example DVB SDT m Where a conflict occurs with the target new values will be allocated that is Program Number and PID numbers m Elementary streams can also be dragged and dropped between Program Views They can only be dropped onto the elementary stream root node Anelementary stream may have a stream type a component tag and descriptors associated with it this information is retained during a drag and drop in the program view The program view displays this information when the properties dialog box is activated
389. tion describes the processes required to create a transport stream containing one or more carousels In broad terms it echoes the steps outlined in the Wizard but more background information is provided Setting Overall Carousel Generator Properties Although not essential during every session the general properties of the Carousel Generator can be set using the Carousel Generator Options dialog box Note that settings such as the Output Filename can be overridden in the current session however the settings made here will be used as the defaults in any new session Select Tools gt Options to open the Carousel Generator Options dialog box Carousel Generator The following screens are available in this dialog box General New Session Options Defaults and Event Error messages To view a screen click the name in the left panel MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 33 Carousel Generator Carousel Generation General screen Carousel Generator Options New Session Defaults i Eyent Error messages Cancel i eneral General Number of tems to display m the recent files lst MAL this option will only take effect when the Carousel Generator is rectarted RA elatiwe Paths Update base path for relative paths when saving to a different location Ask Fis relative paths when changing the base path that they reber to Jack Regenerate moditied output steam betore launching applications Ask M
390. tion number 0 ow last section number 0 vee A protocol version 0 00 oo tables_defined 3 0x3 l 4 tables ci 256 EIT O to EIT 127 On table_type 256 EIT O to EIT 147 ik table type PID 21 0x75 er table type version number 0 O0 as number bytes 16 0x10 see A table tyoe descriptors len 6 0x6 Wi descriptor m i 256 El T to EIT 1271 E i 256 EIT U to EIT 1271 descriptors _length 6 0x6 El 4 descriptors Fl registration descriptor Fe AO deecrintor tan f MA D The syntax specified for an MGT in the ATSC standard A65 is master guide table section table id section syntax indicator private indicator zero section length table id extension reserved version number current next indicator section number last section number protocol version tables defined 8 48 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Views for 1 0 i lt tables defined i table type reserved table type PID reserved table type version number number bytes reserved table type descriptors length for k 0 k lt N k descriptor reserved descriptor tag descriptors length for I O I lt N I descriptor CRC 32 j The terms used in this manual to describe the components represented by nodes in the structure diagram are Container A term used to describe a node in the structure diagram which may contain zero one or more loops
391. tions available in the View menu Table 8 5 View menu options Command Interpretation Section View Event Log Component Bitrate Component Duration Available Bitrate Properties Function Displays a read only dialog box for viewing scripts that have been selected for analysis see also Initial Menu Options page NO TAG Opens the window and displays the table section currently selected in the Navigator view Displays the list of events that are recorded in the Event Log Displays a graphical comparison of the stream bit rates Displays a graphical comparison of the stream component durations Display a graphical view of the bit rate in the stream Opens a properties dialog box for editing the currently selected item in the Transport Navigator window MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Menus and Controls Table 8 5 View menu options Cont Command Zoom In Zoom Out Synchronize Show Cursor Toolbar Status Bar Function Zoom in to the Available Bitrate and Component Duration views Zoom out from the Available Bitrate and Component Duration views Synchronizes zoom level of the Available Bitrate and Component Duration views toggle action Shows or hides the cursor in the Available Bitrate and Component Duration views Shows or hides the Toolbar Shows or hides the Status Bar Options menu options Table 8 6 list the options available in the Options menu
392. tor descriptor tag 0x13 descriptor length carousel_ identifier user Carousel node gt Properties gt General Carousel ID for n 0 n lt N n private data_byte n w These bytes are not used when signaling a basic DSM CC Object Carousel I ISO IEC 13818 6 Extensions for DSM CC section 11 4 1 DSM CC Object Carousels are carried on one or more PIDs referenced by the PMT with stream type 11 The ES_intfo loop for each of these streams contains an association tag descriptor which maps the association_tag used by DSM CC messages to a particular PID 7 84 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream Table 7 14 DSM CC object carousels Association tag descriptor Descriptor Syntax CG Value Comment association tag descriptor descriptor tag 0x14 descriptor length association tag user Carousel node gt Properties gt PID Settings Association tag use 0 if the PID is used for a DSI 1 otherwise selector byte length for n 0 n lt N1 n not used if use is 1 otherwise follows the use 0_selec tor bytes format selector byte I for n 0 n lt N2 n private data byte n a not used I use 0 selector bytes transaction id Matches the transaction id of the DSI timeout OxFFFFFFFF timeout unknown I ISO IEC 13818 6 section 11 4 2 DVB Object Carousels ETSI EN 301 192 defined Although not mentioned in the DVB data standa
393. tream You can select which parameters in the stream are updated using the Others dialog box Refer to Others Dialog Box on page 10 30 for more information Sync Sets the format of the PSYNC signal output from the SPI IN OUT connector You can select TS Packet SF or Non TS For TS Packet a single pulse signal is output at the start point of each packet For SF a single pulse is output at the start point of the SF appearing every 204 X 48 X8 bytes For Non TS the Set Non TS Sync dialog box appears where you can enable the PSYNC and DVALID signals Refer to Set Non TS Sync Dialog Box on page 10 25 for more information MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual MPEG Player Menus and Controls Table 10 9 Play menu commands Play screen Cont Command PCR Initial Value Description Sets the initial value of the program clock reference base and program clock reference extension parameters when the transport stream is output When you select this command the PCR Initial Value dialog box appears Refer to PCR Initial Value Dialog Box on page 10 26 for more information Source Selects the source for stream output You can select RAM or Disk Refer to SPI ASI 310M Interface Menu Play on page 10 34 for detailed information about differences between the two sources Loop Sets whether or not the stream is output using looping method You can select On or Off If you set it to On the selected stream
394. ture m Remote control Interface Card SPI ASI 310M Option Refer to the MTS400 Technical Reference Manual for detailed specifications of the interface card connectors About the Data Output When you output the selected stream data you can select either the hard disk or Source the RAM as an output source This subsection describes the operation of the MPEG Player when each output source is selected RAM When you select the RAM as an output source the MPEG Player performs the following m When data output rate is less than or equal to 120 Mbps the MPEG Player outputs the first stream data while transferring the data from the hard disk to the RAM and then continuously outputs the data from the RAM using looping methods m When data output rate is more than 120 Mbps the MPEG Player continuous ly outputs a stream data from the RAM using looping methods after the data is completely transferred from the hard disk to the RAM If you select the RAM as an output source you cannot output data in excess of the RAM free space for the data output This RAM free space is displayed on the status bar MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 45 MPEG Player Reference Adding Jitter to PCRs 10 46 Adding Jitter Hard Disk If you select the hard disk Disk as an output source the MPEG Player always outputs the selected stream data from the hard disk regardless of the data output rate When the reading speed of the hard d
395. ue Comment 0x70 0x3 auto user This value starts at the time specified by the user Time Date Table node gt Properties gt Start Time and increments appropriately during stream output O1 h gt lt The AIT ETSI TS 101 812 section 10 4 is the main signaling component of the MHP standard and the Carousel Generator will generate an AIT for every program that carries one or more MHP carousels containing applications Note that if the MHP carousel s in a program do not have any applications defined an AIT will not be generated for that program The AIT is split into subtables based on the application _type value The current MHP spec defines two application types Java and HTML and Carousel Generator supports both If only Java applications are present in the carousels in a program only the Java subtable will be generated and the same is true for HTML applications If both application types are present in the carousel s in a program both subtables of the AIT will exist for that program MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 97 Carousel Generator PSI and SI in the Output Stream w O amer ane class 1 File Properties Include in Carousel A Cut ns Copy Pasie E A Delete Object Del ScoreDispl ak Move ko Collection b ai Make HTML Application a Make Jawa Application a Open Table 7 29 Application information table Table Syntax CG Value Commen
396. ulation system and the number of contract slots xx xxx trp Shows the file name SF Shows the number of super frames XXX XX Shows the file name FileSize Shows the file size in byte xxx trp Shows the file name of the transport stream Packets Shows the total number of packets in the transport stream When this icon is used with the S TMCC or M TMCC icon the following text information is displayed TSID Shows the ID number for the transport stream TC8PSK xx BPSK xx or QPSK xx Shows the modulation system and the number of contract slots xx PID Shows the PID value of the PAT TblID Shows the table_id value of the PAT TSID Shows the transport_stream_id value of the PAT Prg Shows the number of programs contained in the transport stream PID Shows the PID value of the TSDT TblIID Shows the table_id value of the TSDT PID Shows the PID value of the NIT TblID Shows the table_id value of the NIT 10 15 MPEG Player Getting Started 10 16 Table 10 5 Icon text Cont Component Conditional Access Table CAT Icon Program Map Table PMT Icon Program Clock Reference PCR Icon Video Elementary Stream VIDEO Icon Audio Elementary Stream AUDIO Icon AUDIO AAC and AUDIO _AC3 Icons Data Stream DATA Icon Private Section DATA_SECT Icon DSM_CC Icon Entitlement Control Message ECM Icon Entitlement Management Message EMM Icon GHOST Icon
397. uration file Currently disabled see page 8 15 Currently disabled see page 8 15 A list of the four most recently used files If the program has recently been installed the list may be empty or hold less than four files Selecting a filename opens that file for use Finishes running the program View Menu Options Table 8 2 lists the options available in the initial View menu Table 8 2 View menu options Command Interpretation Event Log Toolbar Status Bar Function Opens the Stream Interpretation dialog box This allows the scripts to be used in stream analysis to be selected Opens the Event Log window Displays or hides the Toolbar Shows or hides the Status Bar A check mark next to an option indicates that the object is currently visible 8 4 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Multiplexer Getting Started Scripts Handling Scripts SI scripts are necessary to enable SI table and descriptor data to be analyzed successfully Scripts are used to enable analysis of SI data dictated by the various international standards for example MPEG 2 DVB ATSC and ISDB Essential scripts are installed and enabled using the Stream Interpretation dialog box In the absence of any enabled scripts only the PAT table will be analyzed all other data will be presented as private data If a suitably configured script is selected and enabled before a stream is opened custom data will be analyzed
398. usel D 1 PID 100 020064 Proc Transport Stream ID O 0x0 PAT Cycle Time 100ms PMT Cycle Time 400ms o x File Edit View Session Player Tools Help f Baines aeea i Carousel Session 1 Program 1 Carousel aD Clock Reference 1 PCR only PID on ar a Table ED Network ID 0 0x0 EER Transport Steam NetID 0 TS ID 0 Program 1 Prog 1 PMT PID 1100 0 044C m E MHP Object Carousel ID 1 PID 100 020064 Proc H A Elementary Streams fe Bes Elementary Streams 4 Carousels WE Collections Programs Figure 7 2 DVB SI F o gt EO Edit Transport Stream ID D 0x0 PAT Cycle Time 100ms PMT Cycle Time 400ms This Network Network ID O 0x0 This Transport Stream Transport Stream Net ID 0 TS ID 0 NIT Cycle Time 8000 ms SDT Cycle Time 1500 ms EIT p f Cycle Time 1500 ms Pid 16 0x0010 NIT subtable for network ID O describing 1 transport stre Pid 17 Ox0011 Services SDT for Transport Stream Net ID 0 TS IDO Pid 18 Ox0012 Now Next Events EIT p f for Transport Stream Net ID Pid 20 Ox00143 TOT starting at System time when stream generation is gt A MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Time Date Table DVB Only The Time Date Table carries a UTC time in the stream which is set to a starting value when the stream is generated It is then continually u
399. value of 0x0010 0x0013 and a table _id value of 0x72 Discontinuity Information Table DIT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x1E and a table _ id value of Ox7E Selection Information Table SIT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x1F and a table _id value of 0x7F Time and Data Table TDT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x0014 and a table_id value of 0x72 Time Offset Table TOT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x0014 and a table _id value of 0x73 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 11 MPEG Player Getting Started 10 12 Table 10 3 Icons specific to ARIB format Icon Element type Service Description Table SDT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x0011 and a table _id value of 0x42 Bouquet Association Table BAT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x0011 and a table _id value of Ox4A Event Information Table EIT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x0012 and a table _ id value of 0x4E 0x6F Running Status Table RST One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x0013 and a table_id value of Ox4E 0x71 Stuffing Table ST One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x0010 0x0013 and a table _id value of 0x72 Discontinuity Information Table DIT One or more transport packets with a PID value of 0x1E and a table _ id value of Ox7E Selection Information Table
400. view of the highlighted DSM CC section U U Object Carousel This view displays the warnings that have been logged in U U Object sections during analysis of the stream 6 66 MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Analyzer Views Cycle Times View _ New ARIB 5I 1 cut mpg ARIB Data Carousels ee ia ea eee New ARIB SI 1 cut mpg ARIB Module Resources OR Cycle times can be calculated for either a carousel given a starting point or an entity in the transport stream In the following diagram a carousel is shown carrying objects A B and C ARIB Data Carousels Version Size PID Carousel Id 2147493723 0x8000004b PID 5888 01 700 fie O 16 6 KB 320 Carousel ld 2147483677 08000001 d PID 6000 01 770 io i 18 0KB 320 Carousel ld 2147483673 0480000019 PID 320 04140 E iia dule Id O 0x0 PID 320 Mtn View Resources X nom sii A Base_btn png View Resources Displays resources A DATALOGO clt Displays resouces trdm all selected version A Datalogo png module versions a A full screen bmi green_bar png i FA startup bral Carousel Id 2147483654 080000006 PID 344 0 158 oo0000000 O0000010 6C 74 69 ooo00gg2z0 75 6E 64 00000030 63 4D 44 ooo00gg4a40 665 6E 6 Resources ve teow Content Type multipart mixed boundary PanasonicMDC tom Content Length 16828 tom Content Encoding none teen Content Location H A startup bml H fullscree
401. w the conventions derived from the standards listed above In addition the following formatting conventions apply to this manual Bold text refers to specific interface elements that you are instructed to select click or clear Example Select Settings from the Configuration menu m Mono spaced text can indicate the following Text you enter from a keyboard Example Enter the network identity http TSMonitor01 m Characters you press on your keyboard Example Press CTRL C to copy the selected text m Paths to components on your hard drive Example The program files are installed at the following location C Program Files Tektronix xvi MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual kk Carousel Analyzer re oe ees Getting Started The Digital Storage Media Command and Control DSM CC protocol was originally developed to provide a VCR like control mechanism for program material delivered in an MPEG2 transport stream Since then the standard has evolved to encompass a wide variety of applications including data broadcasting and interactive television DSM CC forms a core part of a variety of both closed and open standards such as the DVB MHP Multimedia Home Platform standard for European Interactive Television The following DTV standards are supported See page 6 98 for details of all references in this section mE ISO IEC 13818 6 Information technology Generic coding of moving pictures and associated audio informa
402. wave Fle ase specify the parameters applicable to this Jitter function Mas Amplitude ns 1 0 CTF a Period ms f o Digital widen Broadcasting Back Cancel Help Specify the required parameters and select Next to move on to the Summary page Use the Back button to return to the Select New rate page The Summary page displays a short list of the specified PCR rate changes You have chosen the following actor pple PLA changes to Program 2 Old Rate Mbits 36 015 Mew Fate Mbits s 30 000 Jitter Functor none Click on Finish to recalculate all the PCA values in the program s specified Cancel Hep MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 9 37 Transport Stream Editor PCR Recalculation Jitter Functions 9 38 NOTE Select Finish to recalculate the PCR values Remember once Finish has been selected there is no going back Use the Back button to return to the previous pages to make any changes The program may take a while to perform the recalculations The Summary page will stay on screen and the Hourglass mouse pointer be displayed while the wizard is processing When the summary page disappears the calculation is complete and the file can be closed or edited Select New Rate Rate Calculation Program Number 2 Current Playout Mbits s 38 01 5 Mew Playout M biks 28 01 F Jitter Function Hane Impulse Shep 5 l g Vat Y D
403. waveform used to add jitter You can set the value from 5 to 3000 packets in 1 packet steps Amplitude Sets the amplitude of the waveform used to add jitter You can set the value from 0 27 MHz to 135000000 27 MHz 0 s to 5 s Pulse Width Sets the pulse width of the waveform used to add jitter You can set the value from 1 to period 1 packet s in 1 packet steps This Pulse Width parameter is available only when the Pattern parameter is set to Pulse 3 After you have set the parameters press the Apply button to enable the jitter function Note that the PCR icon in the hierarchy display changes To disable the jitter function open the PCR Inaccuracy dialog box and select the Undo button Note that the PCR icon in the hierarchy display changes Figure 10 13 shows the relationship among the parameters and how the PCR values program_clock_reference_base value and program_clock_reference_ex tension change when Sine is selected as a jitter pattern waveform The PCR values vary by the value of sine waveform defined by the amplitude and period The PCR period does not change MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 10 47 MPEG Player Reference litter riod eee Jitter amplitude PCA values Number of packets time t H i FCA period FCA values Original PCA values x POA values with sine jitter applied Time 1 Figure 10 13 Jitter function with a sine jitter pattern applie
404. will recalculate the PCR based on the current rate This could be used For example to investigate a suspected problem with the PCR by playing the original and recalculated versions to see if there is a difference A new playout rate can be specified and or a Jitter Function can be applied to the rate There are seven Jitter Functions available including lt none gt The available functions are Jitter Furrction APEG 2 Digital video aria Broadcasting n Each of the jitter functions is described in more detail at the end of this subsection If a Jitter Function is required choose one of the six functions from the drop down list otherwise leave it set to lt none gt Specify any change in the New Playout rate and select the Next button Selecting Back returns to the Select program page When no Jitter function lt none gt was selected the Select Jitter Parameters page will not appear Go on to the Summary page which shows a picture of a checkered flag With a Jitter Function selected the next page will be Select Jitter Parameters This asks for additional information specific to the chosen Jitter Function For example the Sine Wave function requires the parameters shown in the following illustration MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Transport Stream Editor PCR Recalculation Select Jitter Parameters You have selected to add the hollowing ektronix 5 function a i dither Function Sine
405. with an option from the Edit menu operation New values can be entered from the keyboard As each character is typed the cursor moves on to the next It can be repositioned with the mouse or by using the up down left and right cursor keys The cursor will not move forward beyond the end or back before the start of the packet To select another packet use the Slider Bar Block of Bytes A block of bytes can be selected for operations such as copying to the clipboard or filling with the same value Click on the first required byte and hold down the left mouse button Then drag the mouse pointer to the last byte to be selected and release the left mouse button Both the ASCII and Hex views can be used for selection The selection is shown in inverse video in the view from which the it was made and by an outline around the selection in the other view For example when made from the ASCII view a selection looks like this 47 40 10 30 1 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF PE FF FR FF FR FP BF BP FE EY FF BP FF FP Pr FE FFE FF FF FF FF FF FP FE FP FE FP FE FF PF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF BF PF FPF FP FP PP PP Ee PP Be PE FE PF FE PF FEF PP FF FP EF FP BF PE FE PE FP PE FP FP PF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FR FF FF FF FP FR FF FR FEF FP FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 40 FO 32 ab CD Cl 00 OO 2 12 A0 10 41 44 46 45 52 45 4E 54 20 4E 45 54 5H METU 4AF 52 4H FO 13 00 OL AB CO FU OD 43 OB O1 09 be Wie
406. y Copies the graph to the clipboard in the selected format ousel Analyser OC_abcd_mpg E Window s oom la Gasa amp EFU Image dable zE C source MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 6 15 Carousel Analyzer Menus and Controls Window Menu Options Table 6 8 shows the options available in the Window menu Table 6 8 Window menu options Command Function Cascade Rearranges the windows like this 0c abcdmea PIDe CSIR Cg OC_abed_mpg U N Download iat Services a Service 1 c_source Ee DSM CC UN messages on PID 150 0x96 tag nf table_id 59 Ox3b OSMCC_UN f table_id 60 0 3c DSMCC_Download Object Carousels roo Tile Tiles the windows For example four windows would be tiled like this OC_abed_mpg Object Carousels Service Gateway 5 a B E b Bc DQ Adoe cpp R Adoeh Adocdect cpp PID 150 Id Ova ADDY Adocdect h P Dy ADOCFILE CPP M ADOCFILE H oy AFRM CPP SoD AFAM H ci OC_abcd mpg U N Download efi U N Download Messages aj Versio laa Services Ge fy DSI Messages pat Service 1 c_source El my DII Messages DSM CC U N messages on PID 150 0496 tag oF DII Id 1 01 PID 150 0x96 Section table_id 59 043b DSMCC_UN I fig Modules ii Section table_id 60 0x3c DSMCC_Downlc Aiea Module Id 65516 Oxffec PID 150 0x56 aas Object Carousels i i Block number 0 moduleld 65516 Oxttec ca Obje
407. y for the make seamless treatment Tektronix MakeSeamless Wizard Analyse Choose one of the programs then select West to check the content Select Abort at any time to cancel the operation l ektronix Program Program 1 5 elements B start packet 0 i Make remaining programs seamless Humber of Packets 200001 i Make PSIYSIVPSIP seamless Progress amp Information Type Time Message INFO 1245025 Searching for PAST CP INFO 12 50 25 Seach for FAT complete DAZ P INFO 12 50 25 Searching for PMTs CP INF 12 50 25 Seach for PMTs complete Digital Video Broad asting EEE Tektronix rEG Test p System lt Back Cancel MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 12 7 Make Seamless Wizard Program Highlight the required program from the drop down list wie programs then select Nest to check tric col Select Abort at any time to cancel the operation Programm Pragrarnt 3 Program 1 5 elements start packet Pragramt 2 5 elements grams seamless Program 3 5 elements Humber of Packets Pragram 4 5 elements seamless Program 5 5 elements Information Start packet This value determines from where the primary program is to be analyzed Indicates the offset from the original transport stream start point to start looking for a loop start point Number of Packets Initially this value is set to the total number of packets in the transport stream It indicat
408. y limits fields indicate the extents of the Display limits bar and the current Pointer position The Pointer can be dragged to a new position on the Stream limits bar The Display limits bar will center on the Pointer Clicking to the right or left of the Pointer will cause it to move to the left or right respectively MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 8 67 Multiplexer Views 8 68 Duration Control The duration of each element in the stream is given by the Start and Stop values and shown graphically by the associated bar The components are color coded according to which program group they belong to The Start Stop and Length values can be changed by clicking on the appropriate field and entering the required value The associated bar will reflect the change The Start Stop and Length values can also be changed graphically by manipulat ing the bar The cursor shape indicates what action can be taken O E A E Lee The changes are reflected in the associated field values Components can be changed individually In addition whole Program groups can be changed by manipulating the Program duration bar but only when the view is sorted by Program cial i i _ S XX Description Pid Start Stop Length Extent Tektronix 11 21 49 76 38 55 N MFEG 2 udio 170 14 49 3817 2368 C C ___ MPEG 2Audio 130 11 21 4976 38 59 C Il MPEG 2 Video 110 1
409. yer gt Stop Playout OOo0O0000000 Player gt View Packets Time 0000 00 00 4 Toggle Packet Time display Toolbars can be dragged off the edge of the main window into a floating pallet To do this place the mouse pointer on the background inside the Toolbar not on one of the buttons hold the left button down and drag the toolbar into the main window area The result is a self contained window that looks like this 2 eH ODah z r gD To replace the Toolbar on the window border drag it over the border until the outline changes shape It can be placed on the top bottom left or right edge The Toolbar may be hidden from view View gt Toolbar MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual Carousel Generator Menus and Controls Icons The icons in Session windows are used to provide the user with a graphical indication of status Icons incorporating an arrow indicate a shortcut function for example elementa ry streams displayed in a Program node in the Programs view indicate a shortcut to the elementary stream in the Elementary Streams node Table 7 10 Session icons Icon Function Collections node Collection node containing the Service Gateway al At least one collection must exist during any session The collection containing the Service Gateway cannot be deleted E Ordinary collection node Not containing Service Gateway z Compressed collection a Directory object Included in Carousel I
410. yntax 4 TS Generation Tektronix Carousel Generator The values may be changed at any time in the session it may be useful to review these settings at the end of a session before the transport stream is created Select Player gt Stream Generation Properties to open the Stream Generation Properties dialog box or select Edit in the properties window or double click in the properties window MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual 7 39 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com Carousel Generator Carousel Generation Stream Generation This screen provides stream generation values to be used in the current session Properties x Output 5 tream Output Stream T5 Bitrate 8 000 hibits FSIS Type ove SI impose a minimum duration of 20 seconds write timestamps Tektronix time starnping format DI tout File CHbempicarousel mpg Eel Relative Paths in Session Allow relative paths based on E Update al existing paths to be relative ta this base 7 Cancel TS Bitrate The bit rate of the output transport stream Range 0 25 Mbit s to 90 Mbit s PSI SI Type This selection will dictate the tables that are created in the generated stream If MPEG PSI is selected only the PAT and PMT will be present If DVB SI is selected the mandatory DVB tables NIT actual TDT SDT actual and EIT p f actual will also be ge

MTS400 Series MPEG Test Systems User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents